GIFT OF i f ^ In demy Zvo, price ds. 6d. net HEBREW SYNTAX BY THE LATE A. B. DAVIDSON, Litt.D., LL.D. PROFESSOR OF HEBREW AND OLD TESTAMENT EXEGESIS NEW COLLEGE, EDINBURGH THIRD EDITION " A companion volume to the author's ' Introductory Hebrew Grammar,' the excellence of which may be inferred from the number of editions through which it has passed. . . . This ' Syntax ' is, undoubtedly, the best of its size hitherto produced in this country, and is in every way well adapted for students and for practical teaching."— Z£>«^<7» Quarterly Review. Edinburgh : T. & T. CLARK, 38 George Street AN INTRODUCTORY HEBREW GRAMMAR WITH PROGRESSIVE EXERCISES IN READING, WRITING, AND POINTING P AN INTRODUCTORY Hebrew Grammar WITH PROGRESSIVE EXERCISES IN READING WRITING, AND POINTING BY THE LATE A. B. DAVIDSON, Litt.D., LL.D. PROFESSOR OF HEBREW, ETC., IN THE NEW COLLEGE, EDINBURGH (twentieth edition) revised throughout by JOHN EDGAR McFADYEN, BA.(Oxon.), MA., D.D. PROFESSOR OF OLD TESTAMENT LANGUAGE, LITERATURE, AND THEOLOGY UNITED FREE CHURCH COLLEGE, GLASGOW AUTHOR OF "old TESTAMENT CRITICISM AND THE CHRISTIAN CHURCH" "INTRODUCTION TO THE OLD TESTAMENT" ETC I Edinburgh : T. & T. CLARK, 38 George Street I 9 I 6 Printed by Morrison & Gibb Limited T. & T. CLARK, EDINBURGH LONDON : SIMPKIN, MARSHALL, HAMILTON, KENT, AND CO. LIMITED NEW YORK : CHARLES SCRIBNER's SON^ ^ PREFACE TO THE NINETEENTH EDITION. At the request of the publishers I have undertaken the revision of the late Professor A. B. Davidson's Hebrew Grammar. With some reluctance, I confess ; for it is always dangerous to touch the work of another man, especially when that other is a master, and his work, in its original form, has achieved an almost unique popularity, as attested by eighteen successive editions. But two considerations decided me to make the attempt. Firstly, eighteen years of experience in teaching the grammar and dealing with students in their initial struggles with the language, have convinced me that there were not a few perplexities which did not readily resolve themselves to men who had only an average stock of patience and linguistic interest. And secondly, the publishers gave me an absolutely free hand. Of the liberty thus generously accorded, I have made very ample use. With the exception of the vocabularies (which, however, have been slightly extended by the addition of proper names) and of the exercises for translation (which again have been in places considerably modified) little remains of the original Grammar but the order of the sections. The following are some of the features of that Grammar which seemed to call for special attention in a revision. (i.) The very important sections i— lo, on a complete under- vii 3G2734 Vlll PREFACE TO THE NINETEENTH EDITION. standing of which practically everything depends, were somewhat abstract in their complexion ; and their useful- ness, it seemed to me, might be considerably enhanced by fuller explanations and a more liberal use of illustration, (ii.) The sections in small print created a problem for the beginner. He began by assuming that their contents could be safely ignored at first, and usually ended by ignoring them altogether. But these sections sometimes contained matter of first-rate importance. I have en- deavoured to reduce the small print to a minimum, weaving the more important matter into the regular sections, and omitting whatever it did not seem strictly necessary for the beginner to know, though there is room for legitimate difference of opinion as to where this line ought to be drawn.^ (iii.) The many references to Old Testament passages, which not one student in a hundred ever looked up, I have omitted, giving instead one illustra- tion (or more) which I have quoted in full. A vivid illustration of an important principle strengthens the learner's appreciation and grasp of the principle ; and, for this reason, I have throughout the book made compara- tively lavish use of illustration, and — in the earlier sections — also of transliteration, in order that the beginner might be in no doubt as to the pronunciation of Hebrew words, (iv.) Frequently ditto marks were used to indicate, not that the word above was to be repeated, but that the analogy of the preceding column was to be followed ; in such cases I have written the word in full. In other cases again {e.g. § 29) the paradigms were too brief and left the student in the lurch just at the point where he most needed guidance. Doubtless perfect familiarity with earlier ^ Throughout the translation exercises, e.g.., 1 have indicated the Methegh ; also the accents ^illuq and ^Athnahy where the vowels were affected. PREFACE TO THE NINETEENTH EDITION. IX analogies would have enabled him to fill in the gaps, but the average student could not do so with any confidence. In such cases I have written the paradigm in full, leav- ing nothing to guess-work or possible misconstruction, (v.) The vocabularies preceding the exercises were not seldom incomplete. No doubt the necessary words could always be found in the longer lists at the end of the book ; but the fact that some words were given raised the very natural presumption that all would be given, and the student, when he came to the translation, was often disappointed to find himself confronted with words to which his previous preparation, however careful, gave him no clue. I have therefore considerably extended the vocabularies to the sections, so as to include all the words necessary for translation, (vi.) Some sections (e.g. on perfect and imperfect § 46, numerals § 48) contained no exercises — neither Hebrew into English, nor English into Hebrew ; others contained only one or the other. To every section where these were wanting I have added translation exercises of both types, on the principle that one cannot see too much of a language one is trying to learn, (vii.) I have added to each translation exercise, beginning with the very first, two or three sentences of unpointed Hebrew for pointing as well as translation. As an exercise, pointing is almost as useful as translating from English into Hebrew, and it has a fascination all its own. In every discussion and explanation I have endeavoured to place myself at the beginner's standpoint, and, so far as possible, to offer a treatment which would be sufficient for him without extraneous help. There is doubtless an in- evitable amount of drudgery in the study of any language ; but the fundamental principles of Hebrew are really so few and so pervasive that, if they are properly understood, the strain upon the memory (except for vocabulary) is very X PREFACE TO THE NINETEENTH EDITION. little. The all but universal repugnance to the study of the language is explained partly by the fact that it is begun later in life than other languages, at a time when men's minds are less responsive to, and more intolerant of, a new and unfamiliar discipline ; but it is due also in part to the mistaken idea that its principles are intricate and haphazard. Nothing could be further from the truth, and I have sought to leave upon the reader's mind the conviction of the essential simplicity and regularity of the language. Despite the many modifications which I have introduced, I have worked with a full sense of the respect and gratitude due to the noble scholar whose vital interpretation of the Old Testament so charmed and stimulated the successive generations of students and preachers who fell under its spell ; and I could not wish for the grammar, in its new form, any better fortune than that it should win as many friends and exercise as wide an influence as it has done in the past. I desire to acknowledge my special obligations to Professor Arthur Ungnad's Hebrdische Granimatik, which seems to me the most attractive treatment the subject has received in our generation. JOHN E. McFADYEN. United Free Church College, Glasgow, 22>rd September 1914. 1 PREFACE TO THE TWENTIETH EDITION. In a little more than a year, another edition of the Grammar has been called for. This fact, coupled with assurances I have received from many parts of the world, — from professional scholars and teachers on the one hand, and from students on the other — encourages me in the hope that the revision was not undertaken in vain. This edition is not a mere reprint of the last. The book has been entirely reset. I have numbered practically every paragraph in this new edition throughout, so that it ought to be more convenient for purposes of reference. I have also incorporated suggestions submitted to me by various scholars, more particularly by the following, whom I desire herewith to thank — Rev. Canon Fowler, D.C.L., Hebrew Lecturer in the University of Durham ; Rev. Prof. A. C. Welch, Th.D., of New College, Edinburgh; Rev. Prof J. A. Selbie, D.D., of U.F. Church College, Aberdeen ; and the Rev. Prof J. Strahan, D.D., of Magee College, Londonderry. JOHN E. McFADYEN. United Free Church College, Glasgow, \st July 1916. ( CONTENTS. Introduction ...... SECTION 1. Hebrew Alphabet ..... 2. Vowel Sounds. Vowel Letters 3. External Vowel Signs, Massoretic Points 4. Coalition of Massoretic and Textual Vocalization . 5. Principles of the Syllable .... 6. The Vowel System and the Tone 7. Daghesh. The Letters B'ghadhk^phath 8. The Gutturals ...... 9. The Quiescents ..... 10. The Accents. Methegh. Maqqeph. Pause. Q^re. K^thibh 11. The Article ...... 12. Personal Pronouns ..... 13. Demonstrative, Relative, Interrogative, and other Pronouns 14. Inseparable Prepositions .... 15. The Conjunction ..... 16. The Noun. Inflection .... 17. Cases. Construct state .... 18. First Declension ..... 19. Pronominal Suffixes ..... 20. The Verb. Perfect ..... 21. The Imperfect, &c. ..... 22. Verb Active and Stative (Transitive and Intransitive) 23. Jussive, Cohortative, Waw consecutive 24. Scheme of the Regular Verb .... 25. Niphal ...... PAGE I 4 7 13 19 21 24 30 34 37 38 42 45 46 50 53 54 58 63 66 71 76 80 82 88 89 XIV CONTENTS. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30- 31. 32- 33- 34. 35- 36. 37. 38. 39- 40. 41. 42. 43- 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49- Pi'el, Pu'al, Hithpa el Hiph'il, Hoph'al Skeleton Paradigm of Regular Verb Second Declension Third Declension Verbal Suffixes Irregular or Weak Verbs Pe Nun Verbs and Nouns Pe Guttural Verbs and Nouns Pe 'Aleph Verbs 'Ayin Guttural Verbs and Nouns Lamedh Guttural Verbs and Nouns Lamedh 'Aleph Verbs and Nouns Pe Yodh and Pe Waw Verbs 'Ayin Waw and 'Ayin Yodh Verbs Nouns 'Ayin Waw and 'Ayin Yodh Double 'Ayin Verbs . Nouns Double 'Ayin . Lamedh He Verbs Apocopated Forms and Nouns Lamedh He Doubly Weak and Defective Verbs Table of Irregular Nouns . Perfect, Imperfect, and Participle The Adjective, Comparison . The Numerals Particles English-Hebrew Vocabulary . Hebrew-English Vocabulary . Paradigms of Verbs . The Accents . Index of Subjects Index of Hebrew Words INTRODUCTION. i INTRODUCTION. The beginner should enter upon his study of Hebrew with the assurance that it is not only not more difficult, but in some important respects easier, to acquire a working knowledge of that language than of most others. With a reasonable amount of intelligent application, he will more quickly learn to read a piece of ordinary historical narrative in Hebrew than in Latin, Greek, or German. Hebrew, of course, has difficulties of its own, which must be frankly faced. Of these the three which meet the be- ginner on the threshold are (i.) the strangeness of the alphabet, (ii.) the fact that the language is read from right to left, and (iii.) the unlikeness of some of the sounds to any in our own language. A little practice reduces the first two difficulties to the vanishing point : the third is more serious. There are, e.g.^ two k sounds and two / sounds, one in either group having no equivalent in English. Thus if, for the one k which appears in kol, the word for all, we substitute the other k, we get the word for voice. Unless, therefore, we learn from the beginning to make some dis- tinction between these sounds — and this is not easy — in | ^)(^t^^ pronunciation, we shall be in perpetual danger of confusing ^kjo^ totally dissimilar words, (iv.) Another difficulty is that the ^ roots are almost entirely triliteral,^ with the result that, at ^^^^^"^^^ first, the verbs at any rate all look painfully alike — e.g. ^vv-ol-^ malaky zakai\ lamad, harag, &c., — thus imposing upon the_i ^2.0/1 ^ mpy 'qrb may be a genuine quadriliteral ; but behind most quadriliterals (cf. pms krtnl, garden-land) lies a triliteral root {eg. 013 krm^ vineyard). There are probably also biliteral roots (§§ 40, 42). I 2 IN7 RCDUCTION. memory a seemingly irrt olerable strain. Compound verbs are impossible : there is nothing in Hebrew to correspond to the great and agreeable variety presented by Latin, Greek, or German in such verbs as exire, inire, abire, redire^ 8ic. ; i/c^aivetp, ifji^aivetv, avaffalveiv, KaTa^alveLV, &c. ; ausgehen^ eingehen^ aufgehen^ untergehen, &c. Every verb has to be learned separately : the verbs to go out, to go up, to go down, are all dissyllables of the type illustrated above, having nothing in common with each other or with the verb to go. But against these difficulties have to be set facts which weigh more heavily on the other side. (i.) The working vocabulary of Hebrew is comparatively small. Many rare words occur, as we should expect, in books like Job ; but the running vocabulary of average prose is meagre and simple. To know a dozen or even half a dozen chapters thoroughly is to have the key to an immensely wider area, (ii.) The noun has no case-endings, and the verb has only two tenses. What a contrast with the elaborations of Latin and Greek, especially, eg., of the Greek verb ! (iii.) Hebrew syntax, though it has many subtleties of its own, is, broadly speaking, extremely simple, as a glance at any literal translation of the Old Testament, with its ever recurring and, will show. The clauses in a Greek or Latin sentence are built together : in Hebrew they are laid together. By the use of particles, participles, relative and other sub- ordinate clauses, a number of thoughts are expressed in those languages in their perspective and relation to each other and presented as an artistic whole — it may be with only one principal verb. The Hebrew habit is to co- ordinate rather than to subordinate, and one principal verb follows another with a regularity which reminds one of the simple speech of children. A piece of idiomatic Greek, such as the introductory words of Luke's Gospel, does not readily go into Hebrew. Even simpler Greek would become simpler still in Hebrew. Take, eg.. Mat. ZJ. 28-30 : KoX iKBvaavT€<; avTov p^Xa/iuSa kokklvtjv TrepiedrjKav avroj, kol ir\i^avTe<; aT€(f)apov . . . inreOrjKav iirl t?)? KecfiaXrjf; avrov , , . Kol yovvireTtjaavTe'; . , . iveirai^av avrut . . . KoiX INTRODUCTION. 3 ifiTTTVCFavTe^ eh avrbv eXafiov rov KoXafiov, &c. These participles would in Hebrew be most naturally rendered by finite verbs, and the passage would run as follows : " and they stripped him and put a scarlet robe on him and plaited a crown . . . and put it upon his head and kneeled . . . and mocked him . . . and spat on him and took the reed," &c. Manifestly this makes for syntactical simplicity, (iv.) When the principles underlying the language — which are simple enough — are understood, it is found to be characterized by an altogether extraordinary regularity. Hebrew is methodical almost to the point of being mechan- ical. The so-called irregular verbs, e.g., are, for the most part, strictly regular, springing no surprises, but abundantly intelligible to one who understands fundamental principles. It is therefore of the utmost importance that the learner be at pains to understand those principles from the very beginning, passing over nothing which he does not clearly see and which he has not thoroughly grasped ; and if he goes forward to the study of the language with a faith in its regularity, he will find its very phonetic and grammatical principles to be instinct with something of that sweet reasonableness, that sense of fair play, we might almost say that passion for justice,^ for which the Old Testament in the sphere of human life so persistently and eloquently pleads. ^ Cf. the striking words in Deut. 16. 20, " Justice, justice shalt thou pursue." Illustrations of the principle of compensation will appear passim. OF SOUNDS AND WRITING. § I. HEBREW ALPHABET. Name. Form. Sound and Sign. Signification of the Name. Numeri- cal Value. 'A-leph t^ Final. » Ox I Beth n b, bh House 2 Gi-mel :i ' g, gh Camel 1 , 3 Da-leth 1 d,74h Door ^" -^ 4 m n h Air-hole o?- Lattice- window ? 5 Wdiu 1 w Hook 6 Zd-yin ^ z Weapon 7 Hith n b Fence 8 1 Teth ID t Snake ? 1 9 Yddh •1 y Hand lO Kaph ID !T k, kh Bent hand 20 Ld-medh h 1 Ox-goad 30 Mem f2 D m Water 40 Niin ^ ] n Fish 50 Sd-mekh s Prop 60 'A-yin ^ t Eye 70 Pi I D n p, ph Mouth 80 ga-dhe !r V 9 Fish hook ? 90 Qdph P q Eye of needle or back of head ? 100 Resh n r Head 200 Stn, Shin totr s, sh Tooth 300 Taw n t, th Sign or cross M^ 400 § I. HEBREW ALPHABET. 5 The shapes of the letters appear originally to have roughly represented the objects denoted by their names ; e.g. v) {sJi) suggests tooth, for which the Hebrew word is sJicn. These resemblances, which are often remote and obscure in the present alphabet, were frequently more obvious in the older form of the alphabet, in which, e.g., the letter 'dyin, which means eye, was represented by O, and the letter taw, which means cross, by )i^ or '('. I. These 22 letters are all consonants. The vowels, which were not originally written, came, in course of time, to be indicated in a manner which will be explained in §§ 2-4. The absence of vowels from the alphabet, and the conse- -qiient appearance of no letters but consonants in the original form of the Hebrew text, might be regarded as a grave misfortune, and likely to expose interpretation to ambiguity : the consonants nm, DBR, for example, can be read to mean speak, or speaking, or he spoke, or word, or pestilence. In point of fact, however, these conflicting interpretations are generally little more than theoretical possibilities : the con- text usually puts the matter beyond doubt, just as, in an English sentence written with consonants alone, it would be tolerably easy to discover whether FR stood for far, fare, fair, fear, fir, fire, for, fore, four, fur, fray, free, fry, or fro. The proof that vowels are by no means indispensable to a rapid and accurate appreciation of meaning may be found in the fact that in Pitman's phonetic shorthand, the report- ing style, which practically dispenses with vowels, can be read with perfect ease. i< is sometimes mistaken by beginners for an a : this it could not be, as it is a consonant. Similarly V is mistaken for a y, whereas y (as in yet) must be represented by ^ (yodh). Hebrew is written from right to left. Observe how the following letters are distinguished : (i) 3 3 3 J. D >^ is round, n d has a "tittle" (Mat. 5. 18) at the lower right-hand corner, 3 n is square, while } g \s broken at the foot ; (2) 1 1 "]. ^ d is square at the top, "i r is round, *] final /; is like T d, but comes below the line ; (3) n n n. n ^ is open at the top, n ^ is shut, and 6 § I. HEBREW ALPHABET. n th has a foot at the left ; (4) "» H {• ^^ y does not touch the Hne, ") w does, t 2" has a cross-stroke at the top and is wavy, while | final n comes under the line ; (5) D D. D J is round, and D final m is square ; • (6) D D- D / is open at the top and D m open at the foot ; (7) y V I*, y (transliterated by ') has its tail turned to the left, V f curves first to the right, ^ final f, droops its tail straight down. 2. It is very important to learn from the beginning, so far as possible, the distinctive sounds of the various consonants for which we have no precise equivalent, and especially of those consonants whose sounds more or less closely resemble each other. Hebrew, e.g., never confuses D (/) with n (/), nor 3 {k) with p (^), nor n {It) with n (//), nor D (J) with V (f). The letter ^? (transliterated by ') expresses simply the emission of the breath. It may be well heard if in such words as re-enter^ co-operate^ the stream of sound of the first vowel be suddenly shut off, and the second vowel uttered with a new emission of breath. Its appearance and effect at the beginning of a Hebrew word may be roughly compared to that of the letter h in the word hour. To transliterate the English word aniy for example, into Hebrew, we should require to begin with the consonant N, representing the emission of the breath ; so that, ignoring the vowel (which we have not yet learned to write), the word would be Dfc? ( = ';«, not airi). The letter n is a deep guttural sound like ch in the Scotch word loch or the German Macht. The letter y had also two sounds, the one a sharp gut- tural sound bearing the same relation to N that n bears to the simple n, the other a vibratory palatal sound like the French r. Greek could not reproduce this consonant ade- quately any more than English ; it transliterates it some- times by a smooth breathing (p^oy = "" A\idKr]K)^ sometimes by a rough breathing (''^j; = 'H\t, also 'H\ei), sometimes by 7 (nry = TuX,a). Our transliteration is always ', and some modern pronunciations scarcely distinguish it in sound from K; but an attempt should be made to give it a guttural quality. The lingual sound D / is produced by pressing the flat of the tongue to the top of the mouth ; in n / the tip of the tongue touches the teeth. § 2. VOWEL SOUNDS. VOWEL LETTERS. The letter p q (by some transliterated k) is much stronger than 3 k^ and is pronounced farther back — at the back of the palate. It must not be pronounced like qu. The sign ^ Shin sounds sh ; '^ Sin sounds s, and D is scarcely distinguishable from it: in the Old Testament they are sometimes, though rarely, interchanged, e.g. ^2'^ for i^b' to hire. The letter v f is a sort of hissing s. It bears the same relation to D i" as d / does to n t. The traditional ts, which has sometimes been retained for conveniently distinguishing *i from the other sibilants t:' b^ D T, is a quite incorrect trans- literation. 3. The six letters n in 3 D n have a double pronunciation, -which will be explained in § 7. Suffice it here to say that, when they have a point in their bosom, they are hard, and pronounced thus : n <5, a^ (as in gas, never as in gevi), "n d, ^k, Qp, n /; when they have no point (e.g. 2, J, &c.) they are spirant and usually transliterated by the somewhat mis- leading dk (pronounced v), gh (like N. German g in Tage), dh (like th in this), kh ph ( =/) th — for which some scholars prefer to adopt /3 7 S % ^ ^. 4. The five letters v D 3 » D are written thus : *^ pj | D "], when these letters happen to be the last consonant of a word. All the finals except D have a tail coming below the line, and no other letter except p comes below the line. fj begins above the line. EXERCISE. WRITE THE FOLLOWING IN ENGLISH AND HEBREWS :ymry ,mir j^vr:^ ,Di;to py^ ,]pT ,n::i ,^^^ ,1-^^ :xr\ ,n^!i jp« ,nn« ,]v:3 ,mi p-^r::^ ,]:id ,d^d3 ^i^ bh, b, 1, Im, ml, st, shn, Ikh, gdh, dgh, qwm, rg, kph, gw, hm, ms, mt, '5, r', 'm, yyn, ngn, mym, Vphph, hms, gyg, tmm. >N.B. — The forms bh, gh, &c., represent 3, J, &c., without the dot; b, g, &c., the dotted letters 2, 2, &c. § 2. VOWEL SOUNDS. VOWEL LETTERS. I. The vowel system is of fundamental importance. It can only be completely understood by watching the trans- formations which the vowels of a word undergo in the living 8 § 2. VOWEL SOUNDS. VOWEL LETTERS. language, but the general principles can be made clear at this stage. There are in Hebrew, as in other languages, short vowels, long vowels, and diphthongs. But in Hebrew, besides the ordinary short vowels, there is a vowel so short as to be practically indistinct ; the long vowels may be either pure long or tone-long ; and the diphthongs have passed, for the most part, into the form of long vowels. What this means, and when these things occur, will now be explained. 2. Vowel Sounds. — The three primary vowel sounds are A I U (pronounced ah ee od), and these may be either long or short. Though it would be scientifically more accurate to begin with the short vowels, let us begin, for convenience' sake, with the (i) Pure long vowels. — The vowels of a Hebrew word are, as we shall see, capable, in certain circumstances, of great transformation : the essence of a pure (or naturally) long vowel is that it cannot, under any circumstances, be modified. For example, the 6 in qotel is a pure long vowel ; that is, nothing that can happen to the word (e.g. the addition ^.a suffix) can in any way affect the length or quality of the ^, which remains, through all possible transformations of the word, unchangeable. Syllables which, etymologically, would involve the diphthongal formations at (from an original ay) or au (from an original azv) are generally written, instead, with e and o. Cf sound of ai and au in French. Thus gul- lay-tha = gul-lai-tha —gul-le-tha \ and haw-shibh = ha7i-sJiibh = ho-shibh. (The vowel 6 is not always diphthongal in origin, but may be long in its own rights, corresponding with the Arabic d in cognate words; e.g. Hebr. shdldrn = Arab, saldmu; Hebr. qotel =Kv2ih. qdtilw. cf stone, Old Eng. stan.) Thus the pure long (including the diphthongal) vowels are a e loti, all unchangeable, and indicated in transliteration by the cir- cumflex accent. The pure long d is much the least common. (2) Tone-long vowels. — In contrast to the pure long vowels which, as we have seen, are long by nature and un- changeable, are the so-called tone-long vowels, which are long only because they happen to be where they are, and which, when their place shifts, no longer remain long. To under- § 2. VOWEL SOUNDS. VOWEL LETTERS. Q stand this, it is necessary to remember that by tone or accent is meant the stress of the voice, and the tone-syllable is the syllable of the word on which the stress falls — in Hebrew^ as a general rule, the last syllable. In the noun present, e.g., the first syllable is the tone-syllable ; in the wQxh p7'esentj it is the last. Now the great strength of the Tone in Hebrew, besides demanding for the tone-syllable (as a very general rule) a long vowel, has the further curious effect of lengthening, where possible (this reservation will be readily understood when we reach § 6), the vowel of the preceding syllable. These vowels, thus long or lengthened, are known as tone-long vowels. Thus, neither of the vowels in ddbhar (im word) is pure long, both are tone-long : the latter is long because (being in the last syllable) it bears the accent, and the former is obliged to be long because it falls immediately before the tone-syllable. The first vowel, of course, need not be ^ ; it might conceivably be e or o, but it must be long: a short vowel in this place would be in- conceivable. The moment, however, the word receives an addition, one or both vowels will be instantly transformed : e.g. dibk're, where the first vowel has changed, and the second almost vanishes (in a way to be explained in § 6). Similarly the e of qotel almost vanishes in the plur. qotlmz : this is possible only because ^ is a tone-long (not a pure long) vowel. The o and the e in the word qotel happily illustrate the difference between a pure long and a tone-long vowel. — The tone-long vowels are did (but not I nor //), written with the long mark, to distinguish them from the pure long, which are written with the circumflex. Of course the vowel of the tone-syllable or the pre-tone may, etymologically, be pure long in its own right ; e.g. pure long in tone gad/iol, 'dstr; in pre-tone qStel, hekhdl. (3) Indistinct vowels. — The great strength of the Tone in Hebrew has the further curious effect of reducing, where possible (this reservation will be readily understood when we reach § 6) the vowels before the pretone to a swift and somewhat indistinct sound, which approximately corresponds to the e in the word the., and which is represented by the small ' above the line. For example, the plural of ddbhar 10 § 2. VOWEL SOUNDS. VOWEL LETTERS. is d'bhdrifH : The last syllable has, as usual, the tone ; the pretonic syllable has a tone-long vowel ; and the original long vowel a (long in ddbJidr because it was pretonic), now that it is two places from the tone, vanishes into the in- distinct ^ This, of course, can never happen where the first vowel is pure long ; e.g. kokhdbh could never become k'khdbhhn, but only kdkhdbhini^ though roniah (with only a tone-long o) ^ naturally becomes r'md/nm. \ When this in- distinct sound is attached to one of the four guttural letters y n n N, it becomes more distinct, and definite vowels are written, less distinct than full vowels, but more distinct than the indistinct vowel which follows ordinary consonants. These vowels are transliterated by '"" " above the line ; thus, /finor, ^^mor, Jilt. In spite of the identity of transliteration, there is, as we shall see in § 8, no possible confusion between this ^ (with gutturals) and the other. (4) Pure short vowels. — The three primary pure short vowels are aiw. a could be deflected into e (cf. a in many : and ketch for catch) and even into i (as instant in careless speech becomes instinf) ; i could be deflected into e (as kitchen in careless speech becomes ketchen), and u into — the root qudsh^ seen in iel) quds, the modern Arabic name for Jerusalem, becomes, with suffix, qodshi. But these bald statements can hardly be understood till we come to the study of actual words. The short vowels are therefore aeiou, and, in transliteration, receive no accentual mark. 3. Vocalization. — (a) All the Semitic Alphabets consisted originally of consonantal signs only (§1.1). In course of time the need, or at least the desirability, of expressing in some way the vowels of a word came to be felt. To meet this need, instead of adding new letters to the alphabet, three of the existing consonants, ^ "i n,^ were drawn upon to ^ This word belongs to a familiar group of nouns in which, for good reasons to be afterwards explained (§ 29), the penult has the accent, while the last syllable is unaccented. 2 K, as an indication of long a {e.g. X2C^ shemi, sleep), may be here ignored, as it is rare and late. Such a form as DNp for qdm {he arose) \s extremely rare. § 2. VOWEL SOUNDS. VOWEL LETTERS. I I represent certain vowels.^ As these signs, however, were not now exclusively reserved to represent vowels, but could still retain their full consonantal force, this device might be supposed to lead to confusion. In point of fact this is not so : for, as every Hebrew syllable must begin with a con- sonant, these letters, if they appear at the beginning of a syllable, are necessarily consonantal ; they will (with one or two trifling exceptions) be vocalic only at the end. In D^ e.g.y the ^ is consonantal {yam, sea), in ""O it is vocalic {nd, who). Similarly Dn is hem {they), but r\D is ma {what). At the end of any other syllable than the last, however, n has its consonantal force of h \ e.g. T[2^T\'0 = ma\\pekh2i {overthrow). Here the last n represents a vowel, but the first is a consonant : this, however, is perfectly natural, as the root verb, from which this noun comes, is "^Dn haphakh {to turn), where n, coming first, must be a consonant. {b) On account of their being used to indicate vowels, the letters ^ 1 n have sometimes been called vowel lettej^s, or vocalic consonants (also matres lectionis) ; it is altogether reasonable that these letters should be reserved to indicate only important vowels. Generally speaking, therefore, they are never used to indicate short vowels (in the few cases where this happens, it is considered an anomaly, and atten- tion is called to it in a footnote to the Hebrew text) : it would not be even conceivable that they should be used to indicate the indistinct vowel \ They represent therefore the long vowels ; and, broadly speaking, the pure unchange- ably long rather than the tone-long. This, too, is eminently reasonable, that the vowels most deserving consonantal representation are those which, like the consonants, form an integral and immovable part of the word. (r) The following is the usage, when the consonants in question are used to represent vowels : ^ This would occur doubtless first of all in cases where these letters had been ultimately consonantal : e.g. a before l (i.e. aw) would pass (through au) into 6 ; so uw into ii ; ay {at) into e ; and zy into i. Thus 1 would come in time to stand for long o and u, ^ for long e and /. 12 § 2. VOWEL SOUNDS. VOWEL LETTERS. n represents, chiefly ,i the long a ; •I represents the long i or the long e ; 1 represents the long o or the long u. Thus, independently of the special system which was later devised for the accurate representation of the vowels, we know that no is ma, "h li or le, 'h lo or lu, '•DID sosi, sose, susi or suse. Only a knowledge of the language, of course, will enable us to decide between these possibilities ; but within these narrow limits words containing long vowels may be accurately read. id) But though n represents, as a rule, long a, it does not follow that every long a should be represented by n ; in point of fact, this distinction is reserved only for a long a at the end of a word.- E.g. nDID = susA {mare\ but ddbhdr = laT (word), and even qdmtm = D-Dp, {arising, plu. ptc). {e) Similarly, at the end of a word, all the other long vowels, e, i, o, u, are regularly represented by a consonant : ••Dp = game or qdmt, \op = qdmo or qamii. When any of these four long vowels, however, occurs in any other place than at the end, a distinction is usually drawn between the pure long and the tone-long vowels. Broadly speaking, the tone- long vowels are not represented by a consonant, while the pure or naturally long vowels are : e.g. nai? = lebhdbh {heart), where the e is only tone-long and changeable, capable of vanishing into ^ ; whereas r\'r^ = skird (song)^ where tbe i is pure long, and constant. So -ip3, boqer (mohting), where the o is tone-long and changeable ; but 331D, kdkhdbh (star), where the 6 is pure long and unchangeable. Though the usage is to represent the pure long vowel consonantallyvjhis is not invariable : e.g. qitor TiD^") {thick smoke), may also oe written "iitop or even -ii2p ; so qote/z^bn^p or bop {killing, ptc), MritbJnm = D^nns or 0^313 {chei'ubs). But it is an almost invariable usage that the merely tone-long vowel does not have consonantal representation : e.g. Icbhdbli could not be l^h. So, for qotil we may not write i>^Dip or f)^Dp. * Sometimes also long e and o^ but never /or u. * The 'pronominal suffixes, however, ka^ ha, ta, are usually written without n ; thus •], not nD, &c. §3- EXTERNAL VOWEL SIGNS. THE MASSORETIC POINTS. I 3 EXERCISE. WRITE THESE WORDS IN ENGLISH LETTERS. ,mi^t2) ."h^h ,n^ip ,inv^^ ,p^ ,]^^ ;h ,^^ ;r2^o ,^d ,nD ,*iti?^iin ,^iir ,irm^ip hv ,Timn ,d^d-id ,n:^^tfin ,p"':^n Write these Hebrew words, expressing the vowels' by vowel letters : qum, qom, shir, shirim, sus, sus6thenu, qdq, \i, 16, lu, me, meshibh, moth, helil, hul, hila, hogi', giph, meqig, tobhe, niri, hoshibhu, holikhu, lule, meniqothenu. § 3. EXTERNAL VOWEL SIGNS. THE MASSORETIC POINTS. I. So long as Hebrew was a living language, the helps to vocalization described in § 2. 3, though scanty, might be found sufficient. But when the language ceased to be spoken and became unfamiliar, fuller representation of the vowels was needful for correct reading. The proof of this is that the vowel-less text was frequently read in one way by the Greek translators, and in another by the later Jewish scholars who added the vowels. E.£^., Gen. 47. 31, "Jacob bowed upon the head of the ded" (mitta) ; but in LXX, "of the staff" (matte). (Cf Heb. ii. 21.) The conso- nantal outline is the same for both words, ntoion : had the vowels been original, the mistake could not have been made. So in Amos 9. 1 2 the Edom of the original becomes men ( = Hebn 'adam) in the translation (cf. Acts 15. 1 7) ; ancTin Zeph. I. 10, " the ^.y/^-gate," D^nn haddjaghhn of the original, becomes " the gate of the slayers," D''J"in ho/ghzm, in the translation. (This last passage also incidentally illustrates the early confusion of n with n.) The necessity for determining the exact sense, in combination with the literary activity of the time, gave rise to the present very complete system of vowel signs. As the pxonunciation of the language was not expressed by signs but handed djOwn by tradition, this tradition became lan important 14 § 3- EXTERNAL VOWEL SIGNS. THE MASSORETIC POINTS. branch of study. The word for " tradition " is A/assord, under which term was embraced the whole Textual Criticism of the Scriptures, including the vocalization and reading. Hence those who employed themselves about this have been called Massoretes, and the new system of vowel signs introduced by them is named the Massoretic System of Points. The history of this system is difficult to trace. The names of its authors are quite unknown. So complicated and perfect a machinery of signs could have been matured only very slowly and by successive generations of labourers. The system probably dates from the sixth and seventh centuries ; neither Jerome (d. 420 a.d ) nor the Talmud {c. 500 A.D.) appears to know anything of vowel si£^ns. Being the result of a formal scientific effort to express the pronunciation of the language, it is, like all systems of vowel notation arising in similar circumstances, completely phonetic ; the new signs, however, are not regarded as integral parts of the word and are not placed among the consonants, but, with rare exceptions, beneath or above them, outside the word. The names given to the vowel signs probably have some refer- ence to the action of the mouth in uttering the sounds.* Th?^ sounds are contained in the first syllable of most of the names. V : J § 3- EXTERNAL VOWEL SIGNS. THE MASSORETIC POINTS. I 5 m H O Ph CJ H o ^ 1 a 5^ ^i) "5) I PI • ^ 2J- a c o en w c n3 u.. s d) r; '^ c 0) ^ > a ^ ►^. ^ 1^ a 1- ^ t; -^ ^t:^ ^ c '<3 <:i K OJ ^ 'Q Hi '^ <$ KSo ^^ ^^ ►;-. h;^ ^ 1 c\>- 1: n: rj- \" r-- 1 r^ H 1 a ^D ^<^ ;^' ^ ^ crL. fZV. O CO W o > < W H X w c w .J < H iV.5. — 1^ the above illustrations I have intentionally written words involving the pure long t without the vocalic letter ^ which usually accompanies tbem, in order to exhibit the vowel signs by themselves. o '« '« ►^ ::^ ►"Cj ^ '§- ^ 1 ,A K r"»- 1' a r Vm "^ Sj %» ^^ ^ w b/Dl3 R s ' k '^ . ^ ^ • ►^ <5i Q ►^ 1 ^1 i IT ^ n. ^ •♦^. f^- to r ■^ <^t &| O ■r>^ <::> «o <:: ' 4-> "^ CJ C ••^ tr -hi -^ en D C C •-H > The customary felling will be explained in § 4. fiiui 1 6 §3. EXTERNAL VOWEL SIGNS. THE MASSORETIC POINTS. (i) This vocalic system, ingenious and comprehensive as it is, has one or two disadvantages, which, however, are more apparent than real. (a) It does not distinguish between long i and short i. E.g. in D*]P*f n {he destroyed theni) the first i (in hisJi) is short, while the second is long. But the explanation simply is that, as every Hebrew syllable must begin with a consonant, and the last syllable must therefore be dhdm, not dm, consequently the second syllable is not midh, but mi-, and then to the first two syllables we have simply to apply the rule that the vowel of an unaccented shut syllable {i.e. one ending in a consonant) is short, while the vowel of an open syllable {i.e. one ending in a vowel) is long. Therefore the first i is short and the second long, and there is no real confusion : — hish-mi-dhdm. {b) The risk of confusion, however, would seem to be much greater with the sign ^ , which may represent two vowels not only of different classes (first d, and third 0) but even of different quantity (long d, and short d). Doubt- less the reason for the identity of sign was the approximate similarity of sound between these two vowels ; just as ^, in words like small, is pronounced like '^^), yCI h^lh sickness (not vn) ; and occasionally, though rarely, with others, e.g. where a letter is followed by the same letter, as ^^^V (^arfnt, my brifiging of clouds), where ^33V (an'nt) might have been expected. (c) The sign of simple sh^wa . is also put under every consonant without a vowel of its own, if it be sounded and not final, § 5.6 b. The sh^'wa in this position is called silent^ having no sound. E.g. in ?^\>} niqtdl {killed, ptc), the p has . under it, because, unlike : and d, it has no vowel of its own ; on the other hand,S, though, like p, it has no vowel of its own, is written without . , because it is final. (d) It is unfortunate that the same sign . should be used to indicate both sound and silence — on the one hand, an indistinct vowel, on the other, merely the end of a syllable ; but, as we shall see, there is little possibility of confusion in practice. It ought to be remembered that two sounded or vocal sh'was cannot come together; e.g. such a form as ^^?^ d^bh're is manifestly impossible : therefore when two sUwas occur together, as in ^^tpp* {they kill), the first must be silent sh'wa ending the syllable {yiq), and the second the vocalic sJiwa beginning the new syllable fht (or perhaps even constituting by itself the second syllable f\ cf § 5. 2). (4) Position of the vowel sign. — (a) The vowel sign stands under the consonant after which it is pronounced, as "ip mar, bitter, ">PJ ndm'er, a leopard; with the exception of holem, which stands over the left corner of the consonant which it follows, as ph hoq, statute, |bi? qdton, little, and shiireq, which has the compound sign, as D^D siis, a horse. Final kaph occurs only with qdmeq and sUwa, and these it takes in its bosom (not beneath it), as ^3, ^3, b'khd, bdkh, i?t thee. (b) A holem preceding c^ coincides with its point, as T\^^ ntdshe, Moses, not nc'b. But there is no possible ambiguity; for as the consonant o at the beginning must have a vowel to follow it, and as none is visible, not even a sh'^wa, the vowel must be concealed somewhere — it is really the vowel • § 4. COALITION OF MASS. AND TEXTUAL VOCALIZATION. 1 9 absorbed in the point of the ir. Similarly a holem following b* coincides with its point, as ^53b' sd7te\ hating. Here again there can be no dubiety : the word could not be read as s'ne\ which would be ^<3b. The figure b' will be sho at the beginning of a syllable, and os elsewhere, as "^pb^ sJw-mer, keeper. This could not be osnier^ for then we should have a word be- ginning with a vowel, which is impossible ; b*Q"J1 yh'-pos, he treads. There is no temptation to read the last syllable of this word as sho, for the D could not then be construed in the word at all. The first syllable is manifestly j/r : the D must therefore begin a new syllable, and be accompanied, if not by a full vowel, at least by a sounded sJiwa. But there is no sh^wUy therefore the dot on the right tip of the u in- dicates the vowel o, and the second syllable must h^ pos. (c) When holem precedes the letter K at the end of a word or syllable, the point is placed on the right apex of the letter, as n21 bo (enter) ; when it follows, the point is on the left apex, as nj< ^obh {necromancer). When the N begins a syllable, the Jidle7n occupies its proper place, as DN*3 bodyn {their entering), EXERCISE. TRANSLITERATE THE FOLLOWING HEBREW WORDS INTO ENGLISH, AND ENGLISH INTO HEBREW WITH MASS. VOWELS. ,-i? ,n^ ,;i-i ,115? m ,D^ P^^ h^ ,D3 P^ ,in y^ :^\ ,D5n ^T\ ,Y-j ,D)? ,t^Dtr ,trDi ,'^ttJt:? p\n ,^i)^^ :r^v ,m:^ > _ gam, b6r, bosh, shubh, shir, shor, sham, hoq, Mm, 'im, k5l, qol, 'am, har, robh, rug, hVogh, gel, heq, mashal, m^shal, q6tel, shalom, yarug, qomam, po'°16, '^soph, heh^ziq. § 4. COALITION OF THE MASSORETIC AND TEXTUAL VOCALIZATION. (a) The Massoretes are supposed to have abstained from any alteration of the written consonantal text. The rudi- mentary vowel system expressed by the vowel letters remained 20 § 4- COALITION OF MASS. AND TEXTUAL VOCALIZATION. untouched. At the same time their own system was not a mere supplement to this, but a thing complete in itself. It thus happens that in all those cases where a textual vowel already existed, there is now a double vocalization, the textual and the Massoretic, the effect of which is to confuse the beginner. Thus on the older system, qol would be i'lp {voice), and shird m^K^ {song) ; with the Massoretic vowels alone, these words would be respectively written ^ and ^^!. But in reality the vowels were added to the existing con- sonantal text, which motives of reverence left intact, and in which the naturally long vowels were, largely, already con- sonantally represented. Therefore we have the forms ^ip and HTC^, in which the vowels are practically written twice. Forms like these graphically represent to us two widely separated stages in the development of Hebrew vocalization. (b) A vocalic consonant, used as a consonant, is not usually followed by that same consonant used as a vowel : in such a case only the vowel sign is written, e.g. riiVP miqwoth {commandments),inwh{ch. the 1 must be consonantal {w; cf.sing. njVD migwd)y is better than nilVD (in which the first 1 would be consonantal and the second vocalic). Again, in such a word as |iy ^dwon {iniquity), the 1 must be consonantal {w), as the first syllable is V, and a consonant is needed to start the new syllable. (c) There is a manifest disinclination to multiply these consonants, in their vocalic use, within the same word : con- sequently the same consonant is seldom twice thus used in consecutive syllables ; eg. D^"|^ {shiriin for D^"i^K^ songs), li^^^p {q'tdluhii for inii>Dp they slew him). (d) When the consonantal letter is present (as in \>''^, heq, bosom) the syllable is said to be written fully {scriptio plena) ; when it is absent (pn) the syllable is said to be written defectively {scriptio defectiva). See also § 9. (e) When vowels are written fully, i.e. with the vowel sign and the vocalic consonant, the Massoretic point stands in its proper place under the consonant which it follows, except holem, which is placed over the tvaw ; e.g. -''n (not 7'n) //// {to writhe) ; i^'n M {rampart), but h\n (not h^r\\ Jiol {sand). Exercise. Write the ivords in /''.vririsr J^ 2 witJi the Massoretic as well as Textual vowels. §5- PRINCIPLES OF THE SYLLABLE. READING. 21 § 5. PRINCIPLES OF THE SYLLABLE. READING. 1. (a) Hebrew is a strongly accented speech, and the Accent or Tone to a great extent rules the various vowel changes in the language. It is important to know where the accent falls, as the same word, differently accented, may have two widely different meanings; e.g: nm naMy she rested^hwt nnj ndhd\ he led\ so (^^3) bd7iii\ they built, but banu, in us. Usually, however, the accent falls on the last syllable of the zvord, e.g. '^%^\ydshdr, upright, iPJ zdqhi, old', in certain cases it may fall on the penult, e.g. Tf, qcren, horn ; IJK ^ozen, ear (§ 29). (b) If the accent be on the penult, either the accented penult or the unaccented final must be open ; e.g. "»BD sipher^ book ; J^pPiJ qdtdltd, thou hast killed. 2. Kinds of syllable. — A syllable ending in a vowel is called open, as 1^ qd\ one ending in a consonant is called shut, as S"? qal (light, swift). Every syllable must contain a vowel, and the shVas or indistinct sounds are not usually considered sufficiently vocalic to form syllables ; e.g. D^^i?f {elders) would contain two syllables, z^qe\nim. Some, however, regard sh^wa, simple and composite, as (like the full vowel) constituting a syllable, and would consider this word trisyllabic z\qe\mm. In prose, little depends upon the decision of this question. 3. (a) Vowel of the syllable. — The vowel of an open syllable is long, e.g. n in D^C hdkhdm {wise) ; it may be short if it has the accent, as ^ in D^.P^ shd-md-yim {heavens). The vowel of a shut syllable is short ; it may be long if it has the accent. In ^^\>} niqtdl {killed, ptc), e.g., the i of the first syllable, which is shut, is short, while the a of the last syllable, though it is also shut, is long, because that syllable, being the last, is accented. (The sign ^ could not therefore be 0, which, being short, would imply that the syllable' was unaccented.) So ^^?^P qdtonti, I am little. --• '- (b) The vowels i and ti cannot stand in a shut syllable before tzvo consonants, even with the accent. We shall see the bearing of this in § 40. 6 a. 4. (a) Another kind of syllable, not uncommon, is the half open. It has a short unaccented vowel, but the con- sonant that would naturally close it is pronounced with a 2 2 § 5- PRINCIPLES OF THE SYLLABLE. READING. slight vowel sound after it represented by s/iiva, and thus hangs loosely between this syllable and the one following, e.g. >Dp:3 bi^tol, in killing ; which is not biq-tol nor bi-q'tol ; ^1^^^. yishrc^ which is not yish-rc nor yi-sJire (though, without dividing into syllables a fair transliteration would be biq'tol, yish're). If the first syllable were absolutely closed, the sMzva would then necessarily be silent, whereas sh'wa in words of this kind (as will be seen when the forms are mastered) always represents an ultimate full vowel ; e.g. the original word from which '''}}r^\ comes is 0^'}?*'! fshdrim (sing. '^t^\ ydshdr, uprighi), and the second vowel, it is felt, ought not to be allowed to disappear absolutely. The vocalic sh^wa therefore retains it, so far as it can be retained. (b) Some scholars, however, emphatically deny the existence of the half-open syllable, treating the sh'wa in such cases as silent and the first syllable as shut. Sievers,^ e.g.^ says : " A syllable is either open or closed : there is no such thing as an intermediate." The truth probably is that, for the reason given above, the sliwa was originally sounded, but that in course of time, through rapid or careless speech, it gradually disappeared (just as the ^ has been lost \npast{e)ry, and as in careless speech the i tends to be lost in family ^ and the o in history). We shall throughout regard the s/iiva in such cases as sounded, and the syllable as half open, as some phenomena we shall soon meet can perhaps be better ac- counted for on this assumption than on the other (§ 6. 2 d. i.). 5- Beginning of the syllable. — Every syllable must begin with a consonant : such a word as ore would therefore in Hebrew have to begin with an N ; thus ik or liN. (The only exception is the conjunction \ w\ which in certain cases is written i « ; cf. § 15. i c.) No syllable can begin with more than two consonants (nor even with more than one, if the sHwa under the first consonant be held to constitute a syllable). When a syllable begins with two consonants, i.e. if the first consonant has no full vowel of its own, the two consonants must be separ- ated by the slight vocalic sound indicated by sh^va, simple or composite, which is placed under the first, as 7b|^ // qal {light, adj.). A true double letter requires a vowel after it ; eg. n^i^ qalld (fem. of ^\>). The seemingly exceptional riN Qatt) thou (fem.), is explained by the fact that the word was originally ^^>^ 'atti (then probably ''atf). (b) Simple sh'wa silent is placed under the consonant that ends the syllable, if the consonant be sounded and not the last letter of a word, as ?9p3 niq-tdl {killed). A consonant not sounded {i.e. quiescent) does not take sh^'wa ; eg. n^t:'fc<"! {beginning), not ^^^'^^l re-shtth ; ^^^3 {in the days of . . .), not ■•p^a (because the N and '' are not sounded), nor does a single final consonant {e.g. D^' there, not DK'), except kaph, which takes sh^'wa in its bosom, probably to distinguish kaph 1 from nun \ (thus '^ to thee, not 1^ Idkli). But two sounded con- sonants at the end of a word both take shVa, as ^^\> qosht ^ Cf. Mr. Chadband's eulogy of " Terewth " in Bleak House (ch. xxv.). 2 Cf. Principal G. A. Smith, The Early Poetry of Israel (Schweich Lectures for 1910), p. 4. Ch. i. has a brief but illuminating discussion on the characteristics of the Hebrew alphabet. 24 § 6. THE VOWEL SYSTEM AND THE TONE. {truth). If, however, the first is silent and consequently drops the shVa, the second drops it too ; thus riN^ipp Hqrathy because the N is silent. Words ending in two consonants are rare. (c) In a few words, e.g. Ntjn het^ sin, ^y\ way-yar^ and he saw, or showed^ N^3 gay, valley, the presence of the N, though now otiose, is justified etymologically, like the n in condemn. (d) Rule for placing Sh'wa. — The rules in 5 and 6 regarding shVa (simple and composite alike) may be put briefly thus : Sh'wa (simple or composite) is to be placed under every consonant without a full voivel of its oivn, if the consonant be sounded (not quiescent) and not the single final letter of a word. Examples on the Syllable: ht\> qd-tdl, ^rht\>^ qd-tdl-ti, Dn^PP ^tal-t^m, D^3-i3 k'rii- bhfm,\^\>}^\ yish-q'ltl\ b-'nnn habh-dfl, n?^?^ mam-U-kheth, DHDj; ""bhd-dht'in, ^^n-^K 'io-he-khd, "T^l fii-dhe', \^^. yashq, "'P?.'! ye-d-mer, l^.^.jn Jfld-y^-nu. If, however, the vocal sh^was be counted as syllables (cf. § 5. 2), then we shall have q^-fal-tem, Jf-ld-y^-nll, &c. EXERCISE. WRITE THE FOLLOWING WORDS IN ENGLISH, DIVIDING THEM INTO SYLLABLES. Write these Hebrew words: qotel, qam, 'ekht5bh, maqom, wl6, mizmon,- qitlO, shamayim, qO'mii, Iminehu, Olyamim, yereq, lilqot, mamlakh^, Ishalom, shmonim, shne, mqomi, yor- shim, nilham, yisra'ei, shm6, na'ar, h"m6rim, le'^soph, 'amalnft. Note. — In the above English words simple sh^'wa, silent or vocal, is not expressed : the exercise is set partly for practice in placing it. The accent, unless marked, is on the last syllable, both in the Hebrew words and English transliterations. § 6. THE VOWEL SYSTEM AND THE TONE. The principles of this paragraph are of fundamental im- portance : practically the whole vocalization of the language § 6. THE VOWEL SYSTEM AND THE TONE. 25 depends on them. They should therefore be very clearly grasped before passing on. The following table is the same as that on p. i 5, though the classes of vowels are placed in a different order, to show better some points of connection between them : FIRST CLASS. A sound. (a) naturally long vowels — (b) pure short C"^) ~ (c) tone-long — (d) vanishing of tone-long -^ (e) under gutturals _ SECOND CLASS. THIRD CLASS. I and E sounds. | O and U sounds. / r_. / r ' A J_ _/" ^ (-r) As we have already seen, § 3. 2. 2 b, , though usually short, may be regarded as tone-long in the first syllable of words like "HPlD, and (written ^_-_) as pure long in forms like HivJri tighlend {they reveal^ fem.), n^D*D sTcs^hd {her horses). 1 . Unchangeable vowels. — The vow^els in the first line being naturally long, whether pure or diphthongal, remain unaltered in all forms of the word. They are the vowels a i u i 6. Thus the long vowel in the words ^ qdni {he arose), p''n or IMLJi^ {bosom), "T't^ shir' {song), hS\> qol {voice), D^D sus {horse) — being naturally long, and therefore (in the case of second and third class vowels) usually, though not necessarily or in- evitably, having consonantal representation — remains un- changed through all possible transformations of the word. The pure short vowels also, standing generally in shut syl- lables (§5.3 a), are from position unchangeable, because, if the syllable be truly shut, it cannot be entered, and the vowel within it is therefore invulnerable. They are aiu e 0. Thus the first vowel in the words ^J^P qdmnic {we arose), pniD merhdq {distance), p")Tp mizrdq {basin), ^ntJ'D mosJihdth {ruined, ptc), ^^t^9 mushldkh {thrown, ptc), is unchangeably short, because the syllable is shut. 2. Changeable vowels. — It will be well at this point to remind ourselves that, though Hebrew has strongly marked peculiarities of its own, the effect of the tone upon adjacent vowels is not without parallel even in our own language 26 § 6. THE VOWEL SYSTEM AND THE TONE. The vowels in the first three syllables of the words analogue, analogy, analogical, for example, obviously are seriously modified by the shifting of the tone. The most important vowels in reference to inflection are those in the third line called Tone-long, a e o \ that is, vowels not long by nature but from occupying a certain position in relation to the place of tone (§5-1 a), and therefore change- able, when their relation to the tone alters, by change in the place of accent. Tone-long vowels are therefore vowels long through their relation to the place of the tone. We shall see in sub-paragraph (b) precisely what this means. With the tone-long vowels must be taken the shVas (whether simple . or composite _. ... ^.), § 2. 2. 3, which are full vowels reduced to the vanishing point by reason of their relation to the tone. This will become clear in sub- paragraph (c). (a) There are only three tone-long vowels, __ _ — '- de o^ one for each class ; a short hireq (_.) when tone-lengthened becomes not long hireq but qere —-, and a qibbug ( . ) when tone-lengthened becomes not long qibbug but holem (— ). (b) Tone-long vowels are produced by proximity to the tone, and are found in the open syllable immediately before the tone (rarely after it), and in the shut syllable, chiefly the Jinal, under the tone. In "^^^ yashar, upright, e.g. Xh^ last syllable, though shut, has a long vowel, because it is accented — the last syllable is usually accented (§ 5. i a) ; therefore "IK'; would be wrong (but cf. f). Again, the first syllable, being immediately before the tone, and open, must also be long ; therefore "'K^ would be wrong and impossible. Of course, if the syllable before the tone is shut, its vowel is short and must remain so ; thus 3!?rD mazlegh, fork (not 37rp, which, if the form existed, would really be mozlegh — short o\ (c) i. The indistinct vowels or shVas are produced by distance from the tone, their common position being what would be an open syllable two places from the tone, or any open syllable further removed. The end of the word being, as we have seen, so heavily weighted, the earlier part is made as light as possible, consistently with the laws of the language. Thus in ^''^y>\ fshdrtm (plur. of 1?';) the last syllable, as § 6. THE VOWEL SYSTEM AND THE TONE. 27 usual, has a long vowel ; the pretonic is open (because the last syllable is D''1 rim) and therefore requires a long vowel, ^ ; and the syllable before the pretonic being open (J yd in the original singular), must be accelerated by its vowel being reduced to the faintest vocalic sound, viz. shVa : \ y\ Thus the word whose original is "»K^^ becomes D"""]^. and can be- come nothing else. No more serious violations of Hebrew vocalization could be conceived than such forms as D^T^^. or D^I^J. Naturally, the vowel of the syllable before the pretone cannot vanish into a sh^wa if it be an unchangeably long vowel {e.g. D'?3i3 kdkhdbhim {stars\ manifestly could not become 0^333 M khdbhim, as the 6 with its consonantal repre- sentation is unchangeable) ; nor can it so vanish if the syllable be shut {e.g. Dy^'?^ killed, ptc. pi., could not become D7Dpp. The syllable i?3 niq is closed, and its vowel cannot be touched^, besides, p3 would be an impossible form, as a syllable requires a full vowel). In the illustration "i^- the vowel of both tone and pretone happens to be ^ ; but *any of the long vowels may appear in either place ; eg. li^T zdqen {pld\ |bp little, 33^ heart. ii. The rules may be summed up as follows: the final accented shut syllablCy and the pretonic syllable, if open, have tone-long vowels ; the vowels before the pretonic are, where possible, reduced to sMwa} The vowel of the tone or pretone may, of course, happen to be long by nature : w^ Idshon {tongue), ^''K'J ndsi'' {I'uler)^ ^Dip qdtel {killing), 3313 kdkhdbh {star). iii. The indistinct vowel arising from the loss of a vowel of any class under ordinary consonants is simple sh'wa vocal \ thus DnK^> from ^^\, ^??^ {my heart) from 33^5, D-noi {spears) from n^n.2 Under Gutturals (§ 8), it is one of the hatephs, generally h.pathah for vowels of first and second class (i.e. not b- s^ghol for second class) and h. qdnieq for vowels of third ^ Only in very rare cases and with vowels long by nature in the tone, do indistinct vowels fall in the place immediately preceding the tone, as 3n3 k^tMbh {a writing\ D^P^. {substance). 2 This word, accented on the penult in seeming contravention of the rule, will be explained in § 29, and need not now perplex or detain us. 28 § 6. THE VOWEL SYSTEM AND THE TONE. class ; thus D-bDn from D3n (wise), D'?^"^^ ("ot D^^^Jn) from 3.^n ^ (y<:z/, noun), OTIC! ^ro"^ ^l*^ ^ (w^zf/ 7«<7/. construct, § 17) or composition (as when, e.g., the prepositions 3 in, 3 ^j-, ij /^, precede a word beginning with sh^wa : e.g. in'^K^rpi) /(? his anointed; cf. § 1 4. lb) this would happen, the first becomes a full short vowel, most commonly the vowel hireq. Thus the impossible ^"}tJ" becomes "•^f". yish're, and in^'C'^^ becomes in^trnb lim'shiho. In the former word, as so frequently, an original a (seen in sing. y^shar, iK'J) has been thinned to i (cf. instaiit, covenant becoming in careless speech instint, covenint', cf. § 2. 2. 4). ii. If the first of the sh^was be a composite (as will happen when the first consonant is a guttural, cf. § 8. 2 a) the short vowel arising is not i, but is generally the full vowel corre- sponding to the composite shVa. Thus V^^H (from D?n wise) becomes not ""P^n but ^^^n hakUme. That is, the flavour of the original vowel is retained ; and this occasionally, but rarely, happens with other than guttural consonants ; e.g. "•^33 (from ^153 a wing) becomes not ^S33 but 'B33 kan^phe. (e) The new syllable arising with this short vowel in such cases is generally half open (§ 5. 4). That is, the ^\ in ^7.K^*. and the 3n in ^^3n are not completely closed, for the sh^wa is not silent but sounded ; nor yet are the ^. and the n com- pletely open, for that would make these vowels long, thus giving them an importance which the history of the forms shows that they do not deserve. A sh^wa in such a place (nK'^) would have no right to become a long vowel. The syllable is therefore commonly regarded as half open, be- cause it is neither quite open nor quite closed. These loose or half-open syllables become perfectly easy to understand when we remember that the sh'^wa represents an original full vowel. Or conversely, if by processes of in- flection or composition, an original full vowel is reduced to a shVa, the sh^'wa must be sounded, and the syllable to ^ These words, accented on the penult in seeming contravention of the rule, will be explained in § 29, and need not now perplex or detain us. § 6. THE VOWEL SYSTEM AND THE TONE. 29 which it belongs is regarded as half open. If it were to be regarded as closed, then the sh^wa would be silent, and the original full vowel would have disappeared without trace : whereas it is one of the fundamental principles of Hebrew to conserve, in whatever way possible, the ultimate elements of words. E.g. to consider the first syllable of ^'}}^\ as closed and the sh%a as silent would obliterate the fact that originally a full vowel {a) stood between sh and r (pi. 0^")^*^^ sing. "IK^J). The only way of preserving this in the derivative form of the word is to treat the sh^wa as sounded, not silent, and there- fore to regard the syllable as half open : we therefore trans- literate j;//.f//?r rather than yishre. This principle covers most of the illustrations of the half-open syllable. E.g. Impera- tives (2nd pi.) like ^?^\> {kill) are half open, because the sh^va corresponds to a full vowel in the singular Pbi^ kill (i.e. qiflu from q'tol: the original o is now represented by ^). Similarly with nouns : np")3 b'rdkhd {blessing^ with a suffix becomes (first ^0?"!?, then) ^r^?"|3, i,e. not birkdtJii, but birkhdthi {my blessing), (f) The principles stated in sub-paragraphs (b) and (c) are carried out both in nouns and verbs. There are, how- ever, two remarkable exceptions. First, the law in (b) regarding the tone-long vowel in the final accented shut has not been carried out fully in the case of the vowel a. (i.) Verbs always write a for a (except in pause ; cf § i o. 4 a). Thus PPP qdtdl, he killed, not i'^P — that is, the last syllable, though accented, has the short vowel, if it be a. This a in verbs is subjected to change precisely as if it were a. (ii.) Nouns regularly write a for a in the hurried form known as the construct state, to be de- scribed in § 1 7. 2 a. Thus the construct of "i^'j is "»^'"! (not ">f'l). Second, in opposition to the law in (c), in the case of ve^-bs^ the sh^wa stands not in the second place from the tone but immediately before it. Thus, while the noun (or adjective) inflects '^^'\, Tr\^^ (fem.) y'shdrd {upright); the verb inflects "irj^ n^B'"; ydslird {he, she, was upi'ight), the sh^'vva being sounded to represent the original vowel a. So adj. Mn {wise), nDDn ; vb. Q^n {he was wise), '"^o^n. (But see § i o. 2 b.) ^ 30 § 7. DAGHESH. THE LETTERS " B^GHADHK^PHATH." EXERCISE. CORRECT THE FOLLOWING WORDS. ,a"*^'»"^5 .^''i.?1 '^^Oi?l? P''?^^ ,D'''^.?D ,^2%p ,^:]^tp(: tD"")?! ,im^n p"'?^^^ ,'nj2^T^ p'j^tp ,Dni?2^pn iVi?/^. — The accent falls on the last syllable, unless where other- wise indicated. §7. DAGHESH. THE LETTERS " B^GHADHK'FHATH." (SPIRANTS.) 1. The word Daghesh is from a root which possibly ex- pressed the idea of hardness. The sign of Daghesh is a point in the bosom of a letter, and this point was used (i.) with the n 3 3 T J 3 letters to indicate their harder pro- nunciation (a b, Sic.) ; and (ii.) with consonants generally, to denote duplication — or more strictly, a strengthening, which can best be indicated by duplication. The former is called Daghesh lene^ the latter D. foj'te. 2. Daghesh lene. — (a) Hebrew has not two sets of con- sonants for the sounds b g d k p t and their softer forms bh gh dh kh ph th. It distinguished the sounds by means of the point Daghesh (§ i. 3). The harder sounds it ex- pressed by inserting the point, as 3 b^ Q/, n /, &c., leaving the unmodified consonant 3 D n, &c., to express the weaker bk ph th, 8ic. The softer sounds were natural or easy only after vowels ; hence the rule : The six letters n D 3 "i J 3 (therefore known as b'ghadhk'- phath) are hard and therefore have Daghesh lene whenever they do not immediately follow a voivel sound : ivJien they do immediately follow a vowel sound they do not take the Daghesh — thus ">3J zd-khdr [he remembered), ''br yiz-kor {he remem- bers). The first 3 follows a vowel {a), and therefore has no daghesh ; the second 3 does not follow a vowel (as the first syllable is closed, ^/zV), and therefore has the daghesh. Hence these letters receive the point : always at the beginning of a sentence or clause ; ahvays in the middle of a word after a shut syllable ; and generally at the beginning of words. § 7. DAGHESH. THE LETTERS " B^GHADHK^PHATH." 3 I (b) For this purpose vocal sh^wa, simple or composite, has the same effect as the full vowels ; e.g. 'y^\ z^khor {remember)^ DDn Jikham {wise\ § 6. f, I. ii.). Such forms as I3t, Dsn are impossible, as they would imply that no vowel preceded the a, which would again imply that . and _. were silent — a manifest absurdity. In this way we can easily tell, in the case of the b^ghadhk'phath letters, whether a syllable is half open or not ; e.g. i33?3 {in his heart) must be bil'bhdbho (pronounce bitvavo). If pronounced bilbavo, it would require to be written i32p3. This would be wrong, as the original word for heart is 337 ; his heart, by § 6. 2 b c, is nab (§ 19); and this vocal sh^wa, representing an original full vowel e, must not be allowed to disappear into a silent shVa. Being therefore sounded, it keeps the possible daghesh out of the following beth. (c) The only other thing that need here be said is that Hebrew does not point mechanically, but considers words in their relations to each other. Therefore, if a word beginning with a b'ghadhk'phath letter be very intimately connected with an immediately preceding word ending in a vowel, the two words are treated practically as one, and the daghesh is not inserted. Contrast, eg., i?""''?'! and it was so, Gen. I. 7 (where the connection is very intimate, and further indicated in Hebrew by the hyphen ; cf § 10. 3) with *3 'n^i and it came to pass, when, &c., Gen. 6. i (where the connection is broken, and a new start is made with ^3). 3. Daghesh forte. — (a) Hebrew does not write a double consonant. To indicate that a consonant is doubled, or rather strengthened, it inserts in it a point, as 'b\>. qal-lti (they were swift). When so used the point is called D. forte. The syllable before this daghesh is necessarily shut, for 'h\>_ = \h\>_^ and its vowel therefore short. Daghesh forte can be in- serted in the letters ^ and \ when they are used consonantally ; thus nsy qiyyd {dryness), njn hiyyd {fie preserved alive), li*V giyyon {Zion), njy giwwd {he commanded), I'lV gawwii {command, imp.), ^)\> qawwdm {their line ?). There is no danger of this duplicated waw being confused with the vowel shtlreq, be- cause, in the nature of the case, a duplicated letter must be preceded by a vowel, and, conversely, if there be a vowel I before the 'J, then the ^i must — ww and not u. If, e.g., in D^l? 32 §7. DAGHESH. THE LETTERS " B^GHADHK^PHATH." we gave ^ the value of u, there would be no consonants with which to read the vowels and - . The word is ~ T therefore = d;"|i^, i.e. qawwdni. The duplicated consonant should be distinctly and firmly enunciated, as in Italian. (b) When, by processes of inflection, a consonant is written twice, with ^silent sh^'wa between, d. forte is used ; thus I33n: ndthannu (we gave) becomes 1303. But if the shVa be vocalic^ the daghesh f. must not be used ; thus nSi'p qiHath must not be written ripip qillath, because the sh^'wa is sounded, repre- senting as it does an original a ij^'?. qUdld, cut'se, noun). (c) It is important to note that the gutturals (i.e. y n n s) cannot be duplicated, and therefore cannot take daghesh forte. Thus we cannot write "^V^ (he burned^ consumed), or nnc' (he destroyed). See § 8. 4 c. 4. D. lene is peculiar to the six Rghadhk'phath ; but these letters, like all consonants except the gutturals, may be doubled and take daghesh forte ; thus i3^ sJiibber (he broke in pieces). In these cases it is the hard sound of the con- sonant that is doubled : i.e. we say shibber, not shivver ; so "iBD sapper (relate y imp.), not saffer. Daghesh forte and daghesh lene can never be confused, because daghesh forte, as we have seen, is always preceded by a vowel ; daghesh lene, never. Thus in 'is'ip midJibdr (wilderness) the daghesh in the 1 is necessarily d. lene : were it d. forte, it must have a full vowel before it to constitute the closed syllable ending in the first beth, whereas it has no vowel at all. Even if it were possible, as it is not, to regard the shVa as vocalic, it could not form the vowel of the assumed closed syllable. Consequently this word could not conceivably be read as midh'bbar: the last syllable is "»3, but the one before it could not possibly be 3"] — between the n and the 3 there would need to be a full vowel, e.g. 31. On the other hand, the daghesh in the beth of the word "lanD m'dhabber (speaking, ptc.) is necessarily d. forte, because it is preceded by a vowel. Consequently there is never any real confusion. ^ 5. Omission of Daghesh forte. — In the case of the consonants M fj ?0 3 p, when written to a sh'-wa, the d. forte is very frequently oinittrd wlu a ^ fi^., . ^.,,.E. §7. DAGHESH. THE LETTERS " B GHADHK PHATH. 33 usage would lead us to expect it ; e.g. "IN^T (not "^N'D) the Nile^ ^"''^.IV (not D^i;!j;) blind; "^p, (not "hSr]) praise ye, ^^JH (not ^^^J)) behold me, D''S^♦|'pnp (not D-tJ^^P) seeking, ^ni^"; (not ^nf^^) they will take. This also applies to sibilants, esp. when followed by a guttural ; eg. i^^p^ (not iND3) his throne ; so ^'^'^\ (not li^t?^^.) //^^J will lift up. It is most natural to regard the sh^wa as vocalic (since it must have been sounded in the original form of the word) and the previous syllable consequently as half open. "^ 6. Insei'tion of Daghesh forte. — D. forte is sometimes inserted in a consonant to secure the more audible enunciation of the sh^wa under it ; e.g. ''335? 'ijt-n^bhe {or ''33 y 'in^-bhe {the grapes of , . .). This is known as D. forte dirimens. In certain cases two words, of which the first ends in - , n or n , may be closely connected by the insertion of a D. forte at the beginning of the second word ; e.g. flN^ ^''b'i? thou hast done this. This always happens when HT {this) or HD {what) is joined bymaqqeph to the following word ; e.g. \C!^T\\ this is his name, ^?"np what to thee? what aileth thee? This is known as D. forte conjmictivum. 7. The short unaccented vowel of the third class in syllables ending with a double letter, i.e. Daghesh forte — so- called sharpened syllables — is u. E.g. ^tpi^C but "^sn (not ^2n) it was declared. (Rarely — and chiefly under gutturals — it may appear as ; e.g. ^^V, also ^^y my strength^ 8. Mappiq (extender). — A point is also inserted in the letter He, when final, to indicate that it is to be pronounced, and is not a mere sign of a vowel. When so used the point is called Mappiq, as ^Y^^ arqah (Ji sounded), her land, whereas v:^^%^drqd, towards {the) land {ci. § 17. 3). EXERCISE ON DAG. LENE AND FORTE. Write these Hebrew Words. . . 1, gam, kol, dam, ben, 'et, mot, pat, kap, keleb, tiktob, katabta, bku, Ibad,' dabar, blektka, mishpat, midbar, btok, malki, yabdel, kokabim, kbadtem, tikbdi, kaspka, helqka, midbrekem, laredet, yirb, yibk, gdolim, wtagel. 2. mbaqqshim,hall6n,hammayim,wayyinnagpu,limmadt, dibber, mdubbar, sappdu, misped, bkaspkem, sh*abbat,mibbne, . gippdr, ykatteb, bqigrkem, baddam, boded, yittnu, Ibaddo. Note. — In this exercise the B'ghadhtphath are expressed by ordinary hard letters, and sh'wa is not expressed, as the exercise is set for practice on the syllable. 3 34 § 8. THE GUTTURALS. § 8. THE GUTTURALS: The letters y n n i< are called gutturals. The y is a firmer sound of the same kind as x, and n a firmer sound of the same kind as n. n and v are much stronger letters than n and s. The gutturals have the following peculiarities: I. They prefer about them, particularly before them, the a vowels, and a final guttural must be preceded by pathah or qdmeq. (a) Pathah furtive. — Any short vowel before a final guttural becomes pathah ; and between any long vowel (other than qame^) and the final guttural there steals in, in utterance, the sound of short a. In other words, a short vowel is dis- lodged in favour of pathah ; a long vowel is retained, but a pathah is inserted. Thus we write ^i'O fJ^^^^kh [king), but nb^ meldhy salt (not n^9 ^^^^^^^i) '• so T?^'? hisJilikh {he threw), but n"'i5C^n hishltah, he sent — very rare (not n^C'n hishliJi), ni^a gdbhSah, high (n, as the mappiq shows, is consonantal, § y. 8). A remote analogy may be found in the faint vowel that is sometimes allowed to creep in before the; r in such words as here, fire {Jie''r,fi'r) This short a is therefore called path. furtive. This pathah, as the last illustration shows, is written under the final guttural, but pronounced before it. Thus nn spirit, is pronounced ri^iaJi (not riMia : no Hebrew word ends in a short a). The pathah furtive disappears when the guttural ceases to be final ; thus ""nn rz^^-hz, my spirit ;h "TJ v?''?- Pathah furtive is never written to final % which is silent ; thus «'33 nabhr {prophet), not 5<^;3. Further, if the final guttural is preceded by qdmeg, which is already a vowel of the a class, it does not require and cannot tolerate pathab furtive ; thus nr^o nishldh, sent (not nb^^J nishldaJj). (b) The short /, falling before gutturals not final, is usually depressed to e ; thus "i??' he is heavy, but ^^^\ he ceases (not Tini). This depression of i to e may also take place after a guttural ; thus '">sp my book, but ''ITy (not ^"ity) my help. A similar depression of the vowel may be observed in careless Scotch pronunciation ; thus sich becomes seek ; give, gev ; — though here it is not confined to gutturals; thus, deliver becomes dellevver. §8. THE GUTTURALS. 35 ^ (c) The letter "i, which, alike in sound and treatment, has many affinities with the gutturals, not always (cf. "iD3 unripe grapes) but very frequently has the vowel a before it. Thus 1D^5 wayydsor {and he turned aside) and "iD^l wayyaser {and he caused to turn aside) both become ip^i wayyasar. 2. (a) The gutturals cannot take simple shVa vocal, they require the composite sh^was ; therefore a sh'^wa under an initial guttural must be composite ; e.g, "^'^P q'bhor {bury, imp.), but "i^K "^bhor, cross^ imp. (not "i^V). In many cases they dislike simple sh^'wa silent, preferring the composite ; e.g. Y^ tny foot, but y^? my lord (not vV?). The hateph that takes the place of silent sh'^wa always so vVa pdli becomes v^s pdHi {iny work). n, which is very hard, has a distinct tendency to prefer the silent shVa ; e.g. i"nn2 pahdoy his fear (not y^Vi^ pa/fdho). But with other gutturals the composite is usual ; thus '^'O^'^ becomes first, by paragraph I b, i^XJ and then l^W it was said. (b) By far the most common hateph is -^. Initial n n y prefer ^^, initial s prefers _^ ; e.g. {^^?) ^by stand, "ibx say ; but when further from the tone K also takes -^ ; e.g. v.?? to, towards (very rare and poetic), but ^5-^ to you. ^ 3. (a) As two vocal shVas cannot come together, a simple shVa before a hateph becomes the full (short) vowel corresponding to the hateph) thus ^bipp becomes ?^\h to kill; but "i^p becomes ">3yp to cross. This used to be expressed by saying that the guttural pointed itself and the consonant preceding. We further saw, in paragraph 2 a, that, if the guttural was preceded by a short vowel, it took under it the shVa, if composite, which corresponded to the short vowel ; e.g. vi;? my lord. Therefore the resultant combination in either case is . or . or . ; e.g. T'J^Vn he caused to stand, stationed, ^^^.\} he was stationed. Either the short vowel be- fore the guttural (as a in the original yV?i) or the composite shVa under the guttural (as "^ in "^^y) is sure to be determined, and then the above combination follows as a matter of course. (b) If the guttural is preceded by a long vowel, it takes -^ in place of ^-; e.g. '^^'l?^ she slaughtered, nji^ti) \^i7^v^_ n^;^i ,^9^9 ,"i^D^ ,^'^.^^ ,'Vn^ §9. THE QUIESCENT LETTERS. The letters 1 1 n i^ show the same kind of feebleness that the letters k w y^ that correspond to three of them, have in English : they frequently coalesce in various ways with the vowel sounds about them. 1. They are real consonants at the beginning of a syllable, but at the end of a syllable after a full vowel they generally surrender their consonantal power and are silent ; e.g. nivp commandment {migwdy 1 consonantal) ; so '^^^5 ^d-mar {he said\ but "1^^^^ yd-7nar {he says) (x quiescent) ; ^^^. fme {the days of . . .)y but '^■'^ di-me, in the days of (from ^^^3, § 6. 2 d) not ''O'S biy-me\ so min^3 (from '"i']-''^:?) ^^ Judah. Pro- nounced rapidly, biyme is practically = bimey and is therefore fairly represented by ''^"B. In other words, the "i quiesces, or is silent : and under the silent consonant the sJfwa is not placed', thus ''^^n (not ""Pl^i) ; so "i»K^ (not "»»f ), and H'-K'nt be- ginning (not ^''tJ'K']). Conversely, if it takes the shVa, it is regarded as a consonant ; eg. "l'^^5J ne-ddr {glorious). Here the n has the daghesh lene, because the preceding syllable is closed, ending, as it does, in a consonajtt (§7.2 a). This, however, is rare. At the end of a word « is always silent, and usually at the end of a syllable ; that is, as a consonant it practically disappears. The effect of this is that the syllable ends in a vowel, which is therefore usually lengthened (§5.3 a). Thus fc) becomes t^VD he found, because, as the final x practically disappears, the syllable is as good as open, and its vowel therefore long. So for JJ^V? (cf- ^r'^i^) we write riNVD thou hast found, because K at the end of the syllable is silent, and the following n does not take the daghesh lene, because, now that the j< has vanished, it follows a vowel (§ 7. 2 a). A certain analogy to the quiescents may be found in the English w and j/, which are consonants at the beginning of a word and silent at the end ; cf. ^e^as, saw ; j^es, saj^. 2. It is never difficult to decide whether final •> and 1 are 38 § lo. THE ACCENTS. " METHEGH, &C., PAUSE. consonantal or quiescent. If accompanied by a homogeneous vowel — i.e. i by ^ or /, and i by ^ or 2^ (§ 2. 3 c) — they are ob- viously quiescent, being simply the consonantal signs of these vowels ; e.g. v It {to me), Sb lo {to him). If accompanied by a heterogeneous vowel, they are necessarily consonantal ; e.g. ^n hay {living), '•in hoy {ah /), '"i^ gdl/ly {uncovered, ptc.) ; y^J}\ yahddw {together), npiy 'awld {injustice), IT zizv {April— May), nn or T'I'n Ddwtdh {David). The sufifixal form (to be ex- plained in § 19) V — is sounded dw, as VD^D sit-sdwikis horses). EXERCISE. PRONOUNCE AND WRITE OUT THESE WORDS. ,«n| ,^«i ,rmi^ ,11?^^. ^'h^^ ,'iri*'!^ >ih ,^i< ,v^i5^^p p^rh^ ,"^2^t^tr' p-in^r^ ,^«vr2tr^ ,n«-ip^ [?n?^,n^ty«"\ -i : r\±> ;h^ ,r\yh^ ,iti?«-L ,D^tr«") § 10. THE ACCENTS.' METHEGH, MAQQEPH, PAUSE, Q^R£, &c. 1. Use of the Accents. — The accents have three uses: (i) they mark the tone-syllable; (2) they are signs of logical interpunction, like our comma, &c. ; and (3) they are musical expressions. In the first case they are guides to the pronunciation of the individual words ; in the second they are guides to the sense, being a kind of commentary ; and in the third they are guides to the proper reading of the text as a whole, which is a kind of recitative or cantilla- tion. The last use, of course, embraces the other two. 2. The secondary accent {Methegh) and the Tone. — The main accent or Tone falls generally upon the last syllable of the word (§5.1 a), eg. "^^T ddbhar, word\ in one class of nouns (the Segholates, § 29), e.g. "i3"n dSher, pestilence, and in some Verbal forms, e.g. Thb\> qdtdlti, I killed, it falls on the penult. (a) According to the natural rhythm of the language the syllable immediately before the Tone has a fall, but the syllable second from the Tone a certain emphasis or ac- ^ A brief account of the more common accents will be found on pp. 230 f. I § lo. THE ACCENTS. METHEGH, &C., PAUSE. 39 centual rise. To prevent this emphasis or anti-tone being neglected the syllable was often marked by a sign called Methegh, Jn^ {bridle), a small perpendicular stroke to the left of the vowel.i An open syllable was most apt to be hurried over, and hence: the second full syllable from the Tone, if open, is uniformly marked by Methegh, whether the vowel is long (Diytn the man) or short (>^''\}\^. the palace) ; e.g. 'SJf:? /, ri-|?n and thou shalt remember^ ^?9i3 ^^^^ wise, "ifyn the dust. That is, in the onward rush towards the tone-syllable, it safe- guards the vowel which is otherwise likely to get less than justice. (The interests of the tone and the pretone syllables are already safeguarded by the principle laid down in § 6. 2 b.) The methegh is rarely used with the vowel of a shut syllable, because such a vowel is already safe and in little danger of being slurred (therefore not D^nnnr^) ; or with a sh°wa, because so insignificant a vowel does not deserve special attention (therefore not cs^^n'n). (This is no violation of the principle laid down in § 6. 2 c; in all the above illustrations there are good reasons, which will afterwards be clear, why the vowel second from the tone should remain a full vowel and not be reduced to sh^'wa.) (b) When the open syllable is separated from the tone even by only vocal shVa, its vowel is marked by methegh ; ^ eg. npDjj 'd-kJild (accent on last syllable), she ate, nosn hd-kh'md, she is wise. (In these cases the sh^'wa is vocal, representing as it does a full vowel in the original masc. form b"^^, 0?I7-) In such positions methegh clearly indicates that the shVa is vocal, and thus serves to distinguish between a and 0, and between z and i) eg. TOX food (_ silent^ because no •methegh with the _ _: the word is therefore a pure dissylla- ble: last syllable, accented, la : the first, unaccented and shut, therefore with shoi't vowel ; therefore 'okh : so 'okhld) ; np3n Jiokhmd, wisdom ; 15<")^^. yi-r'il, they will fear (open syllable, long i) ; 1^^"l'! yir-i'L, they will see (shut syllable, short i). (c) If the vocal sh^'wa in this case be a hateph, the pre- ceding vowel, though short, has that distinctness that requires ^ Under the consonant, if the vowel is J}6lem : e.sr. D''33i3 stars. D''3nb priests, I3''Il^{< enemies. 2 This fact tends to confirm the view that vocal sh^wa constitutes a syllable (§ 5. 2). Cf. Sievers, Metrische Studien^ i. pp. 145 f. ^y. ^^ ^ ) 40 § 10. THE ACCENTS. METHEGH, &C., PAUSE. to be preserved by methegh ; hence the combination referred to in § 8. 3 a always appears in the form _. ^_ ... ,.. ^. ^^ ; e.g'. "^""W /^^ stations, ^^^^J}. he stationed, "i^Pn he was stationed. 3. Maqqeph (binder). — (a) Part of the accentual or rhythmical machinery is the Maqqeph or hyphen, which binds two or more words together. The sign indicates that all the words so joined are pronounced in the rhythmical reading as one word, e.g. i?"■|'^^{"7^■n^5 all (ace.) that (was) to him, all that he had. The occurrence of two accented syllables in immediate succession is contrary to the rhythm, and this conjunction is avoided by throwing several words into one. All the words joined by maqqeph lose their accent except the last^ and in consequence of this their long vowels, if changeable, become short (§ 5. 3 a), DVn ?3 but ^V'?'''^ all the people, i.e. the -^ of f^s, which is now shut and unaccented, becomes the corresponding short (not kol, but kol-hd-dm). Qere, followed by maqqeph, is usually reduced to s'ghol\ thus "i^?'!? hishshdmer, but N*J""iJO^n beware ; so niin ip"|n ^J""'" - ^- S^'^^ praise to him and tell, &c. (b) The maqqeph is used almost invariably with ?^? to, (33 all (thus "PS), riNi sign of accus. (thus "ns), and a few other common words {e.g. 'Ti from, "I? lesf). 4. Pause. — The natural pause which occurs at the middle, and especially the end of a Hebrew verse, affects the vowels as follows : (a) A short vowel in the tone becomes long, as D^o water, pause D":? ; -16^ he kept, pause "ip^* ; '^^'^o^ I kept, pause 'ri']6c' : — the long vowel can stand in the shut syllable, now that it has the accent. If the short vowel has been modified from another, it is the long o{\h^ primary sound that appears, n^ earth, p. p.^ (from a primary P.i< '^rg). (b) Occasionally the tone is shifted from the last syllable to the penult, which is lengthened if it was short, nriy 'attd (now), pause nriy 'dttd (not, of course, 'ottd, as it would be if it were an ordinary non-pausal form). (c) Perhaps the commonest pausal effect is what looks like a combination of (a) and (b). In verbal forms with vocal shVa before the tone, this sh*wa becomes the tone-long ^Jf the primary sound whose place it had taken, and the tone § lo. THE ACCENTS. METHEGH, &C., PAUSE. 41 is then shifted to it, as n5D*^ she dwelt, pause nj5^* from |3^ ; n^y sta7id ye, pause 'nSy from ^bj; j/^;^^. Similarly the composite shVa under a guttural is raised, in pause, to the corresponding long vowel ; thus ''^^^ /, pause ^;£^ vn sickness, pause ""^n. i. Sh^wa before the suffix kha becomes in pause e, ^DID thy horse, pause ^DID, ii. There is a fondness shown in many cases for the sharp a in pausal syllables : e.g. ^^'^., pause ''P^*5 ci^d he 7vas weajied. iii. If two accented syllables of different words occur in imme- diate succession, the tone is often shifted from the last syllable to the penult of the first word, though only when this is open ; e.g. '^^!'< ^"JP li^ catted night (not i<^P, which would otherwise be correct), Dn^ b^^5^1 (not b^xn t/iou shatt eat bread). 5 . Qre {^'}\> read, i.e. to be read) and K'thibh (3'n3 written), — (a) The K'tJiibh is the consonantal text as it lay before the punctuators, being held inviolable. When, however, for any reason, whether of grammar or propriety, the punctuators preferred another reading, the vowels of this reading were put under the K'thibh in the text, while the consonants, which could not find a place in the text, were set in the margin. This recommended reading is the Qre. Attention is called to the margin by a small circle placed over the K'thibh, thus : ^VlJ] Gen. 24. 14. The marginal or foot note (unpointed) to which attention is thus called runs np ^ m^jn, i.e. niyin is to be read : and the vowels to accompany this recommended reading are the vowels of the other word which stands in the text. The word to be read is therefore in full 'TJVsn tJie 7naiden : the unpointed "iVJn, which would normally represent iwn the youth (masc), would be am- biguous. In other words, the consonants of the margin are to be read with the vowels of the text. (b) In the case of r^rx" and a few other words of very frequent occurrence, the Qre is not placed in the m^argin, but its vowels are simply inserted in the text. E.g. nin'' (whence our Jehovah, probably originally "^.in^ Yahweh) is always written either thus — with the vowels of ''^'^^^ Lord (which ^ Or simply 'p. 42 § II. THE ARTICLE. word, however, is not actually written in the margin) — or (when it follows ^p^) to avoid repetition, ninj with the vowels of ^''*P^. (God). Thus the proper pronunciation of nin*" (doubtless Vakwe/i), for which the Hebrew equivalent for Lord (or God) was always substituted, came in course of time to be completely forgotten. OF WORDS AND FORMS. Roots may be considered to be of three classes : (i) the simplest and instinctive interjection, expressive of mere feel- ing, as ah ! ; (2) the higher demonstrative, expressing locality, direction, and distinction between one object and another ; and (3) roots embodying thoughts, nouns and vei^bs. The first class, being uninflected and individual, do not need any separate treatment. And of the others it is better to begin with the second, which is next in simplicity. § II. THE ARTICLE. Hebrew has no indefinite Article ; e.g, Di'' yom, a day^ ^^ ''ish, a man. The Definite Article, which before ordinary consonants is 'H (i.e. ha, with the following consonant duplicated), was originally a demonstrative pronoun. Something of this force still attaches to it in one or two phrases ; e.g. D^*'!' hay-yom, the day, i.e. this day, to-day ; 'i|'^?n the night, i.e. to-night. The article is an inseparable particle prefixed to words, and, like tJie in English, suffers no change for Gender or Number. The origin of the article is quite uncertain. Its primary form may have been hd (which, because of its very close connection with the following word — cf. the — may have emphasized or strengthened its opening consonant, which has therefore Dag. forte, § 7. 3 a); or it may even have been han} All the phenomena can be satisfactorily explained on either assumption. Assuming, however, for simplicity's sake, a 1 The former explanation is the more probable ; the latter, however, though it has met with little favour, is at least possible ; and I mention it here because, on this assumption, the pointing of the article becomes readily intelligible to the beginner. § II. THE ARTICLE. 43 primary han^ the usage works out very naturally, especially when we remember how readily in other languages n assimilates with the consonant before it ; e.g. inmotus = im- motuSy inlotus = illotus, evKeiiray = iWeiTrco, &c. (a) Before ordinary consonants the n is assimilated to the next consonant, which is thus doubled ; e.£: ^Sp voice (bipin = Sippn = ) %t\ haq-qol, the voice ; so ^mr} hashshemesh, the sun. . (b) Before gutturals, the principles laid down in § 8. 4 apply. As they cannot be doubled, \he pathah of the Art, falling in an open Syllable, expands to qdmeg; thus t^'^Kn becomes ^^^^ the man. This expansion is universal before N» and n, e.g. Ci'N'nn har-rosh = trj<"in hd-rosh} the head, and general before y, e.g: "CV"^ the city. Before the strong gutt. n and n,pathah usually remains ; i.e. the daghesh is implicit, and the vowel before it, being in a practically shut syllable, remains short ; e.g. b?^Iin (from hah-hekhdt) the palace, HDlDnn (from hah-hokhnia) wisdom? (c) The rule in (b) applies to x and -i with any vowel. But when n, y, n are pointed with qdmeg, the punctuation of the Art. varies — Before n and V in the Tone, the Art., falling in the pretone, takes a (§ 6. 2 b), as inn the mountain, DVn the people. Before n, V, not in the Tone, the Art, falling before the pretone, becomes e {sghol)^ as Q"'inn the mountains, pSyn the ti'ouble?- Before n {Jid) in all positions, and also before n, the Art. takes ^ghol, D?nn the wise^ Jnn the feast, ''^nn the sickness. The following will be a useful summary of the facts. It should not, however, be mechanically committed to memory, ^ The i< is silent, but it points to an earlier stage in the history of the word when it was consonantal ; cf. § 5. 6 c (^^ipH). ^ These words would, in strict writing, all require methegh with the first vowel, as it is in the open syllable, and two places from the tone ; e.g. '^^'^J)'^,, n^snrij &c. ^ This comes under the general rule that a pathah before an origi- nally duplicated guttural which has -^ under it becomes s^ghol ; thus ""C? '"^y brothers, pausal form of "'Ht^ (p. 153), originally ah-hay (§ 10. 4 a). 44 § II. THE ARTICLE. but read in the light of the principles that govern it, and then it will be remembered with little difficulty. Before ordinary conss. Before gutturals ■{ i n, n _n fi, D — n T ' T T Before gutturals with qameg 7. V —\ c^"'fc«n \^iaT} yvTl T T ' T T T T V ' -TV D5nrr /i5nn C'^^ man ^ Di^ day 7]*^'n darkness D^,^ /ZTwater, waters DT high D)§)K^ //. heaven nB^i< y*. woman '"^pv /;2. night V"'ip'J firmament ^in5 great '^V upon 5]d| silver anj gold "ir?5 morning 37.y evening lix light -»sy dust 3iD good 1 and The conjunction and is a particle inseparably prefixed to words, ^''^) and a man. Rule I . — The adjective, when it qualifies, stands after the noun; e.g. a good man^ 3iD V^^'^^ not K'''X 3iD. If the noun be definite, the adj., as well as the noun, has the article ; e.g. the good man, not ^^^ 3ii3n, but S'ltsn c^'^sn j5>. the man, viz. the good (one). If two or more adjectives go with the same noun, each of the adjectives has the article ; e.g. the great and good man, niisni h\i\r\ ^'^r\. Rule 2. — The adjective, when used predicatively, must not take the article. It may come before or after the noun — usually before ; e.g. the 7nan is good^^^^ ^*^^'^ or L*'^i ^^' ^^ ^-D?^ we nu 2 pei's. m. nriSl thou ta ^^'^ V^ ^^^'^ 3 pers. m. t^^H he ^ ^, hu H^n,* DIl they ;;/ /. «^rT sheV {ha) T}T\ „ n The above forms of the Pers. Pronouns are used only to express the Nominative : they must not be put as oblique cases after a verb or preposition : therefore I-buried him is not «=in ^nn3P (§31); declare to (^) me is not ^^i^^. 'nsp (§ 1 4. i f ). When, as in these cases, the Pers. Pronouns do not express the Subject, they become attracted in a fragmentary form to be explained later (§§ 19. 3 i ; 14. i f; 15. 2, &c.) to the end of other words. These fragments (the significant parts above) are named Pronominal suffixes. r?/. eye ^\ f- hand "^n mountain vn disease p.^ /. earth 15^ f. stone ^2$ servant Dy people ^?.0/- sword ' c^■^"SK//. God PJ^l palace D^n vvise D^vy powerful yi bad, sore "IND very INO V) very bad A few words, e.g. "^n, DV, in, when preceded by the ^ Throughout the exercises, bracketed words are not to be translated. 2 In i^^n hil and ^5^7 hi, the J5, wfiich is silent, represents doubtless an earlier stage in the history of the word, when it was consonantal {hiVa ? hVa ?). ^ Both forms extremely rare. * Long vowel tolerated in shut syllable, because accented (§ 5. 3 a). 46 § 13- DEMOJJSTRATIVE AND OTHER PRONOUNS. 1 article, lengthen the pathah to qdmeq\ thus in^^, ^nn. So also n^ (original p^N) becomes X'^^'^. In sentences of the type the people is wise (of. § i i . Rule 2), the predicate is sometimes followed by the third personal pronoun (in the appropriate gender and number) ; thus Dyn Nin Dpn. Sometimes (esp. when subj. and pred. are coex- tensive) this pronoun precedes the predicate ; e.g. i<^n nin^ ^^'?^?.i^ Yahweh ^ is the God. But in such cases it is not strictly correct to say that the pronoun is the copula ; it really resumes the subject, — in the former case, without em- phasis, as for the people^ it («in) is wise ; in the latter, with emphasis : Yahweh^ he (and no other) is the God. EXERCISE. TRANSLATE. T - VV X ^ : T T X X .. ,- X X IV - • V V - X • IX : - -^ • v: Ix : X XX X : X - - V V X X - ; X IV XX I V X X : • - X - I • - X : x - J i?nn r^nn 15 : ^^^ri D^n 14 : a^nn XD^^r; ^5^5 13 / The eye. The hand. The mountain is very lofty. The dust is upon the waters. I (am) the man. We (are) the people. The sword. The good man is the wise man. The good and powerful people. The morning and the evening are the day. The darkness is the night. The great and lofty mountain. The darkness is very great upon the earth and upon the waters. Thou (art) the man. They (are) the heavens. The stone. «^n that nr^ri, on those § 13. DEMONSTRATIVE, INTERROGATIVE, AND OTHER PRONOUNS. Sing: Plur. mas. nj this / ™t „ c. Hv^il these 1 nin^ should be pronounced and translated thus, not by the Lord. As the traditional vocalization of the word ('^jnp is erroneous, we shall throughout leave it unpointed. Sing. Plur, ^in that rv^h^ § 13- DEMONSTRATIVE AND OTHER PRONOUNS. 47 1. The demonstratives may be used predicatively or adjectivally. Like adjectives when used predicatively they do not take the article, and the order is as in English : e.g. this is the man, ^^^"^ nj ; this is the good vian, ^ii^n tr^Jj^n nn When used as adjectives their noun is definite, and they are written, with the definite article, after the noun — ex- actly like adjs. (§11. Rule i); e.g. n^n tr^Nn this man (i.e. the man — this one), riN^n niinn this law, N^nn Di*n that day, rh^r\ D''"}n'nn these words. With another adj., the demonstr. stands last : this good man, T\)r\ niisn c^"^«n. Note that though, with the art, the sing, is ^'>^r]r\^ the plur. is Di]n. 2. Relative pronoun. — (a) i^^^ 1 used for who, which, invariable for all genders, numbers, and cases, is, strictly speaking, not a relative pronoun, but only a general word of relation ; and, as it is used to introduce clauses begin- ning not only with who, whom, whose, which, but also with where, whence, whither, it might be fairly said to correspond to the wh in these words, or to the that in such sentences as the man that / spoke to, the house that / lived in. The Hebrew w^ay of turning such relative sentences is to throw the vague if'J< {wJi, that) at the beginning, and to clinch it at the end by the definite word which the sense requires ; eg. the man that (ik^n) I spoke to him (wh ... to him = to ^ whom) ; the house that (iC'n) I lived in it (wh ... in it = in which). The force of the "l^^5 in such cases is practically = as to who7?t or which {eg. the man as to whom I spoke to hinn, the house as to which I lived in it). So whose = -iD'i< followed by his ; eg. issa nnc^i ntJ'K Dnxn ^;ian in whose nostrils (iDsn . . . iK'n) is {but) a breath {i.e. man as to whom but a breath is in his nostrils). So there Q^, where DB^ . . . if'K ; thither n?J^ shdmmd, whither, ntsij' . . . "itf^V; ; tJience Q^p (IP from ; n assimilated), whence D^p . . . ^V,% (b) Almost always, however, when the English relative pronoun is in the nominative, and frequently also when it is in the accusative, '^^^J is used alone, i.e. without being ^ The form ^ prefixed inseparably to words, usually as tJ' or ^ followed by T>2ig. forte, e.g. 7^^ = y IK^fc? {which is to me, i.e. mine), is mostly late. v 48 § 13- DEMONSTRATIVE AND OTHER PRONOUNS. clinched at the end by a definite pronoun ; e.g. the k who picrsued, Kr\ i^^^ (the "icx is not followed up by a w for he) ; he put there the man whom he had formed, "^VJ ''^ . (here the 'y^}^ may or may not be followed by the word for hmi). It is doubtless this familiar usage that has led to the statement that itJ'^^ is a relative pronoun, and = who, wJiich. (c) "i^tf can also = Jie who, him who, tJiat wJiich, and may take a preposition before it ; e.g. that ivhich (^^^?) Jie had done, displeased Yahweh ; he said to the man who ("1^??,^ was over his house. 3. Interi'ogative pronoun. — The interrogative is ^p who? for persons, and HD what ? for things, both words indeclinable. The emphasis of the question not being on the interroga- tive particle it falls forward on the next word (§ 7. 6), and rxo assumes d. poi7iting quite like the Article (§11). Before non-gutturals path, and dag. i^J""!^ what is this? before i^ and i qdmeg '"'.??5"'^? what are these ? before other gutturals pathah i^^nTiJp what is it ? before gutt. with qam. /ghol nb'JJ n^p what has he done ? ■•p is also used to express the indefinite wJioever, whoso- ever ; and no whatever, whatsoever ; e.g. y6< ninv ""D whoever (is) for Yahweh (Jet him come) unto me. But while ^p can be thus used, "i^t? can never be used interrogatively. E.g. Who will trust in Yahweh? nin^ii npn^'P (not possibly "^f'x) ; but blessed is the man zuho trusts, npr. ■1K^"« ^'^r^ Tjna. no is also the exclamation hoiu ! ^9*^ T'Hi^-no J low glorious is thy name ! 4. Other pronominal expressions. — EacJi ^^^ ; e.g, kings were sitting each (^^'^ upon his throne. So any ; e.g. if any one (^^^?) can number, &c. Every, all, bb (which is strictly a noun = tJie ivhole) ; e.g. every day, dv ^3 ; all the day, Di>n-73 (§ 10. 3). No, none, ^^^ . , . ^ or ^ ^'^ (lit. not a man)-, h'--^ . . , 'S or nS) . . . ^3 (lit. not every, i.e. not any) ; e.g. noiie living is just before thee, ''n'73 , , , '^\ no work shall be done^ rwf'^ nDK^p-i33. The oney the other, "^J . . . "^J : the one called to the other, nrh^ nr Nip. § 13- DEMONSTRATIVE AND OTHER PRONOUNS. 49 For other forms of reciprocal and for reflexive pronouns, see pp. 90, 93, 150. ^i^p king D'Xi head I7J boy nin*" Yahweh ^ N13 to create Xip to call T^' to bear "^^^ to shed TT TT T T . nj?^ to take V^^ to hear i^^5 to say t53 to come /^) 2^*1 to sit i6 not 2V1 famine 'b^ unto 5. The root of the verb is held to be, not the infinitive, but the 3rd pers. sing. perf. act., which is the simplest form ; e.g: N")n is really not ^0 create, but he C7'eated, njp^ he took, Slc. It is as if in Latin we spoke of a7nat rather than amare. 6. Sentences are of two kinds: (i.) verbal — having definite verb for predicate, e.g. the angel cried; and (ii.) nominal — having any other kind of predicate, such as noun, adj., partic; e.g. Thou art God, God is good, 8ic. The order in a verbal sentence (unless the subj. is emphatic) is verb, subject, e.g-. •qxp^n snj? the angel cried; in a nominal sentence, subject, predicate, e.g. '•^apo Twrs"" Y, is our king. But in nom. sent, the predicate, if emphatic, is placed first, e.g. nrii< "iQy dust art thou, and frequently also as we have seen (§11. Rule 2) if it be an adj. nv"i^ r\m p^iv righteous art thou, Y. The negative stands immediately before the verb or pre- dicate : so that, in a verbal sentence, the order is (negative), verb, subject, object ; e.g. the boy did not hear the voice, 7. (a) The definite accus. in nouns and pronouns, when directly governed by an active verb, is, in prose, usually pre- ceded by the particle rix, or rather "HX (§ 10. 3), as in above illustr. But the accus. must be definite : "<^ voice" would have been simply f)ip, not 7ip"rix, The accusative is regarded as definite (i.) if it be preceded by the def. art., (ii.) if it be par- ticularized by a possessive pronoun (indicated in Hebrew by a pronominal suffix, § 1 9), eg. God heard his voice, iPipTiNl, (iii.) if it be a proper name, e.g, he smote David, ^\yr7\'^, (b) TiNl is repeated with each of the accusatives, if there ^ Usually pointed njn^, occasionally Ti\T\^ (cf. § 10. 5) : the true spell- ing (never found) is probably Hin^. We leave it throughout unpointed. 4 so § 14. THE INSEPARABLE PREPOSITIONS. be more than one ; e.g. Abraham took SaraJi and Lot, t\'\o-T\'^ (c) -nx is used before ""^ ( = whom ?), but never before no. Whom have I oppressed f ^^i?l^y ^P"^^, but what have I taken ? not 'iD-riwS. EXERCISE. TRANSLATE. nt 4 t ^^^T^T} n^^^n 3 : ntrr nnn nb^D d^ 2 : on^ •^r:^ "T7?rT nt 6 \ n-jn D^!^:^n Di^n 5 : "o^rib^^ ntr:^ nu.^« r2y^r^ 'Tf'^^n i\p^ 8 :n^«-n^ ^^VP 7 : Sj'ipn-nt^^ :^ntr -^tt?^^ - I V T T - . _ - > - T V -: • T T -^ T T IV - : v^b^n nb^i D^^rr^tz^n n^^ n^rh^ ^'mi i i : mn Di^n litD I V T T •• : . - T — •• • v: TT V - - ■r\« i7nn np7 13 :mn^ triip "id«i r^rh^ ntt^npi 12 I ' 'T - T : V V V t't : :DDnrT ^7qn nt 14 :n'^nn Who (are) these ? What (are) ye ? Who (is) this woman ? I (am) the great king who (is) over (»t) the land. That great day. This (is) a good head. This (is) the good head. This he?ad (is) good. This good head. This (is) the bad boy who spilt the water upon the earth. What has the man done? What (are) these ? These (are) the heavens and the earth which God created this day. That great and sore disease. He sat by (^V) those waters. How great (is) that palace ! ^ § 14. THE INSEPARABLE PREPOSITIONS. I. Prepositions and similar words in Hebrew are usually nouns, sometimes entire, but oftener worn down and frag- mentary. The following three fragments used as preposi- tions are, like the Art., inseparably prefixed to words : 1 in, by, with ; local and instrumental. D as, like. h to, at, for; sign oi dat. and infin. (a) The usual pointing of these light fragments is simple sh^'wa ; e.g. Dv*^3 in peace, niJTn n^ii with a strong hand, '^V">B3 like Pharaoh, 'i^!'^? lo Moses. . (b) Before another shVa this becomes hireq, by § 6. 2 d. i., forming a half-open syllable 2n^, (33^3 = ) 33^3 in the heart § 14. THE INSEPARABLE PREPOSITIONS. 5 I of\ the sh^'wa is here sounded, because it was (necessarily) so in the original 327 (cf. § 5.4 a); therefore not ^???. If the consonant be ^ it quiesces and the shVa is not written (§9- ; ^-K- ^% but •'^••^ in the days of \ ru^r\\^ 7n\r6 to Judah. (c) Before a hateph the shVa becomes the corresponding short vowel, by § 8. 3, ^:'tf, ^1^5^ = ''"1N3 like a lion] ^b^?, tes^ to eat. But with the very frequently recurring words C]\'i?&? God, and "'bK (in the phrase "idk'^ saying), the vowel under the guttural is swallowed up in a long vowel under the pre- position ; thus, not D^n^N^ but D^n'^«3, D^n"S,s^ to God, D*n"SK3 as God, "ib.sb. (d) Before the accent, the prep., falling in t]i(t preione, often has tone-long qdmeq (§ 6. 2 b), as ^''.9? /^ water (for DV??). This is found chiefly in one or two familiar expres- sions, ^V^for ever, ntp5? securely, and with a certain kind of in- finitive; e.g.r\fhtQgo{^ 33.2 b, 3 d,§ 39. 2 b, § 40, §42. 2 a). (e) In words with the Art. the weak He almost always surrenders its vowel to the prep, and disappears. An analogy for this disappearance of h may be seen in Cockney English, in many French words, e.g. homme, 8ic. Eg. DV^f'T" (^'I'P^'T'^ =») n]^m in the heavens, D?n, (°?C'r'=) ^^^ ^^ the people, onn^ (§ 1 1 c) to the mountains. To express it summarily, the Article disappears, but its vowel is written under the pre- position. (f) Prepositions cannot be used imrhediately before pro- nouns; therefore to 7ne is not ''J^?'?, nor is in you CJriNIi. In- stead, the significant parts of the pronouns (§ i 2) are appended to the prepositions in more or less modified forms ; thus — Sing. V to me, ^>^ (m.) "H? (f ) to thee, ifj to him, ^7 to her. Plur. ^3^ to us, d5^ (m.) l3^ (f.) to you, ^rh (m.) fh (f ) to them, 2 is inflected like f), but it also takes D? in 3rd plur. masc. 2. The short word IP, used as a prep, in the sense of from, out of, As also a worn down noun, and generally used as an inseparable particle. (a) The weak liquid n, as in other languages, is assimilated to the next consonant, which is doubled, 0^^^ from water. 1 Pause, ^^. 52 § 14. THE INSEPARABLE PREPOSITIONS. Dagh. f., with certain consonants, may be omitted (§ 7. 5) ; e.g. nVipD (for nvjpp) at the end of . When the consonant is "i, it quiesces (§ 9. i) ; e.g. "^'P^'iP at my right hand= "J^P'O = "J'JplP = ''J^^'-n. (b) Before gutturals, the short vowel expands in the open syllable into the corresponding tone-long, YV)? fj'om a tree (rriP = rT'^'9 = rV.^), by § S. 4 ; and occasionally, with n, hireq remains, by § 8. 4; e.g. Y^r\D (not pnp), dagh. f. implicit, outside. (c) Before the Art. either (b) is followed, or oftener the prep, is prefixed entire to the word with help of Maqqeph, J*j;np or X^J)']^ from the tree. This fuller form is also common in poetry. With these exceptions, the usual form is the assimilated. . iSp book \\ garden Dip^ place "?1^:(/) ground HK^j^ (/) dry land r\'ory:^ (/) beast, cattle ••IK lion "linn ass nD5^ Israel nn^in; Judah D-)3K Abram Dnnnx Abraham in;^K Elijah V'^'h^ Elisha n^ni'p/ battle, war, \>V\ to cry EXERCISE. TRANSLATE. ^rh^h^ dv 10 :D^nt^i I said to the man. We rested on the seventh day. And of the tree we have eaten. God destroyed from the earth man and cattle. People and king. Elijah and Elisha. Who spilt the water upon the earth ? I heard the voice in the garden. Thou hast said. Holy (is) Yahweh. And these, who (are) these ? Dry land and water. Night and morning. Man is not wise as God. Thou (/.) hast ruled over this people. § 16. THE NOUN. INFLECTION. I. Stems in Hebrew are considered to contain three con- sonantal letters, e.g. 133, "idk^. The noun may be regarded as expressing the stem idea in rest^ and the verb the idea in fnotion. Hence the vowels of the verb are lighter than those of the noun. It is convenient to consider the verb as the root out of which other parts of speech grew, though there are many nouns not traceable to extant verbal stems. Nouns are thus primitive or derivative. We may on the other hand take a noun or particle and set it in motion ^ Pausal form (cf. § lo. 4a\ § i6. THE NOUN. INFLECTION. 55 that is, verbalize it ; such verbs are called Denominatives, Sic, as to dust. 2. Inflection in Hebrew takes place after two modes, an outside and an inside mode. Both modes are to be observed in most languages, e.g. boy, boys, by the outside inflection ; many men, by the inside; ^o fear, feared, but tread, trod; facio,feci ; brechen, brack. The Semitic languages have a preference for the inner inflection. This prevails greatly in the Heb. verb, though it has not gained great footing in the noun, the inflection of which is external. Great alterations do occur within the noun in Heb., but these are due to movements of the Tone, e.g. i^"n word, l^^^JT words, Q?''^?'! your words, and differ altogether from such changes as appear \xi foot, feet. At the same time as the accentual changes take place to a certain extent on various principles, they afford means for classifying nouns into several Declensions. The external changes may be called Inflection. 3. Inflection, external modifications in Nouns and Ad- jectives. (a) In Hebrew there are tzvo genders : mas. and fern. There are three numbers : sing., dual, and plur. The dual is not used to indicate two in general : two captains would not be cnb', nor two fish D'J^ (see § 48. I. 2). (b) The fern. sing, is formed by adding n— {a) to the mas., e.g. :ii£3, n^iD. (c) ThQ plur. mas. is formed by adding d""^- {znt) to the sing., e.g. D"'3iD ; and the plur. fern, by changing n^^ (A) into ni {oth), e.g. nni^, ninito, or by adding oth to the sing, if it has no fern, termination, e.g. n^"i wind, nini"i. (d) The dual is formed by adding Ci^-^ (ayim : ■• con- sonantal) to the mas. sing, for the mas., and to the original fern. sing, (which was n-r ^ih ; § 1 6. 4. 8) for the fern. Thus : from D^D, D^p^D ; from HDiD (orig. np^D), n^noiD {a under D lengthened to a, because pretonic, § 6. 2 b). mas. fern. mas. fein. sing. 3iD good nniD DID horse HD^D mare plur. D''?it3 „ ni3iD D^P^ID „ DiD^D ,, dual D^P^D „ D^HD^D „ 56 § 1 6. THE NOUN. INFLECTION. 4. Classes of nouns feminine, (i) Words ending in n— or n ; e.g. ^p"^^ righteousness, nana blessing, JT'iitsy an Ammonitess, nnvp an Egyptian woman (from "'"IVP"^^ Egyptian). (2) Words of any termination that are names of creatures feminine, as D^? mother. (3) Names of cities, countries, &c., which may be con- sidered mothers of their inhabitants ; e.g. P*V Zion, '^'lt^^5 Assyria. (4) Names of organs of the body of men or animals, especially such organs as are double, as 1) hand, ITK ear, T)p.. horn ; also of other utensils or instruments used by man, as 2"^n sword, Di3 cup, and even of places in which man is wont to move, as i'^n woidd. (5) Names of things productive, the elements, unseen essences, &c., as tJ'D^ sun, T"]^ earth, ^^ fire, t^•^3 soul. In all these classes, however, there are numerous excep- tions ; and many words are of both genders, though in general where this is the case one gender is largely pre- dominant in usage over the other ; e.g. TO way, masc. (less often fem.). (6) Words fem. usually assume the distinctive / or ni^jp (§ 4), "1?^^' trumpet, pi. nnsic^. As a rule, the plur. takes the gender of the sing. ; e.g. riins D^aiD good fathers, Hinb D'^yj' good years. (7) The fem. often corresponds to the Greek or Latin neuter ; eg. njitD welfare, nyi misery, riNT tJiis (tovto). (8) The original fem. ending was ath n-:r- The ending occasionally appears, sometimes in this form, sometimes as simple n (cf. n^SXio Moabitess, from ^3XiD) under conditions to be afterwards explained (cf. § 1 7. 2 d). Words ending in i (mainly ordinal numerals, § 48. 2, eg. ^^V^Sv} third, and tribal names, eg. ^l^V Hebrezv) form thc/rw. § i6. THE NOUN. INFLECTION. 57 and plur. as follows \—fem. sing, nnny, n^K>^i?K^ (rarely ^''^'h^\ masc.pl. D^-)?V and ^'^?y^,, fern. pi. ninny. 5. The Dual. — (a) The Dual is confined to substantives (and the numeral Q^^K^ two)\ it is no more found in the adjec- tive, pronoun, or verb. It is used for things that go in pairs ^ whether organs of the body or inanimate things ; e.g. eyes d;!"?;, ears Ci:?rx (^ozndyim), hands ^% feet D'.^i"!, lips D^n?^ (from i^?^), horns 2^5^.!^, shoes D vV^ ; and with one or two other common words, e.g. D!'?3i'' two days^ ^ID^^ two years. (b) Verbs and adjectives, having no dual, use the plural with a dual noun, D"n niDDb^ Dn;i T\^'cr\ D^ry haughty (high) eyes and hands that shed blood. (c) When terms denoting members of the body are used to express inanimate objects,, the fern. plur. is used; e.g. T\\T\^ horns of the altar. (d) The vowel before the dual termination, if open, is long, being pretonic (§ 6. 2 b), e.g. D^nst^ spJidtJidyim. (e) D)D water., and D^P^ heaven., are not duals, but plur. from unused sing, forms (^^ and ''pC'). 121 ox '^'J?/ COW DID horse r\^\^ f, mare :ii fish nj-i/ fish i^^ prince nnc^y. princess W song ^T^/. song i^i adversary 'T)^/. adversary "1133 hero, mighty 3Di3 star 1^3/ well 3«T wolf n?i:/. side Di blood in; river ni^W^T"^ P"'1V just "ipi bitter \r\\ to give, T\r\ to slay 1DD to count HNT to see set "i^f to remem- on^ bread ^^J) new nnK> to drink ber EXERCISE. TRANSLATE. niy-in ni"iQn n^b^ 2 : on d^"i^ '^s Q^rzjn-p isn nntr ^^ : D^:ra^ nt^n-i-i nit^n Ttr^n 3 : i«^n-7:ir x^y^r^ n^^^ '^tr^ • T- X •• : - X T It - t '^ : - - ' V V - XT V -: 1 The words ID, nb', IV, "l^, have, for etymological reasons (§ 43), a (path.) when uninflected or without the Article, cf. § 12 ; otherwise a. 58 § 17. CASES. THE CONSTRUCT STATE. ^ii-^r:^^ 5 : nvri-hy ij^^n ]n: ntr^ d^-iI -inm n-^^^r^n nt^n 4 . - T T T - ' V V - I - T V -: • • ~ ! • T - T •• ' I remember (per/.) the songs» which I heard in the temple. These waters (are) bitter. Those heavens (are) very lofty. These (are) the asses which we slew. Who (are) these princes and heroes ? Thou hast heard the cows. God remembers the just (//.). We sat on the hills two days. Bread he ate and water he drank. The just are as the stars which (are) in the firmament. The two-sides. He took oxen and cows and horses and asses. We heard the wolves in the evening. I counted the stars which God has set in the heavens. Water from the wells. God gave me a new song. Thou (/.) has spilt blood (//.). §17. CASES. THE CONSTRUCT STATE. 1. The construct state. — There is some reason to believe that Hebrew, like Arabic, once had three cases, the nomina- tive, genitive, and accusative, ending respectively in u, i, and a. The traces of case are clearest in the accusative. But while there is now no external indication of the nomin. or the accus., the genitive relation (e.g. the palace of the king) is indicated by closely connecting the governing and governed words in a way which demands special attention, as it has no analogy in the corresponding Greek or Latin construction. The first word (\\qyq palace), which is considered as dependent, is said to be in the construct state or in construction ; the S^ond word {king), which is not dependent, is said to be in the absolute state. 2. (a) The cstr. relation corresponds most nearly to the relations expressed by of in English, in all its many senses : e.g. the palace of the king the son of the father, a ring of gold, the fear of God, a song of Zion. This relation^ though § 1 7. CASES. THE CONSTRUCT STATE. 59 usually, is not invariably expressed by of\ when the first word is, as it may be and often is, an adjective or participle, it may be expressed by in, &c. ; e.g. in " great in power, fair in appearance, broken in heart," great, fai?^, and brokett would be in the construct, power, appearance, and heart in the absolute. The point is that the two words together make up one idea. Now the first half of a. relation like son of — , great in — , forming no complete idea of itself, the emphasis of the whole expression lies on the second half The cstr. and the abs. are considered to form together an accentual unity, like words connected by maqqeph (§ 10. 3); the chief accent naturally falls on the second half or absolute, consequently the first half or construct is hurried. In this way tJie cstr. is uttered as shortly as is possible in consistency with the laws of pronunciation in the language ; therefore any merely tone- long vowel within the word will be shortened or lost ; e.g.' abs. "15"^ (^ in both cases tone-long, § 6. 2 b), constr. "i?'^. This is the shortest form such a word can assume. (b) Further, the final ni of the plur. ivi and the dual dyivi is elided, and these terminations become e\ thus, from plur. D"*"!^"! we get constr. ^l^T (since 5> when hurried, is reduced to 3, and 2T miist become 3'^., by § 6. 2 d. i. ; and the sh^wa is vocal, representing as it does an original ^. Consequently, if I the third radical is a b'ghadJiMphath, it will not take daghesh lene: abs. pi. Q^1?3 [sing. 133 heavy\ constr. ''^33-not ''T!??). (c) The dual cstr. is similarly formed ; eg. abs. D^pj? horns, cstr. \3")i5 ; abs. Dl^^ hands, cstr. ''1\ So from nsb^ Up^ dual abs. D:nab' (§ 1 6. 3 d, 5 d), cstr. ^nsb'. (d) \n fern, sing, the original ending n — (§ 16. 4. 8) is resumed : abs. HD^D mare, cstr. Hp^D ; abs. Hi^nv righteousness, cstr. rif?!^ (because 1>* = "IV : qidliqatJi). "^91^ gi'ound, cstr. nonx (because ^^f = >*, § 1 6. 2 d. ii.). (e) Fein. pi. cstr. ends, like abs., in ni, but is shortened, like all constructs, as much as possible ; pi. abs. J^^P"IYj cstr. nipn^. D'lD, with its unchangeable vowel, illustrates the endings in their simplest form : the other illustrations show how the changeable vowels are affected — 1^^ upright, "IJ hand, nsb' Up. 6o §17. CASES. THE CONSTRUCT STATE. Mas. Fern. Ads. Cstr, Abs. Cstr. sing. DID horse DID iiDiD mare np^iD plur. D^p^iD „ ^piD niD^D „ niDiD dual D^pID „ iD^lD DflD^D „ "npiD Mas, Fern. Mas> Fern. abs. sing. "^^J rr\\:)\ abs. sing. IJ ,T T cstr. „ "1^': n-1^^' cstr. 'V_ nsK' ads. plur. D^"j^^. T : abs. dual D^lj D^nsb' cstr. „ ^15?'*. ni-iK^^^ cstr. ^ll >rk^ Rule I. — ^. The construct never has the article: the absolute (if it be definite) has it — not of course with proper names. Thus the king s horse (never in this order in Hebrew, but always the horse of the king), "H^^n D^D (not 'Hx'^n D^Dn) ; the horses of the king, "^b^n ^p^D (not T|pK)n '•p^Dn) ; the word of the prophet, ^''?3n lai ; the righteousness of the people, rii^nv Dyn ; the lips of the girl, "Tiysn ^nsb^. So with adjs. : a good- looki7tg girl, n^5"}P nnita my 3 (lit. good in appearance), a woman of good understanding (''3^ ^^^^ '^'f^, lit. good of under- standing) ; and with participles, the broken-hearted, ^p'naK'J (lit. those who are broken, pi. cstr. of 13^^ in heart). b. If the abs. is definite, the constr. is also definite ; eg. ^'^^ nDnpian the man of war, the warrior ; but •i?'^: ^ ^""^ ^ warrior ; niV niDTD {the psalm of David, bee. D. is definite). So ^'\-^'' in the mountain of Yahweh. The indefinite in such ^cases is usually expressed by putting ? {to) before the absolute: inp liOTD a psalm of David. Rule 2. — The construct must immediately precede the noun with which it goes ; therefore two (co-ordinate) con- structs cannot precede the same noun ; e.g. the hands and lips of the man would not be ^^'^'^ ^D^^l ''T., because ^T. being con- struct must precede 6J'''Kn. Hebrew writes therefore the hands of the man a?id his lips, vriDb^ K^''Sn n^ ; the princes sons and daughters, not i^^n ni^n^ ^33 but vniDn'i nb'n \:)3. Similarly ^ 1J is fern., but may be used here for illustration's sake, as it has not the fern, ending. § 17. CASES. THE CONSTRUCT STATE. 6 1 in phrases like the God of heaven and earth, the cstr. is, as a rule, repeated: thus P.?? '^^). °)^?n 'n'^.^: rather than pN*m D^DD'n N"if5N (bee. then ^px would be separated from P.? I? God of the eartJi). Such a succession of constructs, however, as D''*np K^ ^"}."7. the way to the tree of life ; ^nnx '•.»n ^}y) ^yy^_ the days of the years of the life of my fathers, constitutes a unity and is perfectly normal.^ Rule 3. — An adj. qualifying a noun in the cstr. state must stand after the compound expression, and, as the noun in the cstr. is definite, the adj. has the article ; e.g. the good horses of the king, caitsn ^^^n ^p^D (not -^^y^ DUlton '•did, because the cstr. must immediately precede its abs.) = the horses of the king — viz. the good ones. So tJie kings good mare, r\y^'\2i7\ Tjb^n np^D (ai^n would be the good ki?zgs mare). If the gender and number of the cstr. and abs. happened to be identical, a certain ambiguity would arise : T\'2'}i;pn np^D nnitsn the queen's good mare, the good queetis mare\ but these cases would be obviously few, and the context would usually decide. Ambiguity may be definitely avoided by the use of a relative clause ; e.g. tJie queen's good mare, nniisn nDiDH nzifep "i^K ; i.e. tJie good mare which {belongs) to the queen. The above illustrations show that, though an adj. agrees with its noun in gend. and numb, it does not agree in state. Even when a noun is in the cstr. its adj. is in the abs. 3. Use of the accusative e?iding. — The accus. ending a has been retained in one particular usage, n ^ is added to words to express direction or motion towards. The ending in this use of it, which is probably a revival and extension of its former use, has 7iot the tone, eg. "^J^^^ northward (not "^li^V, because the first syllable is pretonic), ninn towards the mountain (not ^^\!(3, § 1 1 c). It may even admit a preposi- tion before its word ; e.g. 5^7^^^^ to SheoL It may be appended to the plur. ; e.g. t^'O'^^'^'^ heavenwaj'ds, and even to the cstr. state, eg. ^IDi"" nn^| to the house of Joseph. This termination, called by some He locale because it ^ Notice that the article (or its equivalent, eg. pron. suff. 7ny, his, etc., § 19) appears only at the e?td. 62 § 1 7. CASES. THE CONSTRUCT STATE. usually has reference to place, is sometimes extended to time ; e.g: nD^p; n^rp^p from year (lit. days) to year. It cannot be used with persons : to {toivards) David would not be nnn, but ^"it^n. lisv/ north D>nvp Egypt n^J?/ bed, {i^3K poor mi/i Jwind (spirit t,;^r valour ■ ( force, army ^ • (deliverance n^VP/ command "^^V/ city ^?^ understanding niin/. law n^in/ wall T T flesh nsbo/ queen nay: daughter vans four ^.1?.^ Abigail hS'^^f. Sheol, the underworld in;; to go down "ip?^ to keep nps to review "'^f to break X'^\ to break down P? to break throughi {e.g. a Wall) EXERCISE. TRANSLATE. t^^ni ntz^^S ^^i^ni^ ^t\ np^ 2 : n^^^^ ^?:io Din nntr ^^ irinntp t^S 4 : D'')?'^? on dot ^5v:;itA 7 : nrD^n" '^h mn^ nnini^ 6 tD^n'^sin tr^t:^ rs&cnv ^h^ri n^tps :njrT Di^'n ^mn| ^tp^^ : S^n' "vi^tr^h^ m y-^.^^n n?^^^ 1 1 : i^rr' yy^sr? ^:^5t\ (not PPJ), 2?!? (not 327) both vowels are tone-long, and are therefore both sub- ject to change. These vowels, having been rarely expressed by the so-called Vowel-letters (§ 2. 3 e\ may very generally be distinguished from pure long, and diphthongal, vowels, which were usually so expressed (§ 2. 3). In general only qdmeg and eej^e are tone-long in nouns, as in the above illus- trations ; holein being for the most part unchangeably long, and therefore usually represented by 1 ; e.g. 7\1l {gddhdl\ 3Di3 (kdkhdbh). In these words the a is subject to change, being only tone-long, but not the o. The forms with changeable vowels seem capable of being generalized under three classes or Declensions. ^ In dependent clauses with ^"^ for, that, (Sic, the pronoun is put last. 64 § i8. THE FIRST DECLENSION. I. A large number of words are of the same form as the perfect of verbs, and are chiefly participles or adjectives, though many are substantives. With these may be classed some other forms of words that are subject to the same laws. Together they may be called THE FIRST DECLENSION. They are words having : ^ ^ in the pretone (iPJ, i'na), or a in the tone (337, 3313), or a in both places ("i3"i, n^'J). If the principles concerning the effect of the tone upon the vowels (§ 6) be clearly understood, and also the rules for the formation of the plur. (§ 1 6) and the construct (§ 1 7), no special rules for this declension are necessary. We have only to remember that when words are increased at the end {e.g. by D"* . , n^, &c.) the accent plants itself upon the significant inflectional addition; e.g. ">Si, but CJ^l?^. The tone, falling on bhdr in the sing., falls on rim in the pi. : bhd, being pretonic, has the long d^ and the original da of ddbhar, being now two places from the tone (and open), becomes d\ The construct, which, as we have seen, is always made as short as possible (§ 1 7. 2 a), becomes "13^ (sing.) and ^"}.?1 (pi.) : the sh^wa in pi. is vocal, hence no daghesh in UgJiadhJ^phath letters ; eg. "'Mb, ni33^. Note that the form d—e^ e.g. li?.J, has a in the constr. sing. ii?t. A few words have in the construct fghol in both syllables : e.g. "1^3 wall^ cstr. "^"IJI (pronominal suffix, § 19, regularly of the type nna Ms wall) ; hns shoulder, c. ^ins ; TjT thigh, c. "qT ; ^23 heavy, c. both n33 and ^33. Cstr. plur. (nc'i = ) n::'^ (\:i?T = ) ^:pr n3n» Sing. Plur. Cstr. sing. (i) upright T T Dnc^ "'^' (2) old, old man, elder \\>l D^Jpf ii?r (3) great Sin? D-'in-jii "a^i (4) blessed •1^3 D^ans •1^3 (5) overseer TPE3 DH^pB Tips (6) heart ^?.^ ni33ij "^i? (^ (7) star 3313 D^33i3 33i3 (8) desert isnp ■^3irp 8. T E FIRST DECLENSION. 65 Rem. — The form c'l, 2, 3 with vowels a — dy a — e, a — 6^ may be considered the typical forms of this declension, see § 22. I. The forms 4, 5 are pass, participles, and 6 is a less common nominal formation, 2. Fe?ninz?ie nouns ending in n ^ retain in the constr. sing. the original n_ of the feminine (cf § 16. 4. 8). The construct, as usual, is pronounced as rapidly as is consistent with the laws of the language (§ 17. 2 a): abs. nsb Hp^ cstr. riDb^. Abs. sing. ^?'^^ righteous7iess. cstr. (ni^nv = ) nipnv „ plur. ^^P*]V righteousnesses. „ (nip^v = ) niplv „ sing, ^y^ corpse. „ (n^33 = ) nba The shVa in the cstr. (sing, and pi.) is vocal. But in cstr. sing, of J^3";f blessiiig, the first syllable is closed ^313. Some fem. nouns retain the long e under inflection : e.g. n7T3 plunder^ cstr. ri7T3 ; n3pa thing stolen^ 3 sing. masc. suff. (§ 19) in^pa. 3. A few monosyllables with changeable vowels {a e) in the tone attach themselves to this declension. They are probably real dissyllables, which have undergone contraction. The chief are l) hand, 0"=; blood, n fish, T^! tree. They are inflected exactly like the last syllable of ■i?'=J (or li^T) ; as this is in sing. abs. "^3 cstr. "'S plur. abs. D^l^ cstr. "'^3 so we have „ „ i^ „ ^\ „ „ ^'r\ „ i^. n „ n^ „ „ ci^vJ! „ ''^, So D^3B/^^ (plur.), cstr. ^33. WORDS FOR PRACTICE. ■I3T male T T "131 word b^nj proverb ^33 heavy "iDj leopard ■ivp short Uummary D^ori perfect nab^/ lip n3"i3y. blessing riDij^y. vengeance n733y; corpse mixp^/.J N'3J prophet «n3 fat t^^^i5 holy Exercise. — Write the cstr. sing, and the abs. and cstr.pl. of the above words. (The ^^5. and cstr. dual of i^r'^*.) DitJ^ two i?in sand ^P^ to gather Nbj to lift up d; sea ^ Same as abs. 5 66 § 19- THE PRONOMINAL 5UFFIXES. pnf. Isaac :ipr Jacob m Esau N^TV Ezra nyy/ counsel D^ there nia^why? i'^")!)! Carmel EXERCISE. PARSE AND TRANSLATE. ,11? ,^!?tp^ '"^''^^ '^''^?^ 'J?^?"l '^^^"l >''^^?5 '^31 ,nib^^n3. : D*:73n ^:;?)"^Jr ^^^rr) : on^ ,riiD"|^ ,n^p5 ,^npip ,nn^ ,^1^,72 -^^Ji mn^ in-r n^ri 3 : ^^dd^ Dni^n-Ss-n^ «"^i|n ins 2 ntn Dy^ '^rijns 5 : D^p^?n ii^^i mn^ rn-in 4 tD^^^^i^rr : D^pt^n y^p-^^ nh^n^ri nii^^tpn ^itp-rib^ ^V^^ 10? 7 nDt?-S:jr "ityi^ ^imi o^Dtz^n ^n:Di:D3 115 ^^n -^tz^n nob^ 8 «t?i 10 : ^wv n*" D^-T^ni npi?^ 7lp T'ipn pm^ -^t^t^ 9 : d'Tt XT X •• •• : • -X - : J -:i- ' ) - > -r : • - t ^ r - : D^n^^n n-^in •^ddi t^itv t^np^*^ 12 : ^d:^^ ]wS The law of Yahweh is perfect. The king saw the fat kine upon the bank (lip) of the river. Ye have eaten the flesh of fat oxen. 11 The words of the lips of Yahweh (are) upright. I (am) not a man of words. Good (are) the words of the law of Yahweh. The waters (are) upon the face of the ground. We have heard the words of the prophets of the God of all the earth. Thou hast kept the heart of this people from evil. ^ Very great (are) the righteousnesses of God. Blessed (are) the upright of heart. The vengeance of the people (was) great. The proverbs of the wise king (are) perfect. He destroyed all the fishes of the river. § 19. THE PRONOMINAL SUFFIXES. The separate Personal Pronouns are used only to express the Nominative or as Subject (§ i 2). I . Hebrew has not largely developed the adjective ; in- stead of saying /lofy hill, silver idols, eloquent man, it says Jiill of holiness, tjnp "in ; idols of silver, ^D3 77s ; man of luords, 0^3*1 ly^K, and the like. Similarly for my horse it says horse-of-me ) the possessive pronouns my, thy, his^ our, ^ Usually with def. art. = the garden land. § 19- THE PRONOMINAL SUFFIXES. 6y 8ic., are altogether wanting. In other words, what we have in such cases is — ideally — a noun in the construct, followed by a personal pronoun in the absolute, which, how- ever, is not now written as a separate word, but attached to the noun as a sufifix. There are a few words in which this process is still perfectly clear, and the pronoun is present in practically its original form; ^.^. =in'5« his father {idX\i&[- of him, i<^n) ; but in all words the pronoun is really present, though not often so obvious ; e.g. io^D Ids horse. Here the original sus-htt (horse-of him) became first, by means of the helping vowel a (appropriate before the guttural Ji) silsahii ; then h disappeared, as it so easily does (§14. i e), leaving siisaii, which easily passes into susd (cf. § 2. 2. i). All the so-called pronominal suffixes correspond, with simple modifications similarly accounted for, to the (signifi- cant parts of the) personal pronouns § 12, except that in the second person k appears instead of /. The slight occasional differences between the forms of the suffixes, according as they are attached to singular or plural nouns, should be care- fully noted. E.g. in Qj^'^P^D their hoi^ses, the n of the original 3rd pers. pron. (on) is preserved ; in QD^D their horse, it has disappeared (as in io^io). 2. The suffixes are divided into light and heavy \ the heavy are those containing two consonants — o;?, 13, on, jn (not ^: nu, for the ^i is a vowel) ; all the others are light. Before the heavy suffixes, the noun, which is always an ideal construct, assumes the real construct form : e.g. D3"in"n the word of you, your word ; O^^l^l , the words of yozi, your words ; Q']''?.^^. the words of them, their words ("i^'^. and ''1^'n being respec- tively cstr. sing, and pi. of "i3"n) ; so D^np^D your mare, Ci^npnv your righteousness, D^^nsb' your lips. Before the light suffixes, the regular rules of vocalization apply (§ 6), which are illustrated, e.g., in the formation of the plural— D''"I5'^ from ■1?'^. Thus, my word = '•^^i : the accent falls at the end, on the suffix ; the pretonic, being open, is long ; the vowel before that, being in an open syllable, vanishes into shVa. (!"!?'^ would exhibit the true construct form : but the short vowel in the open pretone would violate one of the funda- mental principles of vocalization, and is manifestly impos- 68 § 19. THE PRONOMINAL SUFFIXES. sible.) So i"i91 his zvord, ^3^3^ our word. (The accent falls on the - : hence =1^?.?^ would be again impossible.) So ••fisb my lip, not ""riS^. Similarly with a plural noun : my words, "•^5'^ ; our ivords, 'i^^^^^, not ^^''^^'i (because ^ij is not one of the heavy suffixes). The accent falls on the --, and the vocalization follows as a matter of course. So "H"!??^ (/) thy lips, «^ns'^ our lips ; but DH'riSt:^ their lips. For purposes of vocalization, it is obviously important to know where the accent falls : in the paradigms it is specially marked, when it does not fall upon the last syllable. It may be put thus : the monosyllabic and all the heavy suffixes take the accent; e.g. ^^91 ^^€^ word, X^y^'}'y^your words \ dis- syllabic suffixes (except the heavy suffixes attached to plur. nouns) take the accent on the penult ; e.g. ^3p^D our horse, iJ'nnT our word, rj"'^.9"l her words, but Cinnn-n their words. NOUN WITH SUFFIXES. Mas. Fern. Singular nouft DID "in-n HD^D nsb' n|5"iv (horse) (word) (mare) (lip) (right! Eousness) sing. I c. my "•p^D •T : ••riD^D ^nab' 'r'i^iv 2 m. thy 'fiP'lD Tia^ ^np^D •rinsb^ ^^P^y 2 /thy •ipiD 1"}?! •jnpiD "^D??^ ^DPIV 3 m. his iD^D n2"i inpiD insB^ IDTO 3 /her HD^D mn^ nnp^D vTm nnpiv plur. I c. our ^:p1D ^:^3"n i^np^D •• T : ^Jn|"jnv 2 m. your D3D1D D3-im V :- : Dsnp^D DansB^ DDnpiy 2 /.your IDD^D 1313^. |3np^D i?r»?>'^ i^r^PlV 3 ;;/. their DD^D D-in-n T T : DHDID T T nn^p Dnpnv 3 /their |D^D n?i inp^iD ]nm I^^IV Plur. noun D"'p1D Dna-n niDiD D^nDb nipiv { ;horses) (words) (mares) (dual) (righteousnesses) sing. 1 c. my ^p^D nai ^nlDID ^nsb ••nipny 2 ;;/. thy •Tj^p^lD l^^n^ ^^niD^D ^I^nBb' ' ^^nip-iy 2 /thy •|^6lD •]n3T Tj^niD^D !];nQb^ i:5iplV 3 m. his VD^D rin-n vniD^D vneb vnip-iy 3 /her •TB'ID T V T : n^iniDiD T .TnQb^ n^nipiv § 19- THE PRONOMINAL SUFFIXES. 69 plur, I c. our ^J'DJiD ^J"-^!-! 'u'^niD^D ^i^nab^ i3''nip"|^ 2 ;;/. your ciD^D^D D^nn"! DD-niD^D D3^na'^ '23*'nipn^ 2 / your l^^DiD lannT l^'nio^D ja^nsb^ l^'-n^pix % m. their DH-DiD Dnnni DnTiiDiD DnTiab' CDn) on^nipiv 3 /. their. in'oiD jn^nnT in''niD^D jn^nsK^ I'T^^PI^ Note (i.) that the shVa before the 2nd pers. sufif. sing, and plur. attached to a sing, noun is vocal ; hence the kaph does not have the daghesh lene. T|^'=J d'bhdr'kJid (in pause ^13^^), D313T dfbharkhem. (ii.) The suffix V— is pronounced dzv (VWD = susdiv). The ^ is ignored in pronunciation, but it represents an earlier stage in the history of the word (cf. § 5.6 c). (iii.) Suffixes to fern. plur. nouns, curiously enough, are preceded by ••, which, appropriate with masc. plur. (because it is really tjie cstr. plur. ending), is, with fern, nouns, strictly speaking, neither necessary nor justified ; with the result that the plural is in such cases doubly indicated ; e.g. ^3^niDiD. (iv.) The helping vowel between stem and suffix is ultimately traceable to z or ^ : a before gutturals, as we have seen, ^?ls--«-(/^)// = iD^D, so DD^D {h dropped) ; i in other cases ^iD^D (tone-long e) is from an ultimate sus-i-nit. (v.) The dual takes the same suffixes as the plural, e.g. *ij hand^ t3"'.1^ hands, nn^ her Jiands, ^J''']^ our //., D^n" your h. (vi.) The suffixes of sing, nouns are sometimes joined to fern. pL, particularly 3 //. ; e.g. Dm:j'D3 their souls (instead of Dn''ni:^'a3), DniiiT their generations. face Q"'^Si (//.) son, 1?, pi D^:^ daughter nzi, pi ni^zi my face ^^3 the man's face t^'''Nn '•33 before me ^^£)7 before the man ti'^Nn ^pap before thee ^^?.?? before you ^5^^?? after ''"^nx after me ''inx Rule I. — The noun with suffix, being already definite, does not take the def. art. (cf. § 13. 7 a), but naturally its adj. does; e.g. my good horse, Hitsn ""p^D [iny Jiorse, the good one^ ; your evil words^ ^''Vlf) ^^''Tlr^l ; thy strong hand, npjnn ?j"i"'^. 70 § 19- THE PRONOMINAL SUFFIXES. Rule II. — The suffix is repeated with each co-ordinate noun : e.g. Jie took his sons and daughters, vni:3"nNl V33-nN np7 (cf. § 13.7 b). Particles, such as Prepositions and Adverbs, are generally Nouns in a fragmentary condition, and may take Suffixes which are attached to them precisely as to Nouns. For 3 and p see § 14. I f ; for IP see §15.2. A number of words take the suffixes of plur. nouns. Some of the words are really plur. ; e.g. '•^nx after (pi. cstr., hinder parts) — hence ^"inx after me, ^^'JHr ^fi^^ yo^-> ^^'V^ after him, &c. ; others, like ?y upon, ?^ to, resume before suffixes the yodh which originally formed part of the root ('•^x, ""by), thus producing the impression of a plural. '•S'y ^^vi ,'q''^y yh)^ ,n^^i; ,ir^y oa'-by pr\hv - T ' ' V T 5 '•- T ' T T ' T V T ' " T ' •.•••-; ' V " ": ' ''^^ i^):^ ^^'^ ^^'^ ^^^ j''^'.^^ ,°?'.^^ p'^^^ Like ?V is ^y unto, as far as. df> Lot Tinx Ehud ^W^f Samuel r\i:h\f Solomon Q^.^.asj Ephraim 3^D good things, goodness ^^""^ f meditation ^^ C^?) with ^}}, before, in presence of nn| opening, door ^l^.f door "139 to shut, close Vi?^ to thrust, strike, blow (a trumpet) nhB^K^^)/ 1^°^" (^"^^ blowing) n''"i?/. covenant n?sny; prayer ^Dn mercy, kindness tOQC^b judgment, ordinance, justice o?\V long duration, age D?^vp from of old obiyny for ever T'P^ continually n*}? to cut off, cut down n^"l2 n"]3 to make a covenant np3 to trust |BV to hide, lay up 2nx to love bv^ to do EXERCISE. TRANSLATE. ,^;^ ,n^ip?p ,ap^^tpp ,TJ^ ,Tin31?i ,vnDtp ,innin ,''T ,Dn^^^ ,1:211^ ,^2^k ,^'^nDt2: ,^^:d^ ,^:d^ ,nTV2yi I V •• : ' T T I ' T •• ; It-: i- - t V V — : t : Av - • t -: t v t t ^ PI. of t^^N\ •HE VERB. : T T I • :iT •• T : • •• : 'At: v - : t - '- t - T ' It T : • I V T T T : A" v: "^ iv •• : • • : - T ' V T • -:i- I'T •• : • 't : • : At •• : - t - : t):^^ -^t^ ;in^t5 1"! n72Y :nri«' ^nh^ ^r]^r2^ nnn^ T : - T V -: ' : I - t ' t it - v: • : - t ^'^ * '• ^r^n^^^ nr^ 8 vo-t« ^:!i 1:1: tj!!^ D^ntoi7 rh^^B^ T^'i"'^ • : - t t It t •• : V V 'At • : I - t : - t '•,•••»• Your blessings. Her corpse. My commandments. Her lips. Thy words. His face; her face; my face. And his words we heard out of the fire. Thy law (is) in my heart, (O) my God. God has redeemed his holy (ones). Thou hast heard my voice out of thy temple. We sat before her. The words of thy (/!) lips (are) as the sand which (is) upon the shore of the sea. He came and in his hand a sword. Very good (are) the proverbs of his lips. We have sold our asses. tYe (are) my sons and my daughters, saith (per/.) your God. My heart (is) in his law continually. Thou hast kept their heart. We have not kept the covenant of our God with all our heart. The day of vengeance (is) in his heart. Ye have kept my law and my commands. He lifted his corpse upon the ass. Their hearts (are) fat. Thy perfect law. This (is) flesh from my flesh. By (2) all his great prophets. § 20. THE VERB. I . Root. — The root of a verb is considered to be the Jrd sing. masc. perf. of the simple form (§ 13. 5), e.g. "i?K^ he broke. This form is called Qal \P\>) " light," in distinction from all the other forms, which are heavy, being loaded by additional inflectional letters, e.g. 12^'3 he was broken, or by the duplication of a radical, e.g. ">3'^ be broke in pieces. ^ The sign known as "Athnah indicates the chief pause within the verse, as Silluq indicates the last tone-syllable in the verse (cf. Gen. i. i, X^'^T\ nsi D^DK^n nx DM'^X nib n''5J'N"l3). The latter cannot be con- fused with methegh, which never stands on a tone-syllable (§ 10. 2). 2 Pausal form. See § 10. 4 b. ^ Relative unexpressed, as often in poetic styie. * See § 10. 4 c. i. 72 § 20. THE VERB. 2. Tenses. — The verb has not Tenses strictly speaking. It has two forms, which express not time but the quality of an action as complete or incomplete ; the one expresses a finished action, and is called ihQ perfect, the other an un- finished action, and is called the imperfect. It must be clearly understood that these words are not used in the sense which they bear, e.g. in English or in Latin grammar. The perfect action includes all past tenses of other languages, such as perfect, pluperfect, and future perf. The imperfect includes all imperfect tenses, e.g. present (especially of general truths), the classical imperfect, and the future. The so-called Tenses will be dealt with more fully in § 46. Suffice it here to say that Hebrew is not so helpless in the expression of time as might be supposed. As the perfect tense expresses completed action, it is the natural tense to express the English past, eg. Kr\ he pur- sued\ and as the imperfect tense expresses incomplete action, it is the natural tense to express the English future, e.g. P|"T]^. he will pursue. It is wrong, however, to describe the tense on this account as \\\q future-, this is at once to limit it and to suggest a false point of view. 3. Moods. — The perfect and imperfect also do duty for moods. Either may express the indicative : e.g. Jie pursued ~ perf., he will pursue — impf. The subjunctive, optative, &c., and, broadly, words implying potential or contingent ideas, are generally expressed by the imperfect and its modi- fications (§ 23) ; eg. of every tree thou mayest eat) hearken, that ye may live] hasten, lest thou be consumed; may he judge ! let us go ! This usage is thoroughly in accordance with the fundamental idea of the impf. — incompletion — as already explained. It might seem that this tense was greatly overworked, and that its use would give rise to endless obscurities and ambiguities : in point of fact, as we shall see, this is rarely so. Besides, there is an imperative, which is closely con- nected with the imperf; two forms of infinitive, called absolute and construct ; and a participle. 4. Degrees of the stem idea. — The stem idea or meaning § 30. THE VERB. 73 of the verb is presented in three conditions or degrees ; the Simple (Qal), as to eat; the Intensive, as to eat much, often, greedily ; and the extensive or Causative, extending the action over a second agent, as to make to eat, to give 07ie to eat. These are formed by manipulating or adding to the radicals of the verb in a way which has no approximate analogy in English. It is as if the intensive idea of the verb " lament " — to lament much, often, pi'ofessionally — were expressed by some such form as limment ; and the causative idea, to cause some one to lament, were expressed by some such form as hilmint. Each of these three conditions of the stem idea once appeared in three voices. Active, Passive, and middle or Reflexive, though some parts are now lost : only the inten- sive has all three. Thus : Simple. Intensive. Extensive or Causative, act. act. act. — pass. pass. reflexive reflex. — 5. Conjugations. — What are called in other languages conjugations, do not exist. The various classes of irregular or weak verbs most nearly correspond to conjugations ; but if the regular verbs be thoroughly learned, it will be found that the so-called irregular verbs follow naturally from them by the application of the fundamental rules of the language (§§ 3~^o). The above seven parts are all growths of the original simple stem, which undergoes some modification, consonantal or vocalic or both (illustrated above by lament), to produce them. 6. Inflection. — Inflection to express person takes place by the connection of the significant parts of the personal pronoun with the stem (§12 and § 15. 3); and the third sing, as simplest is taken first, then the second, and finally the first. In an action which is finished, rather the action itself than the actor is prominent: hence in the perfect the stem is put before the personal designations. In the im- perfect, or action going on, the actor is more prominent, and the personal modification is prefixed. 74 § 20. THE VERB. THE PERFECT. Sing. Plur. 3 mas. ^tpi"; he killed, &c. 3 c. ^^Pj^^ they, &c. 3/ ^^^1^ she „ 2 m. jn?tPiJ thou „ 2 m. DJ^7tpj7 ye 2/ i;i|rpp „ 2/ iri^p „ I c. ^nS'IDp I I r. i:^:£5p we 7. Note carefully where the accent falls — usually on the (^. The first syllable is pretonic and open, therefore has tone-long vowel, |5 (§ 6. 2 b), e.g. ^Thv^\>^ (not 'n^PP). The heavy terminations DJ^i, 1^, draw the accent upon them, so that the first vowel, being no longer pretonic and therefore tone-long, naturally vanishes into shVa (§ 6. 2 c), eg. Q^ptpp (not on^ipi?). 8. It will be remembered that nouns and adjs. inflect thus : ^- '^^'\->f' '^1?'^. (§ i^- 3)- Verbs, however, inflect thus: m. ■^^^,/. '"TJ^J (cf. § 6. 2 f). In other words, in verbal inflection with vocalic additions — eg. a of 3rd sing. fem. (n J or it of 3rd pi. (^) — the vowels a e o^ in the tone-syllable become vocal shVa, thus: m. ^Pi^,/ rh):p^^ (not n^^fip), m. ^33,/. nnaa (not nn33), m. ^3',/. "^^^V In the 3rd sing. fem. and the 3rd plur. the first vowel has methegh — "^^^PP, ^ Pijt, because the sh^wa, representing as it does an original full vowel {a), is sounded (§ 6. 2 e, § i o. 2 b). This preserves the a SQund : without methegh, the words would be qotld, qotlu. Naturally, if the third radical were a b'ghadhk'phath, it would not take daghesh lene ; eg. nina she wrote^ ''^na they wrote. 9. Uses of the perfect. — The Perf. expresses: (a) The Aorist (Past), he killed. (b) The Perfect, he has killed. (c) The Pluperfect, he had killed. (d) The future Perfect, he shall have killed. (See §46.) 10. riK or "nN, the sign of the accusative (§ 13. 7), when ^ Most regular vbs. have their second vowel in «', many in /, a few in (§ 22. I). § 20. THE VERB. 7g used with the pronominal suffixes, appears as follows : ^^^ me, ^rij< m. "qris f. t/iee, inj< /ii7n, nnk /ler, ^3m us, D^ns m. jan^l f. fou, Qn^5 m. |n&< f. tke7n. ^ The scriptio plena is also common : '•niN, &c. v.yyw^ anything nnn«/. latter ( 2nd n3K> to fjrget %\ to fall ^y to fly r\ir\ jn behold •^pS) statute fior Joseph ■130 to sell ^"1?' to burn '^'^^ seraph D^nijijo tongs ^»D to lean {act?) ">siD ransom, bribe PK^y to oppress niK^ ox nJpT/. \ n^j to sacrifice 1 n3T!0 altar ^3^1/ glowing stone, coal \^'^ priest EXERCISE. TRANSLATE, v: V : It -^ T • -: I- t : it » ' "^ • ^ : DnD"^toio : D^M D^^n ^iDDtr 9 :T-Q^^^J^^^8 :nnn!^n V : - : ''"^"j ' "^ 7 ' V T #: It tt f t : it: • ^Tsx^sh ^72 -^itr-n^ Dy^-S^i^ ^sin^tp n^^ 12 :i^^^ n^to nsi ^jnnp^ ^?:i Tm "^nptrv ^r:^-nt^i ^Dtiph "^d "^inm • : '- T • - • • ': - T • V : • : '- t • -:i- T : • - • T : i-T : vt'i-t -t tt t: ratir 15 jfSnn ^:^h ntr^^n n-Tr::^ 14, tn^il^ri hv^ Ye did not keep my words. The fire of God fell from heaven. God set (gave) luminaries in the firmament of the heavens. All the males fell before the sword. The heavens of the heavens are God's (dat.), and the earth he has given to the sons of man. Thou hast fallen, O ( ^10)7) kill thou f* ■ ')^tpp killyQ Note carefully where the accent falls. Note further that the first syllable is closed : in other words, the sh'^vva is silent, consequently the second radical, if a b'ghadhk'phath, would take the dagh. lene ; thus pf. 3n3 he ivrote, impf. ^'i^':^\ yikhtobh (not ^ha";). (a) The original vowel in first syllable of impf. of active verbs appears to have been a (!p^\>1 : cf Arabia ydgfu/tf), which was later thinned to / (i?^, : cf ^7.^'! for n^'H from ddbhdr, § 2. 2. 4 and § 6. 2 d). This should be borne in mind, as the a reappears in certain forms of guttural and other verbs to be dealt with afterwards (§§ 34, 40, 42). 3/ ^tOpri she „ 2 m. Vtopri thou „ 2/ ^^rppn thou,, I c. ^top« I „ plur '. 3 m. ^^^p^. they „ If- nAtOpn they,. 2 m. ^^^n ye „ 2/ njVt^ipn „ „ I c. ^tDp:3 we „ § 21. THE IMPERFECT, &C. yj (b) The termination of the 2nd plu. and 3rd plu. sometimes appears as Ji (JvPiP'^), which always bears the tone. (c) Note that the imperative is identical with the impf. except that it drops the pronominal prefixes : thus ?^i?(^). Obviously in the imperative the sh^wa is sounded ; hence, in spite of 3riD;, the imper. is 3h3 (3riD is an impossible form, §7.4). ■ ■ ■ (d) The first syllable of imper. 791?/. s. ^P^i? m. pi is half open ; in other words the sh^wa is vocal, as it represents an original vowel {p\ § 6. 2 e ; therefore l^na not ^3n3. 2. The Infinitive. — Inf. cstr. 7tD|7 to kill (admitting prepositions before it and pronominal suffixes). Inf. abs. S'ilOp (also 7tDp) to kill (admitting neither prefix nor suffix). (a) i. The inf. cstr. is the same as the 2nd sing, imperative. It corresponds roughly to English verbal nouns in -ing\ e.g. ^bp ny a time of (i.Q.for) mourning, a time to mourn. ii. It is used very frequently with the preposition \ (much like our to before inf ) : (i.) after such verbs as begin, co?tti?iue, cease, &c. : e.g. "isPc' ''^^ he ceased to count (occasionally in such cases without ?), and (ii.) to indicate purpose : e.g. I have come to sacjrifice (HBP) to Yahweh. This i? joins so closely with the inf. that the first syllable is closed ; hence nnD^J to write, not 3h3^. (Contrast § 14. i b.) iii. It is used very frequently with pronom. suffixes; e.g. 'S'lTO'i'^ (J/khot/ibko) in his writing, i.e. when he wrote. (b) To the absol. inf nothing can be prefixed or added : it stands alone ("i^i^? or "'pitDip would be impossible), and it has the effect of throwing up prominently the bare idea of the verb. Usually it is accompanied by a finite verb, (i.) When placed before the verb, it strengthens it : "li^^^ VniVD ^Tp:a^ {keeping I kept-, i.e.) / earnestly kept his com- mandments. It is often rendered by an English adverb, such as " surely, utterly," e.g. he will surely visit, *ip^^. "ipS ; 1 The change which the cstr. inf undergoes with pronom. suffixes will be explained in § 29. 2, § 31. 3 c yS § 21. THE IMPERFECT, &C. thou wilt certainly be king, ^^^i^ v'? ; I will utterly (inf. abs.) destroy (impf.). (ii.) When placed after the verb it usually suggests continuance; e.g. )iyo'^ ^ypti^ hear ye continually. Etymologically the cstr. inf. is not related to the absol. as ">21 to "ijl ; the two forms are of independent origin. 3. The Participle. — Act. Part. m. s. 7tDip or h^p killing, i.e. one who kills f. s. TVydp or (more often) n^IOp ^ m.pi. D*'7^p ///. niStpp Pass. Part. m. s. b'lIDp killed, i.e. one who is or has been killed f.s. nS^top m. pL D^S^top / //. n'iS'^top (a) The sh^wa in fern, and pi. of act. ptc. is vocalic, qo-f'ld, -lim, as it represents an original full vowel. The holem is unchangeable, whether written with or without waw. The act. partic. denotes continuous action ; eg. ^t^** &<^n he is, was sitting (not lie sat). (b) Of the passive voice there are few remaining traces besides the participle.^ Uses of the Imperfect. — The Impf expresses: ia) The Present, he kills (especially of general truths ; e.g. a bribe blindeth (impf) the clear- sighted. Ex. 23. 8. {b) The Imperfect, he killed (particularly of repeated past acts, i.e. used to kill-. Latin or Greek impf) ; e.g. a mist used to go up, ♦ . Gen. 2. 6. (c) The Future, he will kill. {d) The Potential, he may or can kill, might, could, would, &c., kill. (See § 46.) ^ When they^;;/. ptc. has the force of a substantive, it tends to retain the long e of the masc. ; e.g. ITI^^ a woman in travail (^\ to bear). 2 For other traces see § 33. 3 c. \ §22. THE VERB ACTIVE AND STATIVE. 8 1 3. Formation of Imper. and Inf. Cstr. — As in Active vbs. the irnperat. of Stative vbs. agrees with the impf,, e.g. ^33, n33^, n33 ; but the infin. cstr. of Stative vbs. is generally in o (not a) ; e.g. 5<3b^, 3hp. Sometimes the inf. cstr. has a fern, ending of the type nsT from N^; ; e.g. mn^-nx n«T^ to fear Yahweh. Other rarer forms occur. 4. Form of the Pai'ticiple. — The Active verb has the Ptc. of the form ^t:p ; the Ptc. of the Stative verb is the same as the Perfect, 3?iJ drawing near, which is strictly a verbal adj. rather than a partic. The 6 of act. ptc. is unchangeable, the a of Stat, is only tone-long, therefore changeable : "i?3, f, nn^r. These verbal adjectives frequently retain their .. in the cstr. plur. ; e.g. '•nob' (as well as "^'-^0 from nr:c> rejoicing. The cstr. pi. of ^'T^ fearing, is always ''i?")''. ; e.g. niiT "•kt those who fear V. 5. Of statives in e, which are numerous, only a few have e invariably, a frequently occurring instead ; e.g. 3"^P and 2")P to draw near. 6. The perfect of Stative verbs usually corresponds to the English present ; e.g. ^ii^^iPJ / am old, ^^p\ I am able, ^^T\\ I know (cf. Lat. novi\ This use of the perf. is found with other verbs denoting affections or states of the mind : ^^ntpB / trust (have set my confidence), ^^"l?! / remember^ memifii, Ixi^vTjixai. The condition or state is regarded as the abiding result of a past experience. i5nJTo be great ' (become great ?b; to be able pno to be sweet pby to be deep „ deep r cnp to be holy jNi; to fear J|bi5 to be little I cnip holy \ „ fearing \ „ little ii?J to be old n^i^ to draw near VP^^ to hear P*iy to be just ^pb to learn 3V"| to be hungry ran to delight in V^^ {V2^) to be sated {ace.) N^p to be full {ace.) 82 § 23- JUSSIVE. COIIORTATIVE. WAW CONSECUTIVE. on^ bread n^^V/. burnt-offering "i^f remembrance, memorial 3p"i to rot njl / ringing cry Dn^y:^/. (time of) youth D^!n^/. life "^^'np/. ((TJ/r. //. 'nc) thought EXERCISE. PARSE AND TRANSLATE. ,-T55? ,^tr:^^ ,b5tpfc^ >o^V5^, ,n^5;^ ,]i?ipn ,^ri5tD,^ ,nAitpn nnir-^ ,^"5?si ,'^l-i5n "7|)-nt^ inptp^ i-;!,? 4 : 0710^ "t:^ nin^ Dtp v^i^^, 3 : D^i?'^?n DV^^ i^T: '? ^W:!^ nw 5 : T^^ "»?'t ^5i« ^trt:^ D^^.:j"in □tri ro^iiS )T^!? "i::t 7 : "t^O inSia '^n'Sb^ mn'^ 6 : nrib^ •• : At T : • ' •- ■•■," . T : -T - v: t it n^ipn nn^ ;i^n'i!^o"7Di nin^ nn« ni*ip 8 ; y^^-^ n^y^ -': • Aw: '•••:• t : r - 't 'it :• • t : -D:ir D7t!J inn? n^n ikh nbSu? n:pt mS 9 : ^1^:0^ ^nsn • •• T t : TT : -?: • •• : -^ ' i-.-t : • t • nninn ^dd-i Tf^^n «np^ 10 :ti^ nnS^ vn'St^ mn^ t "* V •• ; V V ~ t'i ♦ • t ~ : • t v: ^h II :vn^« nirf^-n^ nb^n^S -rnS^ \vr:h v^n "^^^-^5 IT v: V T :•: - : • |--: at - •• : t pKH-^n n«7o mrr^ nn^ uriip 12 j-ntrrb^ ^••jd? p^^, PTODH «S Dno D11 irh^:^ ^nyy^ 13 n^inn I cannot draw near. I will be great. Draw near. The God who made the heavens and the earth I (am) fearing. Ye cannot keep my statutes with (3) all your heart. Thou art little. Hear in order that thou mayest learn to fear Yahweh thy God. They are not able to pursue after me. I am bereaved. I know that thou shalt assuredly reign. Cease to draw near before me, for your hands are full of blood (/>/.). How great art thou (O) my God, very deep are thy thoughts. § 23. JUSSIVE. COHORTATIVE. WAW CONSECUTIVE. I. Besides the ordinary imperfect, which expresses the action simply, there are certain modifications of it which indicate the relation of the action to the speaker's will or feelings. The speaker may throw his own feeling into the word in two ways, either by a sharp, hasty utterance of it, thus expressing peremptory zuis/r, or, on the contrary, by a §23- JUSSIVE. COHORTATIVE. WAW CONSECUTIVE. 83 lengthening out of the word, giving expression to the direc- tion of the mind or action. The short form that arises in the first way is called the Jussive, the other or lengthened form has been named the Cohortative. (i) The Jussive. — The Jussive, which aimed at being as abrupt and brief as possible, arises through a contraction of the last syll. of the impf. ; but the laws of the tone and of the formation of syllables usually make an actual shortening of the imperfect form impossible ; e.g. ^^P^. yiqtSl, could not, even in the interest of abruptness, become ^^pl yi'qtol, for that would violate the principle laid down in § 5. i b; it must therefore remain ^^\?^. yiqtol. Consequently, in all parts of the regular verb except t\\^Hip/iil (§ 27. i a : impf. P^pp^ jussive h\2\>\ — short i of an \i\i\xmXQ ydqtil^ lengthened to tone-long r), the Jtissive coincides with the ordinary impf^\ and in all forms with inflectional terminations the juss. and ordinary impf. coincide. The Jussive is fou7id only in 2nd and 3rd persons. The Jussive (as the name implies) expresses a command^ as i'biT let him kill (thus taking the place of the non-existent 3rd pers. imperative); or, less strongly, an entreaty, request, &c. — may he kill\ or, with a negative, a dissuasion, as ^?pi5n"7K do not (ye) kill. Note (i.) that the imperative is use(J only for commands, not for prohibitions — these require the jussive ( = impf.) ; e.g. kill, ^i'tpi?, but do not kill, 'h\:^\>^'% (not ^iJtpp-bN). (ii.) The regular negative with prohibitions is 76? ; e.g. i^tpph-ps, not vtDpn N7. But ^ can be used of a very em- phatic, and especially of a divine, prohibition, exactly like our thou shalt not ; e.g. 33Jn N? tJwu shalt not steaL (2) The Cohortative. — The Cohortative is formed by adding the syllable n^ a to the impf. As before ^ of the plur., so before cohortative n^, the vowel of the 2nd syllable becomes shVa ; as '•i'9i?^ so !^?9'?? (frofn ^^P^). The Cohort. , is found {yjith. rare exceptions) in ist pers. only — sing, and plur. The Cohort, expresses the direction of the will towards an action, consequently desire, intention, sclf-enco7iragement, or (in I st plur.) exhortation : '"I7??v ^^^ ^^^^ keep, I would keep, ^ Cf. Arabic impf. j«^/////, jussive j/?^///. 84 § 23- JUSSIVE. COHORTATIVE. WAW CONSECUTIVE. / will keep (but more emotional than the simple "»'^ rV!om let us keep, &c. 2. The Emphatic Imperative. — The same termination n^ ^ is added to the imper. 2 m. s. to give it emphasis, as n&ij Oh kill! qofld (half open, from q'tol);^ a form of the type i^^^? qifld also occurs, but chiefly in verbs whose impf and consequently imperative end in a ; e.g. impf. VO^^, imper. yoK^ hear, and nyoc'. This Emph. Imper. appears chiefly in the irregular verb ; e.g. HDip arise (from D^p) — frequently with no appreciable emphasis. 3. Waw Consecutive. — The conjunction 1 and is very fre- quently used not as a mere copulative to join or co-ordinate clauses, but with a certain subordinating power, so as to indicate that what is now added is the result or sequence of the preceding : as, he spake and (and so, and thus, then) it was done. The usage is this : After a simple /^?y^<:/ events conceived as following upon this perf. are expressed by waw joined with the imperfect \ and conversely, after a simple imperfect the events conceived as following on it are expressed by waw with the perfect. But it must not be said or supposed — as was implied by the old name waw conversive — that the waw really converts the one tense into the other : that is impossible. Various explanations of this curious phenomenon have been offered, but none will be probable which contradicts the fundamental character of the pf and impf. as already explained (cf § 46). ( I ) (a) A 11 the verbs following a perfect are put in the impf. if they are immediately preceded by waiv ; but if any word, however small {eg. a pronoun, K^n, or a negative, n^j) inter- vene, then the construction reverts to the proper and natural tense: e.g. In the beginning God created {y^i., N")3) the earth, and the earth was (1 with impf?) without form, and God said (1 with impf), and so on with imperfects. But if the connec- tion between waw and the verb is in any way broken, the pf. is naturally and necessarily used. Hebrew says therefore either and-said {waw impf) God, or and God said (pf ). (b) Waw consecutive with the imperf is pointed exactly ^ This form cannot be fully understood till §§ 29, 31 are reached. § 23- JUSSIVE. COHORTATIVE. WAW CONSECUTIVE. 85 like the Article (§ ii); ^.^. ^bp*l and he killed, ^bpN) and I killed, i'bpai and ive killed. Examples of usage : He found the place and lay down 33*^'»5 Dipsn-rii^ NVD „ and did not lie down 33C^ NPI. „ and the man lay down 3??^ ^'^r\\ p^^r^ 33{p'l (2) (a) Similarly all the verbs following an impf. are put in the pf. if they are immediately preceded by waw, cf. i Sam. 19. 3, ^i^lPVI ^>*?< / will go out and stand; but if the connec- tion is in any way broken, the imperfect reappears. E.g. In that day / will raise up (impf.) the tabernacle of David, and close up (1 with pf.) the breaches thereof, and-its-ruins / will raise up (impf) and / will build it (1 with pf ) as in the days of old. (Am. 9. I I.) Cf Ezek. II. 20. (b) Waw consectitive with the perf is pointed exactly like %vaw copulative (§ 15); i'PPl and he will kill, Q^PPpi and ye will kill, niD^ and he zvill rebel. Examples of usage : he will find the place and lie doivn -3^1 Dip?3n"nx NVp^ „ and will not lie dozvn 33 r^ t^pi „ So completely does this construction with zvaw consecu- tive pervade the language that it may be employed even when no simple tense actually precedes: a book may even begin with it (cf Ruth, Esther, Jonah). (3) To summarize: ^^z^with English /<3r5/ tenses in con- tinuous narrative is usually ivaw consec. impf. following an initial (expressed or implied) perfect : ^;/^ with English future tenses is usually zvaw consec. perf. following an initial (ex- pressed or implied) impf. E.g. (a) God was (p]^) with me and kept (">b^'i) me, and gave (|n*l) me bread, (b) God will be (n!'?,"') with me and keep C*^?^) me and give (ID^^) me bread. In translating into Hebrew, the choice of the first verb as pf. or impf is scrupulously determined by the nature of the idea to be expressed (e.g. Eng. past usually by Hebr. pf, and Eng. fut. by Hebr. impf), and all the subsequent verbs are expressed by waw consec. with the other tense. (4) It is important to note that the Ton. in the impf. with waw consec. is usually retracted from the last syll. to the penult, when this syll. is open (cf § 5. i b), as 3K^'l and he dwelt, "iJpi^'l and he said; while in the perfect the Tone is usually thrown forward — in the i st and 2nd sing, regularly, S6 § 23. JUSSIVE. COHORTATIVE. WAW CONSECUTIVE. but not in ist //. — from the penult to the last syllable: ^j^ppp"! and I shall kill, ^>'^\>). (note the methegh in what is now 2nd place from tone, § 10. 2 a), but 13/Ppl. The drawing backward of the Tone in waw consec. impf. very well suggests its connection with what precedes, and the throwing of it forward in waw consec. perf. suggests its connection with what follows. (5) (a) Waw consec. with impf may follow not only an actual perf. but an expression equivalent to a perf. : e.g. in the year of king Uzziah's death / saw '^?"?^f! ( = and-I-saw, impf after an implied pf — Uzziah died). (b) Similarly waw consec. with pf may follow not only an actual impf. but its equivalent, e.g. a pa7'ticiple, thus : Behold, I am about to raise up (^ptc. D^pp) a nation, and they shall oppress you (^^D^l) — or an imperative, ^"^^ffl ^d S^ ^^^ ^^y- (6) Final clauses, i.e. those indicating the purpose or design of a preceding act, may be expressed by simple waw {not waw consec.) and impf — or to be more correct, jussive or cohortative, e.g. Draw near that I may judge *y^^"'^}_ nip. Serve hifu that he may deliver you 2?ns yp\ ^"T^?^ (i'VO Hiph.). That is, Hebrew simply places the facts side by side, Draiv nigh and I will judge. It may, of course, also use (with the impf) the final particle \W> in order that — which may or may not be followed by 1^'?^ ; eg. I will do marvellous things, in order that thou mayst know that there is none like me Vin (iL-'X) \\fo\, (7) Two verbs of which the meaning is synonymous or the action contemporaneous are sometimes joined by si?npte ^vaw rather than by waw consec. ; eg. ""rinK'! ""^^Pf ""^^^ As for me J am old and Q pretonic, § 15. I d) greyheaded, vQ^I vK^3 they have stumbled and fallen. 7^1 St. to grow up ^y^ to burn nibay; birthright jri3 St. to expire ' *ip9 to visit niK^ Sarah PlVi? to be angry nn Heth ipy to stand laj* to take (capture) T\rr^^ the Hittites aijio Moab ">3D to sell D'^n hither n;n to live EW1 to creep "^na to be strong, prevail b^V. calf nJjK^ to send, stretch out (the hand) tJnj? holiness f\SV {coll.) flying creatures, fowls, birds. ^1)^^ f. cave r? between {p. 190) "|3 (§ 10. 3 b) lest IV witness § 23- JUSSIVE. COHORTATIVE. WAW CONSECUTIVE. 87 ?^y^ deed, practice (only in />/ur., and usually in bad sense), 3 ... 3 (also (3 ... 3) ^^ ... j-^. Usually with 3 ... 3 the first term is the subject and the second the standard with which it is compared ; e.^-. ^^"^3 p^'njTS n^n) and the righteous shall be as the wicked ; '^JJ^J 133 the sojourner as the home- born ; n'y-;D3 •^^D^ i thou art as Pharaoh. EXERCISE. TRANSLATE. trip nni^^ vS:i; 'i?:5iv nn« nirt^^ Dipt^n ^s D"^n i^ipn vl - : - XX .. X - V -: ' X - • -: -»: • A* ' : IX : V - x: • x •• v » -:i- - x . I" XT XX IX I •• - X I X : 7:]b^i D^i^nn v:^^ npSi li^ nStr-^*-]?? nnT^ v"^i I'ito i^ri'^ - X : . - I- I .. .. F- X : X - : • I v x - : Axx - •• ri:i^i V'^^n-T'v i^n ^'^^2 ^nin D^iDm 8 : Dbl^r^ ^m' X T : IX X IX : X •• : - '- X l V X X - •• IX X X T Thou shalt not lie down in that place. Let me lie down. Do not (ye) draw near. May Yahweh judge between me and (between) this people. Hear my prayer (O) our God. ^ The word 3 as, like, uses the poetic form i^3 as the base for light suffixes, with which the accent is on the penult, with pretonic^ ; and the base 3 for heavy suff., with which the accent is on the last syll., with pretonic a. Thus : ':i63, ^i63, tjiDS, ini63, niD3, 13i53, D33, CH?. ^ V^jy . . . "IE^X = ^« which (cf. § 13. 2 a). ^ = at (about) to-day, i.e. now, at once, first of all. '^ Impf. of n!?^^. ^ '•n pf. Qal of \'n, the ultimate form of n^n to live (cf. 3D, 33p, § 42) ; and for change of ultimate ''_ into H , see § 44. The word cannot be completely understood till these later paragraphs are reached. The waiv has , because it is in pretone, § 15. i d. 88 § 24. SCHEME OF THE REGULAR VERB. Sell to me this cave that I may bury my dead there. The man ate of the tree which (was) in the garden and God was very angry. And the calf I took and burnt it ^ with (in the) fire. Thus saith {pej'f^ Yahweh : Behold I will-give {ptc.) this city into the hand of the king of Babel, and he will burn it^ with fire. Sarah bare to her husband a son, and the boy grew up. And God called the light {dat) day and the darkness he called night. And thou shalt keep his law continually. And I remembered his words. And it shall be, like prophet, like priest. § 24. SCHEME OF THE REGULAR VERB. simple. intens. , caus. simp. intens. caus. act. qal pi'el ' hiph'il ^J^Q ^y? ^"•ysn pass. — pu'al hoph'al — ^v^ ^vpn ;r/f. niph'al hithpa el | — hv'^l hv;^T)r} I h^p^ Wi? ^''^Pr' '*7^p ^^^PO ^•^"Q^ ^t^pnn 1. The names simple, intensive, &c., have been explained § 20. 4. 2. The word ^ys to do, formed the paradigm of the orig- inal grammarians. Now the language, possessing no general terms like reflexive, intensive act.^ and such like, made use of the parts of this verb that were simple reflex., ifitens. act. and the like, as names for the same parts in all verbs. Thus the intens. act. of bvQ Paal is 7^3 Ptel\ hence instead of speaking of the intens. act. of a verb we speak of its Pi el-. the caus. act. of H'? is ?'VBn HipJtil\ hence instead of speak- ing of the caus. act. of a vb. we speak of its HipJiil, &c. ; — much as if, taking amare as the paradigm Latin verb, we should describe monebo as the amabo of monere, or rexi as the amavi of regere. The simple form of the vb., however, is always called the Qal, not the Paal. The use of ?V^ as a Paradigm is unfortunate, because, its ^ ns with suffix, § 20. 10. § 25- THE SIMPLE REFLEXIVE, NIPH'AL. 89 second radical being a guttural, the characteristics of several of the parts, such as the intensive, which duplicates the middle radical, are obscured ; ^VQ necessarily fails to indicate this duplication, which is obvious, ^.^., in such a word as ?t3i?. Hence the word ?PP (though poetical and defective) is generally used in modern grammars.^ 3. " Intensive " means that which is increased within^ and to express intensity the middle radical of the verb is doubled ; eg. -'tsip. " Extensive " or causative means what is increased without ; and to express the causative a syllable is attached to the outside ; eg. A^pipn. 4. Very few verbs are used in all these parts — only six, it is said, out of about fourteen hundred ; but they must all be equally familiar to the student, because, with many verbs, the intensive or the causative forms are as frequent as, or more frequent than, the Qui, and are sometimes even the only form in use: eg, nD3, intensive, to try^ test\ ^yK^n, causative, to cast. But these forms are modelled exactly on the Qal\ so that when the Qal^ in its pf., impf., imper., inf, and ptc, is thoroughly understood, the other forms put no additional strain on the memory. Hence the importance of knowing the Qal. WORDS FOR PRACTICE ON THE ABOVE SCHEME. 3n3 to write ^li to be great n3D to be heavy 33i to steal feo to rule CjTi to pursue *]i)D to govern npQ to visit "iDD to sell HD^J to capture inn to speak ^'^■^ be holy § 25. THE SIMPLE REFLEXIVE OR NIPH'AL. (See Paradigm, p. 208 ) I. The characteristic letter of the Niph'al is n. In the perf 7ii (probably orig. no) is prefixed to the stem — thus ^pp? ; and the first syllable is closed (^'2w'3) ; in the impf. the prefix is ytn, the it of which naturally assimilates with ^ The learner must not use Pijp in Prose composition for " kill." The word is rare in Heb., and in use only in Poetry. Its prose equivalent is 3"in {slay) or Hip/iil of rniO io die — H^pn {cause to die) ; cf. § 40. 3. 90 § 25- THE SIMPLE REFLEXIVE, NIPII'aL. the following consonant — thus (^tDp^^ = ) ^^\^\. The impera- tive, as we have seen (§ 21. i c), is usually formed from the impf. by dropping the pronominal prefix ; but, as such a form as p^^ qqdtel is impossible, a secondary n was prefixed (per- haps on the analogy of, the Hiph'il, § 27), yielding the form ppipn, which is also, as we should expect (§ 21. 2 a. i.), infini- tive construct. With the perf (^'Pp?) the inf. abs. is ^bp3 ; with the impf. it is Pbijn (also ^tpi^n). The participle is like the pf , only with long a : ?t^\>} m., "^/^P^ /. 2. Niph. is inflected exactly like Qal : ^^p3, ni^tppj, ri^^pj, &c. ; impf. ^^^\ (in pause often ^p^\ § i o. 4 c. ii.), fci^ri, &c. f>DipN (or ^^vj^), but cohortative always ^^^Pj^. With waw consec, as the penult is open, the tone is usually retracted to it (§ 23. 3. 4) and the last syllable shortened: thus, i'Pl?^ but ^top»5. 3. In meaning the Niph'al is (i.) properly the reflexive of the simple form or Qal, as "V^ to keep, "iptJ'^ to keep oneself^ to beivare, "iripj to hide oneself, (ii.) It is also used of reciprocal action : onpp to fig J it {i.e. with one another \ cf. Greek middles and Latin deponents, yici'^eoQai, luctari) ; ^"^^1^ they spoke to 07te another. But (iii.) the common use of Niph. is 3.s passive of Qal, as "I3K^ to break, isti'j to be hroken, "i3pp to be buried. 4. The Niph. part, has sometimes the force of the Latin gerundive ; e.g. "^f nj to be desired, desirable, ( .. for . before guttural, § 8. i b.) 5. The agent after the Niph. is usually expressed by !>; e.g. And death shall be chosen by all the remnant, ?2^ njD "in3:i ^"'■'.^^f '"? ; And Yahweh let himself be entreated by him, "Jnp^ (K7» to be full [fej to wean [to hide oneself ( Niph. to be filled (M to be weaned ' ^ ' (to be hidden 5^15 to drive out on^ N. to fight I^Sd JV. to escape Dm N. to repent Tinc^ N. to be corrup- ^120 flood (of Noah) en-i to seek IVf N. to lean [ted J?n?/ arm VKn wicked D^'? violence NVO to find S?^ to weigh ''i^a Babylon nQ bird-trap, snare nya/ understanding {noun). § 26. THE INTENSIVE, PfEL, &C. 9 1 EXERCISE. TRANSLATE. fib^r^b ,^^?w? ,^^^5; r^^^^ fl^y.p^ ,^?^r^ ,'^?^'? T :-T • ' • : - : • ' •• x • ' »..t • ^^^^^l ^S?^? nsn 2 \n^^ri "^Dp?L ^n^;?^. t^7 ^""^^ID : or^n v^^^n b^^^ni D^n'^K ^:dS v'^^n nntz^ni 3 : ^:3to^n: T T I V T T .. T • - • V: •• : • I V T T .. X • - I IT : • : ^nn^i 'i^'^n ^^:i''i 5 : "1^^^ "i^^ Di^^iii Di«n d^ "^bxd 4 I- T • - V V - - : • - ' .. T • T T T IT T T IT - ' •• an^i 7 : "^nD« t-^^^ nr^it^n ^:q ^:irr^ Di'^n ^ntLh:i: 6 V T • - •• T V ' V T • T T -: IT •• : - •• - • : - I • T T T •• T • I V T T T T It V T T T IV T •• T • : T : • T V "It -r " - - •• • Yahweh is near to the broken of heart. I am hidden from the face of my God. Hide thyself from his face. Ye shall hide yourselves on that day. And the earth was corrupted, and all flesh was cut off by the waters of the flood. The arms of the wicked shall be broken. Let me escape in the day of fighting {inf. cons.). And the earth was filled with blood (ace). His dead was buried out of his sight.^ Thus saith (per/.) Yahweh the God of Israel : Behold I give (ptc.) this city into the hand of the king of Babylon and he shall burn it with fire, and thou shalt not escape from his hand, but thou shalt be captured and given into his hand. Trust in Yahweh with all thy heart, and lean not unto (■''N) thine own understanding. § 26. THE INTENSIVE ACT., PASS,, AND REFLEX., \ FUEL, &c (See ^fadigni, p. 209.) The characteristic of the Intensive, both in verbs (''t^p) and nouns (333 a thief), is the duplication of the middle stem- letter. Nouns of this class frequently indicate one who ^ ""lO and "'^"*P, cstr. pi. of D^C : always the longer form before suffixes. - From before him. 92 § 26. THE INTENSIVE, PI'eL, &C. practises a trade or profession — one who performs a certain act often, habitually ; e.g. 323 a thief, nn^ a cook, t^^n an artificer (primarily ^^"^J) ; therefore the cstr. is not tJ^t! but tr:n, § 8. 4 b). I. The Pi* el. — {a) i. The perf of the Pi'el, or intensive, has the vowel i in the first syllable ; in the second usually e (7i3i? : hence the word Pi'^'l), frequently a p2i< to destroy, 1^/ to teach), and three times e ("i2'n to speak, D23 to wash, ">S3 to atone). The impf. is of the type b^\>] Q without dagh. f. in waw consec. ^^P^l, not % § 7. 5); hence the imper. and the inf cstr. (usually also inf abs., which rarely has Viap) are of the type b^p (§21.1 and 2 a). ii. Pi'el is inflected exactly like Qal : ^^?, 'ij^i?, &c., except that in pf (after 3rd person) the second syllable, when closed, has the vowel a (doubtless the orig. vowel of the Pi.); e.g: jp^PP. The impf. is also regular, p^?!". i'^P^ (the e is retained in the 2nd and 3rd pi. fem. njptspn). See Paradigm, p. 209. I iii. The dagh. f. is omitted from certain letters when they are fol- lowed by vocal sh'^wa (cf. § 7. 5) ; e.g. 1C'p3 (not 1K^p3) they sought, I^S^l' (§ 7. 5> § 3- 2 3 b) praise ye (not l(?^n). (J?) Pi'el is (i.) properly intensive of Qal ; that is, it adds such ideas as often, much, for a long time, &c., to the simple idea of the verb, as "i^c* to break, "ist^* to break in pieces, ?'^^ to ask, Y\,^^}^ to beg (cf ">sp to count, "»S!p to recoufit, relate)', or it implies less often, that the action of the verb is done by many or to many. Cf. "»3i5 to bury, ^3P to bujy many. (ii.) Since eagerness may show itself in urging others to similar action, the Pi'el frequently has a causative force : "iP/' to learn, lp? to cause to leain, i.e. to teach. So n^n to live, njn (§ 44. I a) to let live, to spare. For similarly strengthened consonant producing intensive force, cf Germ. wachen, wecken {watch, wake). 2. Pual. — Pu'al is the proper passive of Pi'el in its various senses ; eg. tJ'ijJB to seek. Pu. t-^P^ to be sought. It is inflected exactly like Qal : pf ^lap, n^ipp, ri^tap, &c. ; impf ^Jisp^, i^Ppn, ^^K)pn, &c. § 26. THE INTENSIVE, PI'eL, &C. Characteristic of impf. Pi. and Pu. is the . at the be- ginning; the 1st pers., of course, begins with ^^. (§ 8. 2 a.) 3. Hithpciel. — {a) 1. The Hithpa'el is formed by prefix- ing the syllable hith, having reflexive force, to the root-form of the Pi'el, as ^i?i?, ^tspnn. ii. When the syllable hith precedes the sibilants D, tr, b^, the n changes places with the sibilant, as "'^!?t^'^ for "'^^O'? to take heed to oneself \ with v the n further becomes D, as p-ntp^n to justify oneself, from P^V. iii. With unsibilant dentals (i, d, n) the n is assimilated, as "I'l^n for 'tpn"? to purify oneself, from 1^9 to be clean, pure ; "13'nD (ptc.) conversing. (J?) In meaning Hith. is (^i.) properly reflexive of Pi'el, as ^^\> to sanctify, ^p.^"^ to sanctify oneself (ii.) But it very often implies that one shows himself as, or gives himself out as, performing the action of the simple verb ; e.g. ^s^}})'^ to show oneself revengeful, "•^V'?'!' to give oneself out to be rich, 6<23nn to act like an ecstatic prophet, rave, (iii.) It may express reciprocal action ^J^inn (fr. ns"j to sec, cf. § 36. i. 3, § 44) ye look upo7i one another, (iv.) It may express action upon or for oneself', cf. ^^J)^"} (fr. "Hpn to go) to go to and fro for oneself, i.e. to ivalk about. {c) As in Pi. pf. the final vowel is frequently (the original) a ; cf. fiaxnn ke was angry (so also in impf. and imper.) and always in pause (as a) ; eg. I^^^nn he has girded himself. 4. The participles of Pi., Pu., and Hithp. follow the im- perfect, and all begin with m : 7l3prD, bi^po, i^tspnrD. The » of Pi. and Pu. is written without a dagh. f. after the article (cf. § 7. 5), but methegh is used to indicate that the first syllable is not closed : "n?L"pj!! he who walks ift majesty (not en), myob for the musical dii-ector (not ^T). 5. Some rarer intensives are formed by doubling the last radical, e.g. IJNC^ to be quiet', or the last two, eg. "in'inD to palpitate ; or the first and last (omitting the weak middle letter), e.g, ?'t>'^ to sustain, pass. 5>3p3 (kolkdl) from ^13 (cf. § 40. 5). These last forms are known 3.s pilpel. 94 § 26. THE INTENSIVE, PfEL, &C. •13^ to break i?^ to break in 13^ to speak pieces "120 to count isp to recount, K'i^a to seek tell ^1\> to be holy Pi. to sanctify Hithp. to sanctify oneself "133 to be Pi. to honour, Hitkp. to get honour heavy harden ^1\ to be great, Pi. to bring up, Hithp. to magnify oneself grow magnify .L- . Tj.,1^^ 11 ^2n\ Hithp. to hide ^?n to go Htthp. to walk V ,^ "inDj oneself r.Ni no, none ON ^3 except V^'S to rebel n'y-i^Q Pharaoh n^^ (.id, b) for what reason ? why ? EXERCISE. TRANSLATE. PI ^:^trQ Dm ^rh^ik u^'in -m rr\Tv ^^ "c^^m^ ^roiD .-: • : . y -: .- v:- : v : - : ... DVn« ^^5! 4 : Q^'HT'si "fin? onspprp □^ntr'n 3 : Din? n-i *T|Qtr "^trt^ D^7 -^q:]^ t^':' v^^^"* 7 :mm ""^ed^) intrt^")' Ax ' - •. V -: X- - •. : I V X X : •• : • : • : D*'?v:;tsin 9 Jp^^^rn??^ ^?iirn^ s n^ptp 0-1:1 n^^ ^^ it^!rn:3 II :trpib^ mm ^^^D-nt^ 10 jpsi'; d*;^ D^irpntp •^MmSrn^ n^r-^D ^^"^ 12 :tr>piS n:D7n -I'lirt^ oninnn These are the words which I have spoken. Harden not your heart, lest Yahweh your God be angry. Seek ye his face. Walk before me and sanctify yourselves. I cannot speak to this people, for they have hardened their heart. We heard the voice of Yahweh walking in the garden and we hid ourselves from his face. He said unto the woman, Speak, and the woman spoke. I will honour them that honour me. And now, behold, the king walketh (//<:.) before you, and I am old, and I have walked before you from my youth until this day. * See § 10. 3 a. 2 3 s. m. suff. from nU^S, cstr. nt:;« (cf. pp. 153, loi, 2nd col.). § 2 7- THE CAUSATIVE, IIIPHIl, HOPlfAL. 95 § 27. THE CAUSATIVE, HIPH'lL, HOPH'AL. (See Paradigih, p. 209.) I. HipJiil. — {a) i. The perfect of the Hiph. or causative is formed by prefixing the letter h with i (properly a thinned a) to the stem, and expanding the final vowel to /, ^^Pi?"?. In the impf. the final syllable is the same (!'''P), and the first syllable has the vowel a : thus ?'pip!; ('''PP'I''! with n dropped, § 14. I e). The jussive (which in the regular vb. differs from the impf. onfy in the Hiph.) is ?^\^\ (cf § 23. i. i); so waw consec. bt3i??V Hence the imper. is of the type ^^tDpn (§21.1). So also inf. abs. ; inf. cstr. is ^^PPD. ii. The Hiph. is inflected regularly. We have only to remember that the final /, being long, is maintained, as is natural, in open syllables, i.e. with vocalic afifixes {a i u) and has the accent; e.g. ^'^\>J)U ''^'Pi?'"' pL, '^'Pi?^ imper. s. f., nT^pn emph. imper. (§ 23. 2); in shut syll. it becomes a (probably the original vowel) in perf. {e.g. Jf^pPi?'"?), and generally e after the perf {e.g. ^JWi?). In both these respects it resembles the Pi'el. iii. Pf. i'^ppn, n^^'^pn, ri^ppn, &c. ; impf ^^pp^, i^^ppn, &c. See Paradigm. {U) In meaning Hiph. is (i.) causative of Oal, as "JpQ to oversee^ ^T^"? to make one oversee, to entJ^ust to ; C'li^ to be holjfy C'^'npn to sanctify. A rough analogy to the formation of the Hiph. may be found in Lat. cado, caedo ; Ger. fallen fallen; Eng. fall, /£?//; rise, raise: a still closer analogy in the causative suffix ig in Esperanto ; e.g. veni, to come, veitigi, to cause to come, send for ; sani, to be healthy, sanigi, to make healthy, (ii.) The Hiph. may be declaratory; e.g. \>^'^^^ to declare one to be P"n>* in the right, i.e. to acquit \ T^'y) to declare to be V^") ijt the wrong, i.e. to condemn. (iii.) The Hiph. is very frequently used of actions or states which we express by a neuter or intransitive vb. ; cf TK^xn to trust, ?^]J^]] to be strong. But we must not say that the Hiph. is intrans. or that it stands for the Qal : the transitive idea is genuinely present to Semitic feeling ; e.g. P\Tnn to develop strettgth, ^^y^J}. to keep silence {to be silent), &c. {c) Since the Pi'el, as we have seen (§ 26. I b) frequently g6 § 27. THE CAUSATIVE, HIPIl'lL, IIOPh'aL. has this meaning, it happens that in some vbs. dotk forms are used causatively ; e.g. ^^^5 (Pi.) and I'^xn (Hiph.) to destroy ; but generally if both forms are in use, they differ in meaning ; e.g. 133 to be heavy, Pi. 133 to honour^ Hiph. 1''33n to make heavy (also to bring to honour). (d) If the Qal is transitive, the Hiph. takes two accu- satives : ^i? to put on (clothes, ace.) ; W"'!!^? ^^^^ ^'i>'*l and Jie clothed him with garments of fine linen. 2. HopJial. — The Hoph. is passive of the Hiph. in its various senses ; e.g. ^y^'n to cast, vV^ {hoshlakh) to be cast. It is inflected exactly like Qal in pf : impf. b\^\>\ (fr. ^^\>^\ h dropped). See Paradigm, p. 209. In the first syllable, especially in the participle under the influence of the », the vowel is sometimes u\ cf. ^^t^'D. 3. The first syllable of Hiph. and Hoph. in all parts is closed : hence P^IY*^ ("^^ '^)- ^^^ participles begin with d and follow the impf. (only Hoph. like Niph. has ^ in 2nd syllable) i^^ippp, i>DpD. ^?9 to be king, rule HipJi. to make king "^l?^ Hiph. to cast Piy to be just Hiph. to justify 1J??' Hiph. to destroy pC^ to dwell Hiph. to place ^13 Hiph. to divide 13J to remember /////^. to commemor- nnc' ///^//,to corrupt, ate deal corruptly ISC^B to strip off (a garment) Hiph. to strip (one of a garment) — tzvo accus. IDD Hiph. to send rain, rain ^l ("i^'.^) there is iy3 away from, behind ; through (a window), over (a wall) P?. (P^?.) empty V")3 to bow down n.y Eden (delight) |3^N-| Reuben DV^i; Jeroboam 3n3 cherub lin pit, well V33 -i^rip^ fie zvill hide his face » i^P! i>i(ty he hide his face „ i^i*^!^. and he hid his face T3B HTj^DH, -inon hide thy face „ "'J[?9^"''i< Jiide not thy face ^JQ nTnp{< let me hide my face Vja "i^np^ irion Jie zvill assuredly hide his face § 28. SKELETON PARADIGM OF THE REGULAR VERB. 97 EXERCISE. TRANSLATE. V- TT-x ••• -T -T -- • t:-:* t- I- ..: . . v: |.. :- r x-: .x •• : - •• x •:-:•: x:ix- I" - I" •:-: --x- -i.;. : Tjptrr? w^^ niri 6 ^^r\r} ai^ia ^59 "i"^^Pt? "'i:?pLf ''?^^1 5 • : — X : xix V :': •- : : •— x t— - : '..... •ixx •- I •• •: - XT - '• Tix : •• T : • There is a time to keep and a time to cast away. Justify not rtie Avicked. Let me hide my face from this evil people, for they have done-corruptly {Hiph?) before me upon the earth. The king said, Cast his head unto us over the wall ; and they cast his head unto them. For he will surely {inf. abs.) rain fire from heaven upon that evil city and will destroy it, and it shall not be remembered any more for ever. The prophet found the child laid {Hoph. ptc. of 33k^') upon his bed. We went down unto the city to fight against it, but we could not destroy it. Reuben said, Spill not blood, cast him into this pit which (is) in the wilderness ; and they stripped Joseph and cast him (into) the pit {acc.^ § I7- 3)> and the pit (was) empty. § 28. SKELETON PARADIGM OF THE REGULAR VERB. simple intensive causative qal niph. pi'el pu'al hithp. hiph. hoph. act. reflex. act. pass. reflex. act. pass. perf. ^^ij ^^1? h^p h^pyyr) ^'PP'7 ^^PJ) impei'f. %s>\ ^^ij! ^^?\ i?t^(5^. ^^?J^\ h'^PX ^^?T hnpei'. i^b^ ^tDijn ^^?. ijtapnn ^^PJ^ inf. cstr. yioi? ^??i?'7 '^P %\> ^K)pnn ^'Pi?n bppn inf. abs. bi^ij ^bi^ri ^^P. f'bp ^Pi?n ^^i?C ptc. act. i'Dp ^tSpD i'lDpno ^'^\p. ptc. pass. b\^\> t': • ^?i?P ^9^9 98 § 28. SKELETON PARADIGM OF THE REGULAR VERB. 1. The names N/ph'^1, Fi'el, &c., indicate what vowels verbs have in the perfects of these parts. The i in first syll. of Pi'el and Hiph'il is a thinned a, which shows itself in all parts after the perf. ; cf. i'^i?., P"'l3ip^ ; and even the e and i of second syll. seem to have arisen out of a. 2. The imperfect may be considered the part regulative of the imperat. and infin. cstr. (§ 21. i c, 2 a. i.), and these three parts end alike, cf. Qal ^Op^ i'bp, Pi. h)2^'^:_, h^\>_ ; and after the Niph. the participle also agrees, cf. Hiph. ^''Pi?!, y^\>^. The imperf. ends like the perf . after Niph., cf. Pi. pf. Ptsp, impf. ^^P\ ; and in Niph. it ends in ^, cf. t'Dj^';. To this rule that the imperf. imper. and inf. cstr. end alike there is, first, the known exception of the Qal of intrans. verbs, in which infin. cstr. usually adopts J, though the other two are in a (§ 22. 3) ; and second, the Hiph. imper. agrees, of course, not with the ordinary, but with the jussive imperf, and ends in e ; e.g. impf. i'''^i?o juss. ^DP^, Hiph. h^pr\ (but pi. ^^^tppH). 3. The infin. abs. has in the last syll.,except in Hiph. and Hoph., where it has e\ though see § 26. i ^ on infin. abs. Pi'el. 4. The passives usually have no imperative. 5. After Niph. the preformative letter of the participle is D, pointed as the preform, of imperf.; cf. Pi. ^'tsp^, ^^P^, Hoph. i'tap"', ijtDpD, This D is possibly the pron. ^^ who ? whoever (§'i3-3). 6. Finally, it is of much consequence that the learner, before leaving the regular verb, should carefully note the following points, which must not, however, be committed to memory, but will be seen to be simply summary expressions of facts which ought by this time to be familiar; where the first radical has sh^'wa vocal under it (2 pi. perf., inf. cstr., imper. Qal Dfi/Pi]*, i'bp) ; where the 2nd rad. has sh^wa vocal (all parts — except Hiph. — with vocalic affixes a i u, Qal '"'?Pi^, 'ii'tap^ Niph. n^tpp:, ^h^^^, pi. ^^tpp, ^Sisp^ Hoph. nfjtppn, ^lijDiT but Hiph. '^J^PP'?, ^''^PP!) ; where the ist rad. has shVa silent (at the end of a syll., imperf. Qal, perf., part. Niph., all Hiph. Hoph. ^^\>;'.—e.g. :^'ro\ — h^\>},, ^opJ, V^pn &c.) ; where the ist rad. is doubled (imperf. Niph. and cognate parts ^^^^)y where 2nd rad. is doubled (Pi. Pu. Hithp. t^KJip, &c.). These and such points are of importance in the irregular verbs. § 29- SECOND DECLENSION. 99 EXERCISE. PARSE. ,nbtr2 ,^r2\r: ,nbtr ,nn3'' ,nri::n ,a^n^n3 ,Q^nTO ,^nnn3 ,ri"i-^ ,^trpn ,n^2p ,"i4itr'fcj ,n!:itpb^ ^f]"!!"!^: ^'^^'^'^ ^'^'P^^^ § 29. SECOND DECLENSION. I. The words embraced under the first declension were chiefly concrete words, having a resemblance in form to the perfect of verbs. A very large class of nouns have an affinity in form with the hnperfect, that is, with the abstract noun at the base of that form. They are thus themselves largely abstract nouns. They are properly monosyllables, but are pronounced and spelled as dissyllables through the slipping in of a furtive vowel between the last two radicals. (a) a. The process will be best illustrated by examples. From ^3^^ my king (first syllable closed), we may infer that the word for king must, strictly speaking, have been "H^^ malk : so ^ISp my dook, comes from an ultimate "iSp sip/ir ; and ^t^^i? (qod/is/ii) my holiness, from t'"iP qodhsJi (ultimately qudhsJi). But Hebrew dislikes the collocation of two' consonants at the end, as at the beginning (§ 5. 5) of a word, doubtless from constitutional inability to pronounce them easily together ; consequently it separated them, as other languages have done,^ by a furtive vowel — here s^ghol. Thus we have "'Sp, &c. But the hireq, originally short in the doubly shut syllable siphr, is now the vowel of an open syllable (^?!P) and must therefore become tone-long, hence is? — with the accent, of course, on the penult, as the .. represents the original, and strictly the only, vowel of the word. All nouns of this kind — so-called segJiolates^ because of the furtive s'ghol — are ^ Cf. alarm and alarum ; Gaelic tarbh = tdrabh, Dutch Delft = Deleft ; so Peter from Petr-us ; schisin (almost = siz^m), but schisinatic. 2 The name is not an altogether happy one, because (i.) it calls atten- tion to a feature that is of secondary rather than of primary importance, and (ii.) s^ghol is sometimes replaced by other vowels, e.g. by pathah, if the 2nd or the 3rd radical be a guttural, e.g. 3n'"l breadth^ V^X seed lOO §29. SECOND DECLENSION. accented on the penult, whose vowel, being in an open syllable, is most naturally, as we have seen 0?P), tone-long ; cf. tJ*"!?. On this analogy we should expect nouns of the a class, like "q^p, to pass first into "n^o and then into ^^^ indlekh. In point of fact this form is found only in pause {e.g. ^ips for ^103 silver) — 'd.xxdi not always even then {e.g. '^^^ king., and p"3^ righteousness y are always written thus — never "H^p Pl.V). In place of ^^9 with the long a, which we expect, the regular and normal form is ^^9 m^lekh. The first .., which is manifestly accented, may fairly be regarded as a (tone) long s^ghol (§ 3. 2. 2 b, § 6) ; and the original a has assumed this form probably by attraction — the more so as the two vowels have a certain affinity. Forms without a helping vowel, i.e. monosyllabic forms, are rare ; e.g. ^<'a valley, '^";?. nard, 5 qitl ^^P qotl (^^? qutl) primary form (2) b^?. qatel %i? qitel V^a^ qotel (i^^P qutel) with furtive s'^ghol (3) ^91?. q^^^ ^95 qt'td ^9^ qotel " regular form ^. Rules for declension. — ( i ) The cstr. state of the sing, is, of course, like the absolute : "n-^P, abs. and cstn"^ Rarely it assumes (esp. before gutt. or r) the form V^X (as well as y"]T) from abs. y"]T seed. (2) With inflectional additions in the sing, and dual, the word appears in its pri^nary monosyllabic fo7'in, qatl, qitl, qotl: my king, not ^37C (an impossible form) but ''2?o mal-kt, because the primary form is malk ; i"isp his book (from ">sp, orig. siphr) ; v:TK ''ozndiv, his ears (from |T^<, oiig. ''ozn, ^uzn). (3) The plural, /^^/// mas. and/em.,a.ssumGS the form q'tdlim, q'tdloth, with pretonic a. The presence of this d (cf. ^''^J"?) is difficult to explain in a word whose ultimate form has no vowel between the 2nd and 3rd radicals, malk ; it has possibly followed the analogy of nouns of the first declension, cf. D''")?'^. (§§ 36, 37) ; while if the 2nd radical be \ it either becomes hireq, cf. D^t an olive-tree, or contracts {ay^e, § 2. 2. i) into monosyllabic form, cf. P^n bosom (§41). § 29- SECOND DE^LENSiON. I CI 7. Note that while the feminine of an original malk is naturally malkd, -f>'^ (cstr. ri3^», with sufif. ''na^p, &c., regular), the plur. is not ni3pp,but,on the analogyof themasculine, nnfe. 8. When in the plur. the pretonic a becomes lost, the pri- mary vowel is resumed ; e.g. cstr. of Q^?/'? ^^ ^^^ ""^ — (like ^'!}?"1), but, as was natural, the original vowel (a, m^ilk) reasserted itself, hence "'^pp ; so '''?s?, ""^ip^ boq^re (from ii?.*3, orig. boqr). Masc. Fem. sing. abs. •jte ■ IQD np3 ; sing. abs. rx^tp sp I?3 cstr. >j j> j> cstr. na^p j> jj I sing. • : - Dpi I j/;z^. • T : - )> )> 2 in. •?I3^P )j >j 2//. Dpns^p )j )) 2/ ^?^P » 5J pl. abs. T : sp |53 3 m. bjjp )> )) cstr. niD^p sp ipn if- T : - )> » I J/V- ^niai^p )> J> ipi. «3i5p )> )) 2 pi. 033^0 j> 5) ipi. D3^P )> » Dual. pl. abs. D''3i>p ?P i5? abs. D^^il2 D^3-)33 •-: T cstr. "'pr'P sp P? cstr. •■ : " '?1? "'.^^? I sing-. '?^P ?P •?? I J//?^. '.^^11 '31? ••irx 2 m. ■T?^? >) )) 2 i-/;?^. ^''.^n 1'?"!? "T.?!? 2/ 1])?^P )i » 2pl. V ■• : D_p^3-)3 D3^3TK V •• : T ym. VD^p )) )> 3/. C'^^P )) » I//. 1^'?^P » )) 2//. V •• : - sp •?? 3# "^^'i?^ )) )) (b) In many nouns of the a class the a has been thinned before suffixes to i (cf § 2. 2. 4, § 6. 2 d. i.) ; e.g. ^^}^^ sun, 1 In tbe 2nd and 3rd columns only the first syllable is given : the rest follows the exact analogy of the first column ; ''"iSp, TiSp^ ""l??, &c. 2 Feet \>T^^. The dual termination ^\^- is usually attached to the ground form ; consequently the first syllable is closed. This differ- entiates the cstr. dual from the cstr. plur. ^ Knees (:^-^). ^ Ears (:\X^). lor ^ 2Q. SECOND DECLENSION. ^^^ (not W^^) thy (f.) sun ; pnv righteousness, i^piv ^///^ righteousness. Conversely a noun of the / class (0^3")?) may have an absolute form of the a type ^"^3 (not ^"1?). Only a knowledge of the cognate languages can tell us whether a word whose vowels are ^ . . . ^ in the abs. and i before suffixes, really belongs to the a or the i class. Some nouns have both forms in the absolute ; e.g, ^l"!^ my vow ; abs. "Tl.?. or "^l? vow. 2. In some nouns belonging to this general type the original a, i (lengthened to e)y o (or u ; lengthened to 6) appears between the 2nd and 3rd radicals instead of between the 1st and 2nd : under the first radical, of course, must stand shVa (§ 5. 5) ; e.g. C^?^ honey, 1^2 well, ^^^ stench (3 s. m. suf. ilTKS). The last class is important, as to it belong the fre- quently recurring construct infinitives of the type i^bip (with suffixes I s. '•i'^ij, 3 s. iiJtpP, &c. : — exactly like ^1P?, i^b, &c., except that in vPl? the sh^'wa is vocalic, because it replaces an original full vowel ; hence ^^ns, not isn?, cstr. inf. of 3ri3 to write, whereas the noun 'V*^ length, would yield ^2"ix). 3. Feminines with segholate ending. — mas. (Tl^^op) bDp fern. f^?^^P^ "^PP or (i!i3.^P») (^i^^P) abs., cstr. HD^DD nb^p suff. ^^?.b»» ''^^PP plur. ni3^»» riftpp cstr. nb^rp» „ (a) Feminines ending in / (§ 1 6. 4. 8) belong to the seg- holate class.^ E.g. ^riDpoo his kingdom, points back to ^^/DD kingdom, which becomes riapOD exactly as '^^ becomes ^^o. In point of fact, however, while the segholate form {e.g. nafep) is invariably used for the construct, and sometimes ^ Kingdom. ^ Lord, master. ^ Lady, mistress. * One who gives suck, a nurse, Hiph. ptc. of p3J to suck (§ 39. i. 2). * Copper, bronze (H^'^nj is only poetical). ^ Smoke of sacrifice, incense. ^ Not, of course, if preceded by an unchangeably long vowel {e.g. nnnv). §16. 4.8 b. Yna2 P^i''P B«im (litop) (ni^^rp) T : n-jiDp (?1?3) (npro) ff^"(;^?) (^19i?) nini ni5p;»4 riE^ms n-)b|3« ••ri-iaa "•npriD '•riK'm '^1?P niT'na nip'-rio niK^m niiiiop )) J) » )) § 29- SECOND DECLENSION. IO3 for the absolute {e.g. ri^6:ip guard, charge), the absolute frequently assumes the form in n^; e.g. the abs. of kingdom is always •^J/'P^. Some nouns have both forms in the ab- solute ; e.g. rTJ.^J{ and nivj; an assembly. Similarly ptc. m. bpp,/. rhd\>^ or n^tip cstr. n;L)p, suff. ^rii'PP, &c. (b) So with nouns in or u. E.g. ''^^n^ comes from iyi^'ni (bronze) which becomes (first ntj'nj and then) n*^m (cf ipn), which is abs. as well as cstr. Similarly from i^^2 master^ nvna mistress, irinna /^/^ mistress, we should expect the cstr. to be n"i23 (cf ^"isp, iDp). In point of fact, however, it is nnsa, and so almost always with fem. nouns whose origin would lead us to expect ,. .. ; e.g. ^^p^^J? his nurse, rip5"'D nui^se (not p.). (c) In general the plurals are formed regularly from the ordinary fem., or from what would be the ordinary fem. if it were found. Consequently the original mas. must be care- fully attended to, e.g. m. "i'??,/ nT33,//. nnU3 [i.e. the plur. is not formed from segholate form fi"J33). WORDS FOR PRACTICE. Tjn'i way^ HP/, horn nnSK^'yimaid Ti>; boy f'n/. foot 2r|-i3y i^j^eg ^• rnp^/; girl "Tjn chamber 2p"iv righteousness 2, K^B3/.soul ij^/ear 231^ midst 2 l^7D^5y; food ^'"33 greatness ^npi'^ioy. nurse ^' tJ.^^ image "i"!.?. vow P??^"i; Jerusalem^ pb threshing floor nD3ny. wisdom P*V Zion D13 vineyard tD^'^ tribe "^p. lamp ^jr memory nn-jN*/. mantle nrn3/path* nypay; valley 1^^ to grow fat ; Hiph., to make fat, dull 2ini/. broad open place, //. ninhn. ^^p/ bow (d) A suffix defining a compound expression in the construct relationship is appended to the last word of the ^ Usually masc.^ sometimes y^w. 2 These four words take z instead of a with suffixes, &c. ; e.g. D^3"l?, i3pnv, &c. 3 The older pronunciation was undoubtedly Q?5p^1V The later form, however, a?'^r\\ (j^rushaldyim) is (like ^Y\\, § lo. 5 b) a so-called Qfre perpetuum. ' * Poetical ; also 3^n3 m. 104 § 3°- THIRD DECLENSION. expression, as the connection between construct and absolute must not be interrupted (§ 17. 2, Rule 2); e.g. C^np in {a hill of holiness = ) a holy hill ''^lij '^^ ^^y holy hill {the hill of my holiness ; or more strictly, my ^'p ">n my hill-of- holiness) ^P? •'Vi^ ^^ idol of silver ''QpS 7v|?5 ;;y/ 2^,<)/ of silver in»npp \b| /^/j" zueapons ^ ^ wajfare (the weapons of his w.) EXERCISE. TRANSLATE. D*':^'C>ni r^^r^^ ^:d 8 : r\r^h^^ □nb'i ^^p^g^. -I'^jrn nnin-i^ 7 My king. Our kings. His books. Her righteousness. Our knees {du.). Thy feet {du^. Our horn. Their silver. My way is hid {peif fern.) from my God. For all flesh had corrupted his way upon the earth. Their ways are not our ways. And all the people bowed-down upon their knees before their king. Let thine hand-maid speak in the ears of the king. My God and my king reigns upon Zion his holy hill. My mantle. Her mistress. His kingdon'i is an everlasting kingdom (k. of eternity). I will cut off their bow and all their weapons of warfare. § 30. THIRD DECLENSION. I. Besides the words resembling the perfect which form the chief elements of the first declension and the nouns having affinity with the imperfect and infinitive forming the second, there is another formation which along with the words that follow it may be called a third declension. This is the act. participle Qal, hd\\> or ^^\>^ probably a later de- velopment and not found in all verbs. Third declension. — The type of this declension is the act. part. Qal ; and the declension comprises all words, whether ^ Weapon (article, instrument, vessel) v?) pl- ^V?« I § 30. THIRD DECLENSION. 1 05 participles or nouns, ending in e (9ere) with a vowel un- changeable (by nature, e.g. teip, or position, e.g. TSD^) in the place of the pretone. It therefore does not include nouns like ii?J whose pretonic vowel is changeable (§ 1 8). Rules for inflection. — (i) In wbrds of this class the verbal law of inflection is followed (§ 6. 2 f ) ; that is, with vocalic additions, e.g. \, i, 13 ., D^, &c., the vowel in the tone, the ^, becomes vocal sh^wa ; eg. ?^\>, v^P, ^^5?9'^' ^^^ ^^^^ name (from Dt^'). (2) a. With consonantal additions, e.g. 1, 03, the e being thrown into an unaccented shut (half-open) syllable, becomes the short vowel, i.e. e or i\ i particularly with labials ^ eg. ^i^^p, but ^'oy^ (not '^W) thy name. b. As /'tSip and similar forms come from an ultimate qatil, § 2. 2. i (the short i in the last syllable becoming in Hebrew, where it is accented, the tone-long #, § 6. 2 a), the real vowel is strictly /, but this has been modified in the majority of words into e before the consonantal addition. (3) Words of the participial form (-'PP, i'^pp) retain e in cstr. and generally other words, though some take a ; eg. lEDD mourning, cstr. IspD. abs. ^DP btspp ^"50 napp DK/ ^^p ^^i?P i-B? nspp °^" ^l?DP ^!?Dpp ^r'iPP nsprp ^9^ "ri^pp "^^1^1?^ D3^i50 •qp^ vocalic suff. conson. suff. 2. a. A few monosyllabic words in e attach themselves to this declension, the chief being i? son, and 2t^ name, which are irregular in the plural — Q^^3, niCi:/. b. Many nouns are formed by prefixing D (probably connected with np, of. § 28. 5) to the stem. Such words express place (K?"^^ stall, from 1*11") to lie) or instrument (nriD?p >^y"- frog (pi. im) Pi. to curse : ptc. npQ passover nij moon ??i50 one who curses ^V with YTp stall n33 to bark i^B3 throne ■ nriQD key Q^jn?? loins njjn / statute ^V ''9v "^rV to <^o or show kindness to (i.e. in dealing wit/i), deal kindly with ^"^^ to smelt, test, prove Exercise. — Write the above nouns in cstr. sing, and with a vocalic and consonantal suff., observing which of them are of first declens. ; and translate : Dn^^:^^p. t2^y\Tj dh^^to npQn-ni^ Sb?-itp^;^n ^^5^ • : *' ' "• ' '•''•■ X : - XT XX : x': - •.•••:-: nr? 4 :t^7??l "^i^.^^'ntsj "^mW 3 : ^:'^b?'^i?"Djn ^3^?ni3 "\nt^-«^ 8 pii Dnb^ 7 *Tir\^ ^^2 e nDj;^ dot 'rystp") This (is) my son and these (are) my son's sons. He sent the frogs upon all the land. All his prophets are dumb dogs, they cannot bark. In Jerusalem is my holy throne. We took our staves in our hand. Our enemies dealt kindly with our children. These are the statutes and the judgments which ye shall keep in the land whither ye (are) crossing, thou and thy son and thy son's son. Their land swarmed-with frogs lace.) in the chambers of their kings. § 31. VERBAL SUFFIXES. (See Paradigm, p. 210.) I. (a) The pronominal object after a verb may be ex- pressed by the appropriate form of the particle ^^< (ine, ^n^<, &c. ; cf. § 20. 10). In point of fact, however, this construc- tion, though relatively common in the later style, is, in the earlier style, usually reserved for cases of emphasis : ^ns ^ p without dagh. forte ; cf. § 7. 5. 8 WSV^ (not D?*]!), cf. Scotch ^/fj J, Glesca^ ior glass ^ Glasgow. § 31. VERBAL SUFFIXES. 10/ p^"iV ^n"'K7 thee have I seen righteous, "i^ni^-ijiip DH^aN; nns* ink ///^/r father loved him 7;zd7r^ Z//*^?? (§ 47. i) all his brethren, 'o'.'.n!! '^c^i '^r-7 "^9^ th^^ ^^^^ ^ ^^^^^^ ^^^ h^r '^^^^ ^ ^^p^ alive. Note that in such cases the obj. precedes the verb. (b) Ordinarily the pronom. obj. is expressed by a pronom. suffix to the verb, after the fashion of the suffixes appended to nouns ; e.g. i^''^^'? he provoked him (D''V?'?, Hiph. of 0^3). 119^! he will keep thee, Q'?.rP!5 and he sold them. ' 2. The following table on p. 108 illustrates the use of the verbal suffixes, the study of which will be greatly facilitated by careful attention to the following points : (a) The 3 s. m. Hiph. is chosen for the paradigm rather than the Qal because, both its vowels being unchangeable (the first short in the shut syllable, the second naturally long) the suffixes are unable to affect in any way the earlier part of the word, and thus their real nature and form can be most simply seen. Thus y^\>^ with 3 s. m. suffix gives ii'^^i;'!?, but ^Pf^ would not give ifci^ (but iS'pip), because, the first two syllables being now both open, the law of the tone (§ 6. 2 b, c) instantly begins to affect their vowels and some- what complicates the issue for the beginner. Hence the "special suitability of the Hiph. (b) The suffixes to- the vb., alike in pf and impf (which differ slightly) very closely resemble those to the noun (§ 1 9). The chief differences are in the 1st pers. sing, suffix, which is not i, but nt, and in the 3 s. m. and /. suff. to the impf. which are ehu and ^ha : the latter forms, however, are regularly found with nouns ending in n.. (§ 45. 3. 3); cf. ^injpp, r\:\)^ his, her cattle (from ^JPP) ; cf §19. i. (c) i. The so-called connecting vowel between the vb. and the suffix is a in the pf. (cf. D^^ppn) and e in the impf. (cf. Cib'tpi^?), and of course imperative (cf D^"'PPl'). ii. This vowel, however, is not really an arbitrary connecting vowel, but the a is, strictly speaking, the final vowel in the ultimate form of the verb, seen, e.g., in the Arabic qatala = Y{.€^x. ^^\>^. The origin of the e is not so obvious ; probably it is due tc the analogy of Lamedh He vbs., § 44, where the e is really part of the verb {ay = ai—e=c, cf § 2. 2. i). I08 §31. VERBAL SUFFIXES. VERBAL SUFFIXES TO HIPIl'tL. Perf. p^tpipn INFIN. CSTR. ri^6ipn I S. C. ••j^^tpipn 'r'^PPO (subj.) ^i^^ppn (obj.) ^jj^^Dpn 2 s. m. ■Jl^^pipn ^ij-tppn (subj. and obj.) »/. ^^'PP'"? J) 3 s. m. i^j^Dpn 11 Partic. inijppn ,,/. nb^jpipn )> ^'ppo nn^iopn I //. c. i^^^^pipn ''^.?"'PPl' '^'PPP ^jntopn 2 pi. in. D^t^ppn &c! &c., mostly as »/. lai'^Dipn as noun the noun 3 //. m. DS-ppn DnStDpn T : - : • »/ k^\>J^ jnijppn Imperf. ^'^PP! Imper. as Impf. 'br^py I s. c. "'i'^PP! V.^PPl» ^:i$^t3p> 2 s. m. ^r"PP' .—. ^^^^toip^ »/. ^^'PP! "n^^^PP! 3 s. m. 5in^^L3p^_ ^n^^tpipn ^"?'PP! »/ \'^'PP- C^PPD O'l^'PP! \pl. c. 5i:^^tpp^ ''^^PPD 2 //. m. °^5'''PP! »/. i^^'PP! 3 //. m. °.^'PP'- D^'-ppn D^^^pp^ »/ i^^PP! 1.^'PPl! ri^j'pp! 3. (a) i. The case seems more complicated when one or both of the syllables before the suffix is open : in reality it is perfectly simple, as the tone laws strictly apply (§ 6). Thus tei^ with 3rd sing. masc. suff. becomes ^''pp ; the accent falls on the 6, in the open pretonic syllable the original ^- naturally becomes the tone (long) ^, and the original ^ being now two places from the tone vanishes into sh'^wa. It fol- lows exactly the analogy of iij"!. Thus i'tDf^ with the verbal suffixes becomes '?^pp "nJ'fPP ^FpP '"^PP ^^'^.. ''^^PP °?^PP ^S'PP- This first declension analogy (§ 18) is followed by the pf. Qal in all its forms {e.g. nN3^ he hated her^ and by the §. 31. VERBAL SUFFIXES. IO9 impf. and imper. Qal in a {e.g. l^n3C'*1 not "r^'^y and he forgot him, from n|)lp^ ; "'^^'^^ send me, from npir). ii. Note that the vb., with ist sing. suff. ends in ''|!1. {dni) ; with ist pi. suff., in ^^^ {dnu). (b) Imperfects in (Qal) or e (Pi'el, &c.) may be said to follow the analogy of the thii'd declension (§ 30). E.g. Pi'el rsp'^ he will gather, ^^*3ip^^ he will gather thee, DV3i?x / will gather them. Similarly "ibc^^ he will keep, ^^^P^'l he will keep me, ^^"IP^l lie will keep him, but (before a consonantal suffix) ^19?'^. ^^^ "^^^^ keep tJiee {yishmoj-^khd). (c) The imperat Qal in o and the infin. cstr. follow the analogy of the second declensio7z, the form 7bp being a segholate of the third cXdiSS (cf. §21.2 a.iii., § 29. 2). Thus "itot^' keep, ^PIP*^ shom'rent, keep me, 0"]^^' keep them, ^"!^^? whe?i I kept (lit. in my keeping). As the sh^wa is vocal (cf § 6. 2 e) the third radical does not take daghesh lene ; e.g. Q?n3 kotUbJiem, write them, i3nD3 when he wrote. This sh^vva, however, is necessarily silent when the suffix is y\ or D3, as two vocal sh^vas cannot come together ; e.g. n3">3y3 when you cross . (^obh, closed syllable), T^^V^ wJien thou servest. (With these two suffixes, the sometimes appears between the second and third radical instead of between the first and second ; thus Pt^p would give ^?9i? {q'tol'kha) as well as ^^OP qot/khd (cf. impf ibc^; T^^^'). Hence ^^2^ Di^3 in the day of thi^ie eating, D?7DX your eating^ 4. (a) When the vb. already ends in a vowel, no " connect- ing " vowel is necessary — or possible ; the suffix is directly appended, e.g. ^^?5P, "Ti?i?PP (note that the accent moves a place forward — hence p), D'^rippp ; in the 3rd pers. it appears as \T\ or 1 (masc), and n (fem.), eg. ^'^ri^PP, Vni^Dp {-tiw\ r}'Th\^\> ; so ^^i'op: (3 pi. impf) Di^c^ip^, &c. VVith suffixes end- ing in !| the il of the vb. is usually written .-, e.g. i^^PP^ i^^Pp''., cf § 4 c (they will kill him^ us). (b) Similarly in the 2nd pers. (^rPP) the vowel ^ is main- tained with all the suffixes except the fii'st sing, which always ends in "'^-_" (except in pause ^?— ), eg. ^"^^^^^ ; with the 3 s. m. suffix, d-hil by dropping the h (§ 14. i e) contracts (through au) to 0, ifipPp (§ 19. i). (c) The gaps which appear in the paradigms are explained A I 10 §31. VERBAL SUFFIXES. by the fact that the reflexive idea which would be expressed by the absent forms is in Hebrew expressed in other ways, e.g. Niph. Hithp. &c. (§§ 25, 26). E.g. / hid myself, not ^p^rnnp but '^1^?^ 5. Before the suffixes, original verbal forms are restored. (a) The 3rd sing. fem. pf. n^ becomes n_ or n^, e.g. (b) The 2nd sing. fem. pf. Pi becomes ^^ (or T^) ; e.g. -rribpipn (Hiph.), ^in-n^pi? (Qal). Only the context enables us to distinguish this from the suff. to the ist pers. (c) The 2nd pi. masc. pf Dn becomes — but very rarely — 5in ; e.g. i^J^rJJi!! you have brought us up (Hiph. of rh^, %% 34, 44). 6. In the 3 s. i. pf ^'^P^ and the 3 pi. vtDp^, it has to be remembered that the sh^wa represents an original full vowel in the second syllable (^i^i^). When suffixes therefore are added, not only does the initial ^ become , under the in- fluence of the tone, as we have seen in the masc. C^P^i?, ^-'^i?, &c.), but the original pathah which had become sh^wa reasserts itself, and, standing in the open pretonic, becomes ^ ; hence we get ';in.^i??, on^^pp, &c., ^^^i'pp, '^^^\>, in^pp, &c. 7. Singular suffixes to the impf. and imper. are occasion- ally strengthened by the addition of niin (known as the ntln energicuin) which is usually assimilated to the following con- sonant, or if that be n, the n is usually dropped and the nim doubled. The following forms result : ^afop^ ^^tpp^ 5i3fe|T naptpp''. They occur chiefly in pause. 8. Participle. — The suffixes to the participle Are practi- cally always those of the noun^ not of the verb ; e.g. ^?^'^^^ (not "'Jp'^l^P) he who justifies 7ne (Hiph. ptc. of piv), "'"K^P^^ (not ^n'tJ'pip) those who seek him (Pi. of K^pa ; cf § 7. 5), ^a"i'i those who pursue me, my persecutoi'S. 9. (a) Inf. consti'uct. — The suffixes to the inf. constr. are also those of the noun, except that the^;'.y/ pers. sing. suff. is both nominal (\) and verbal (^^..), the nominal being used to denote the subject, and the verbal the object', e.g. or ^"ipa the day of my visitiftg, i.e. when I visit {poq'dhi) ; but ^jnpsp to visit me. In the other persons the suffix may ex- press either subject or object ; e.g. Str^V'T)) {sor-pho) because he burned (lit. on account of his burning), ^^iV^? to bum it. §31. VERBAL SUFFIXES. Ill (b) The infi7i. cstr., partaking as it does of the character of both verb and noun, has (like a verb) the power of governing an object, besides (like a noun) being able to take suffixes and prefixes. The usual order is infin., subject, object. when he kept i"*^'^? when the man kept ii"'Xn "^b'J'S before he kept me - -n^^ 'npV* '?•?!' before the man kept me ^nx C'^sn nbc^ ^:;E5> en the day wJien I visit them Dnx npa DVn (c) Instead of the infin. cstr. with preposition the finite forni may be used with a conjunctional expression formed of the prep, and relative. when I kept the man ^^kT^^ '"'.^?'3 or tr^5^^ ,tDnuj ,n^t2J ,S:Di^ ,b^"^p ,nnD ,t^in }h^ ,:ir^"i ^yi ^r\i :rvr\i hv^ ,'^::iv ,^"^1 :n-i^ ,b^i'^ ppr\ ,:Lrnp § 33. PE NUN VERBS. (See Paradigm, p. 212.) The letter n in Hebrew shows the same kind of feebleness that it has in other languages ; when it is not sustained by being followed by a full vowel, its sound is apt to be lost in that of the consonant after it, in-licio = illicio ; ev-'^pa^ta — iyypd(l)0) ; ^i_j\ = ^V. (^yin-gash — yiggasJt), 1. (a) When n stands at the end of a syllable (imperf. Qal, perf. and ptc. Niph., Hiph., Hoph.) it is in most cases assimilated to the next consonant, which is doubled, ^^T. = ^JQ^, i)^s:n = ^^2n {yin-pol^yippol, hinpil = hippil). ^13^: = 5)5:, Niph. of ^i\ to smite. (b) In certain cases {eg. verbs ending in n) the Niph. and Pi'el would be indistinguishable, except for the context ; cf. n;?^, Niph. to be clean^ innocejit \ Pi. to declare innocent^ acquit. (c) In the Hoph. u naturally appears instead of before the duplicated consonant (§ 7. 7) ; e.g. ^^J, I2n (pf ) ir (impf ). (d) The n is not usually assimilated in verbs whose middle radical is a guttural ; e.g. ^nj to inherit, impf. Qal ^n^'', Hiph. i'''nr. But the Niph. of Onj is Dm to repent (cf § 36. i. 3). 2. Verbs whose impfs. are in o and a should be carefully distinguished. 8 114 § 33- PE NUN VERBS. (a) In vbs. with impf. in a {e.g. ^}}^ ^'f) the 3 is almost always dropped in the imperat. Qal ; e.g. ^\ (for ^V^, f. ^^3, //. ^% (b) It is also usually dropped in the inf. cstr., which, however, by a sort of compensation, adds the fern, termina- tion n, and then assumes the form of a segholate noun T\m ; the steps are m^ rif 3, n^'a (exactly like "H^P, ^i??, § 29). Note, however, that the vowel is regularly i (not a) when inflected (cf. P"J^*, § 29. lb); e.g. S^^l his approaching. (c) p before such (segholate) inf. constructs is pointed ? ; e.g. HK'ip (§14. Id). (d) In vbs. with impf. in d, the 3 is not dropped in imper. or inf. cstr. ; e.g. ^SJ, impf. ''SI ; imper. and inf. cstr. 733. 3. (a) The verb jnj to give assimilates its fittal n also in perf. ''^n:, &c. (for "'^^nj), and infin. cstr. which is nn (for ri^n), and with suff. ^riP> (for ^J^?J?). It has e in imperf. \'^\ and imper. V^, emph. njn (§ 23. 2),/. ""^ri,//. I3n. (b) In the verb njpp /^ /^^^ the h is treated like the nun of P^ iV^^^;/ vbs. ; e.g. impf. Qal r\^\ (for np^^),//. inip- (§ 7. 5) ; imper. nip, sinjp, inf. cstr. nni?, ^rinip, &c. (| 8. i, rt: under in- fluence of the guttural). (c) The form np^ is probably not impf. Hoph. but impf. of the old passive Qal, of which now few traces exist except the participle, njp?, which also exists, is to be regarded as the (old) pf. pass. Qal rather than as pf. Pu'al. So 1^'^ pass. Qal rather than Hoph. of |n3. The Hoph. is unlikely, as no causative idea is present in these words, and the Hiph. of these verbs is not found. (d) ^ before these (monosyllabic or segholate) inf. constructs is pointed b ; e.g. nn?, T\npb (§14. i d). 4. Nouns from Verbs f d. — Nouns with m preformative are of the form |ri^ gifts (coll. from IDJ), as 7£0 offal (from i>Ei; to fall), nap stroke (from nDj, Hiph. to strike). bv3 Hi. to deliver m to touch {Hi. to reach) pK^a to kiss p?i3 to approach ^mHi.\.o deceive ^jd: to fall S|:3 to smite "n3 to vow Vil'^Hi. to look • 133 Hi. to tell yi^Hi. to set hn': to inherit h^\ to drop ofl* intr.y draw off tr. nmiri/. a deep sleep n32 to build ^i.« length ^ht breadth V^V / rib, side : cstr. V^l ; //. nivi^V, cstr. mh^i inK ;;/. nns/. one D^D ladder ^'^ ram ri3 Gath TV - - y 1 . § 34- PE GUTTURAL VERBS. 1 1 5 EXERCISE. TRANSLATE. ,n:ri ,^S?2^i ,^^-^^ ,ri^-?n ,^^st^ fl^in ,^b5 ,^np ,]ri :ntr5^ h^f? ,io;in ,^T?rT ,-t?\T ,^5? ,^^?^ ,0^^-?^^ •^5 2 : '^Dpi^ T:in ^:3\ijSn ^nijrv^^n ^n'^^^ a^n^n ^A'^-^in I IV 't : • • - • : ' r : •• v: • t • . .. . _ ntrzi!:) vi'^^^ ^t^n*^ 3 :ir^^trb nstrn-^b^ n')r\'h'' -^i^ -^nn ■•••.•• T : I :iT : - : - : • - - w • ..---' 'Ti- : t:-t- t v-^ t" '-X V -: T •• - : X : - • - - » x x ix - x •• : - • X • X - X ■•'"•• T • IX X X IX - X "^ »' ■ """^ 1 vxx >..-:• t:- -X 1... I . ^ :.^ XX ~ x:- •" XV :v ': • x:x: x:x: jn^^^tz^n v^:).'^ ntrt^ii n^^i^ n-^:^ q^d n^r^^ :ipv^ nhn s T : ix X - - • - : X : - x -. x -. "" ,' • ' "•'" ~ ^ "^2 yhr) 7^^:) ybv:i birr 10 :n"i!J"^sin ^57^ -t::^! 'i^n? 9 n?:5t^^i 1 1 : «in tr^ip-n^i^ vhv n^ir nn^ nti?^ n^pT^n Give ye. I will not give my silver and my gold. Tell it not in Gath. Look not (/.) after thee, lest God smite thee. Deliver me, for thou art my salvation. Let them give glory to Yahweh because of his loving-kindness. When I gave the woman to the man for wife. I will deliver thee, and thy tongue shall tell-of righteousness. The serpent deceived her and she took of the tree and gave to her husband. They feared to draw near, lest they should be smitten before their enemies. Thou hast caused a deep-sleep to fall upon me. And he brought near the man and he took him in his arms and kissed him (dat.). § 34. PE GUTTURAL VERBS. (See Paradigm, p. 214.) See the rules for Gutturals, § 8. I. By § 8. 2 a, a gutt. requires a hateph for simple sh^'vva vocal (2 pi. perf., imper., infin. cstr., Oal : thus Q^bpp, 7bip, but oni^y, "iby; Dn^D&5 but ^bx, § 8. 2 b). ^ i) is pointed as if read to ""^l^? which was substituted for nin% § 10. 5 b. 2 Alternative form to ^^V^.with me, i s. suff. to D^ with (cf. p. 142, note i). " See § 7. 6. Il6 § 34. PE GUTTURAL VERBS. 2. (a) By § 8. I b, i before gutt. becomes e, and by § 8. 2 a the short vowel usually repeats itself under the gutt. in a hateph corresponding to itself Thus : Niph.pf. i'Pp? in gutt. nJ?VJ and then nw Hiph.pf. h'^\>r\ „ i-pyn „ Tpvn Hiph. inf. ^'^\>r\ „ n>ni;n Hoph.pf. h^\>J} „ TOn Qal impf. (^^\>') primary form bbp: in gutt. TdV! Qal impf. of Stat. vb. l33Mn gutt. nnx;; and then 3nj?> (b) Note that in stative vbs. (impf in a) the guttural has e in impf Qal ; in active vbs. (impf in o) it has ^, which is really the original vowel of the impf (§ 21. i a). Thus the combinations are ' _. |_ and _ ... ,.. ; except that before &^ even imperfects in o have e, e.g. ^bt^^ he will gatJier. (c) The gutturals usually, though not always, take a composite sh^wa at the end of a syllable, cf '^?^if,^ ^T>: (Niph.) he was fo7^saken,TP^l} (Hiph.)/^^ trusted \ in most cases, how- ever, though not in all {e.g. n)pn^_ Jie zvill dream, t^'''"^^^ he will be silent) n takes silent sh'^wa ; e.g. Dan'' he will be wise^ ^'^JT.. he will cease, ipn; Jie will lack, "ibn;; he will desire (cf § 8. 2). A few 4lse both forms, 3'^^n to devise, 2E^"n: and 3b'n\ (d) Note that in forms ending n^, \, ^i, the composite sh*wa of the guttural is necessarily changed into the corre- sponding short vowel, and the syllable is half open ; e.g. sing. 1b^^!, //. (cf vtpPO ''^?-^r which, as two vocal sh^vvas cannot come together, becomes ^^'^'T, yci a77i^ dhil (§ 6. 2 d. ii.) ; 3 s. in. Niph. '^P?^,?.,/. (cf n^^tDp:) nsDXj which becomes nsDN: she has been gathered or taken away. 3. (a) By § 8. 4 the gutt. cannot be doubled, but re- maining single, causes the preceding short vowel to become its tone-long. Only the impf. (imper. and inf) Niphal are affected; e.g. h^f., but ^W (for W). So with n ; NDT he shall be healed. (b) In the Hiph. pf with waw cons, and the consequent throwing forward of the accent (§ 23. 3. 4), the .. becomes -^ : thus ^'IPV'! thou /last stationed, but ^I^Jfn"! and thou wilt station. This change §34- PE GUTTURAL VERBS. II7 occurs elsewhere at a distance from the tone ; e.g. vf^ (poetic form of -i'X), but Dp^J^X, cf. § 8. 2 b. D^n J:o dream "ij^j; to stand VK^in'' Joshua "I3y to pass, cross pnn P2*. to embrace Jin to slay pm to be distant, Nton to sin atJ'n to count [withdraw, refrain Tns to take hold of pm 3Ty to leave, forsake ^1T\ \ , . , J*DK to be strong ^nJ; to serve, till noxj pN Z/^. to believe DDn to be wise "H"!^ to belong: T^ how? "inj river //^//z. to prolong I^y to smoke Q''"in:3, oftener niin^, ^/. 4. Nouns from Pe Gutt. verbs. — First declension. Second declension. sing. abs. D3n HDns fjDSD ^ly hyv ^T\ cstr. D3n nm« ^^^^ ?) )j )> plur. abs. cstr. Dnny D-'^jy D^t^'in nny '•bjy wn (wise) (ground) (food) (servant) (calf) (month) (a) In first declens. — Rule 2 of Gutturals (§ 8. 2) applies. Note cstr. pi. 'P^n (not of course 'P^n like ''^^'i, cf. § 6. 2 d. ii.). (b) In second declens. — 2nd class, the gutt. often depresses i to ^ (§ 8. I b) ; hence "h^V not ^^^V- With nouns of the ist and 2nd class the composite sh'^wa, where necessary, is hateph pathah (Q^^^j;, D^^jy, cf. § 6. 2 c. iii.) ; with nouns of the 3rd class it is naturally hateph qdmeg (2^^""^^ § 29). (c). In third declens. — No effects follow, because the vowel accompanying the guttural is unchangeable ; e.g. npn, Dnph desijHng, ^S^P, '^''^P^P (Pi. ptc. gathering \ for d, cf. § /. 5). EXERCISE » TRANSLATE. nrnt<^ D^nb^^ ^^Pi 3 : '^T^'?^, ^"^t}- T^l "1^:1?? ^"f^ij TV T :- : -: t : -i — I vix t - t : - ••-:! — ^ The form with final n ^ is often used in the ist pers. both sing, and pi. (esp. in the later books) ; e.g. nnpt^^'NI and I sent., Gen. 32. 6. ii8 §35. PE 'aleph verb. I VT T V T T ; ' ?f' It T : T V : : -- - I • v: iv D'^nni 11^5 10 :anfj ^in^^Dt^rT ^t^^z^ ^V.T'^^ ^ ♦^^ Abraham saw a ram taken by (3) *his horns. Pass not the river, lest ye be smitten before your enemies. Our land shall not be tilled, for our enemies shall stand in the midst- of-her. Let me cross the river, that I may make this people inherit the land which Yahweh sware unto their fathers to give them. Love wisdom, forsake her not. They said unto him, To bind thee have we come down, to give thee into the hand of thine enemies. And the people served (//.) their God all the days of Joshua, and all the days of the elders who prolonged days after Joshua. And he made to pass his children in the fire. § 35. PE 'ALEPH VERB. (See Paradigm, p. 215.) I. (a) Pe ^ Aleph verbs are a sub-class of Pe Gutt. verbs. They have one peculiarity, — in impf. Qal ''Aleph quiesces in the vowel d \ in all other respects they are Pe Gutt, This is for a : thus "^bx". = "ibs; = nbN^ (cf. Arab. sala;/m, Dib*^, § 2. 2. i) = "ip5<\ by a curious process known as dissimilation^ intended to prevent two similar vowels (here 0) from following one another in the same word {o.i.V^^^'^, first, from U'N"i head). The verbs belonging to this class ^xq five-. ^?^5 to perish, ?^^? to eat, 1^^ to say, I^p^? to be willing, ^B^? to bake, (b) A few verbs have both this quiescent form and the reg- ular Pe Gtitt. form; e.g. ^^^ grasp, seise, impf. TnN^ and (rarely) Ths); PlpN to gather, impf. Plb^J; and (rarely) ^ip^ (for tlpN'). (c) Note that in the last vb. the quiescent x is dropped, as sometimes elsewhere ; e.g. i">^ri = v^t^^n ye shall say, and §35- PE *ALEPH VERB. 1 1 9 regularly in the 1st pers. sing, of these verbs; e.g. "ipj< (for niDNN) / will say, 2. (a) The impf. is in a (^^N^, but often (cf. TnN\ Pip^), especially in pause, in e p?^^). (b) This does not apply to ^3^^ and nas, whose impf., like that of all Latnedh He verbs (§ 32. 2), ends in n., (§ 44. i b) ; e.g. n3N\ 3. (a) "l^^? in impf. with waw consec. and retracted accent (§ 23. 3. 4) has the form "19^'- ^'f^d he said. (b) In inf. cstr. (ibg) with h, it becomes p'^.^f,^ = ) "^bx^ dicendo, j^j^V/^ (§ 14. i c). But not so with other verbs ; e.g. ^y^-), (not bbx^) /^ ^^^. D??^' Hiph. to rise early D'^^i'3 Philistines pc^'^ Samson DK^m ;;^. copper, bronze: dual ^""f^W^ fetters of copper or bronze VJ (twice written &<'i?J) clean, innocent ino to-morrow i)K^3 P/. to boil, seethe "in.s another (next) Nan Hiph. hide EXERCISE. TRANSLATE. •• T It - I •• T • T T It V V - vv : t: . T - T . t: v t : >: tt : -. t i- ... '..v - ... - I.. , .. , i.. . . . .,. 'T^ •^;i;? ^7bi^ n-^^?^« n^^.'rn nt^fc^n i^b^ni ^Vnn nt^h^n ^::^-n« ^^111 nTO S?^: ^'r^'-n^l ^"^""^ ^^^5^^1 "^^.l ^sSs^;]'! ii:rr\t » voc. suff. 'i'^;' ^nns ••J>ys '3nn ^3nb cons. suff. Tin: ^T?- ^^ns ^^ye ^3n-) 0^?3) plur. abs. • T : Dny: Dnns D^i?VQ (D'^n-i) Donb cstr. nna "^n c?n?) ••jnb (river) (lad) (fear) .(work) (breadth) (priest) § 36. 'aYIN guttural VERBS. 121 Like 'ins is the preposition nnn under, instead of, which, like "i'K, by, takes plui\ suffixes, '•nnn, Tj^rinn, vnnn, &c. (i) In second declens. words primarily of the form "]V^ ijyB, &c. (§ 29), naturally take, under the influence of the guttural, as their helping vowel -^, not .. (as in '^}^, "^p.S), and words of the 1st class or ^-type (vP) preserve the original pathah (cf. ^V?), thus yielding the form "lyj ; words of the 2nd class, with the vowels _ .. (cf. ""Sp), do not exist; words of the 3rd class are formed as we should expect (cf. if3), e.g. h^^. (2) Suffixes are added in strict accordance with the rules; e.g. ''"}y3 (cf. ""S^P) becomes ''"lyi. because gutturals except n (§ 8. 2 a) (cf ^"nna) prefer the composite, ^-^p, (cf. "l?^'?) becomes first 1")^.^. and then T^^}. because two vocal sh^was cannot come together (§ 6. 2 d. ii.). Similarly Pi^Q with suffix becomes first %3 (cf. ^lips) then ^^VS : so 'l^'V^ pdUkhd be- comes first vVQ and then ^>^^ pdolkhd. But n takes the simple sh^wa and closes the syllable, cf ^VTl- (3) S^'ghol appears instead of pathah in the words DHJ bread, DH?. womb, ^'^x tent, 1^3 thumb. -ino to be clean mtr P/. to serve t^hJ Pi. to drive DH-lT to slay unhNi. to fight fto sustain ^^n to cry T\n Pi. to bless 1 refresh jyriV/. to lean nmpy; offering • f)2&5 to mourn "inn to choose ^p5 drink-offering DyD to taste I'm to wash n§ Eden 1 nna^'p/ dan -^W gate t^'0 Cush (Ethiopia) EXERCISE. TRANSLATE. ,Vm^^ on'tO"* ,^?2n^i ,''pvt ,nntL^"' ,^::^-i ,^wio ,^nnio ' I - : V ^ •• - : ' -: It •-''•-: I- ' •• t : ' -:it ' -: i- ^ . .. -• ^- \^^-\V\p ;hv;i ,p};?0 .^"^.W? >^?01^ >^?tT1 ^ Perhaps connected in the Hebrew mind with T^V delight. ^ See § 33. 3 c. 122 §37- LAMEDH GUTTURAL VERBS. npy "itrt^ nr2i«n-n« n'lvh nrpt^ ^nnW^"'i a-rt^n-nt^ I- \ V -: T T -: IT V -:- I V" I- • ••:-:- tt it : mm '^n-itrn D^isnbn 'i^ib^ tjd^ nro^ ni::n 3 : ati^^^ •• : T : • -: I - : it ' v vt t : • - : t t • Tl'^Dtr^'i mm ^jiD^n*' -^b^^S ^Jf^it?^ ^: -i-n^^ D^:n3n ^::-^.i^i 4 ' :t : •: ' : vt : •• •• t : • •• : v •-•.!- -:it:- "ibt^S mn^-7t^ ^^i^iip*: ^::;l ^pj^?ii 5 : ^^7^? v:3 mm b^ti?i :nr:iTt^n nhstrn ^1) tji ^:Din:i t^"<^^ nrD^it^i Tir^tt? IT T -: IT ' ' i • : : • : ' v : t : t : t -:i- ' Av : : ^^vn m:ir ^h ^«-^pn t^^i "'^*'« '^S ^i^t^n ^^nn Beyond the rivers of Ethiopia. Our feet shall stand in thy (/•) gates (O) Jerusalem. Thou shalt love Yahweh thy God and him thou shalt serve. And your fathers cried unto me and said, We shall perfsh from the violence of our enemies. And she said unto her husband, Drive out this maid-servant and her son. And they forgot Yahweh, and he sold them into the hand of their enemies and they fought against ^ them. And they took wives * from all whom they chose. § 37. LAMEDH GUTTURAL VERBS. (See Paradigm, p. 218.) I. The peculiarities of^ Lam. Gutt. arise chiefly from the first law of gutturals — that all final gutturals must have an a sound before them. The real question is : in what cases does thQ pathah dislodge a long vowel (cf. ^?^. with ^^\>% and in what is it written additional to it, and furtive (cf. nife)? (i) Unchangeably long vowels naturally are retained, tak- ing path, furtive between them and the gutt. ; e.g. niX' (inf. abs. Qal), r\h^ (pass, ptc), rxh^T) (Hiph. pf.), n^f_ (impf.). (2) a. The tone-long vowels e and o are displaced by patha/i; e.g. impf and imper. Qal ^^\ (cf. i'bip^), rhv^ (with suff. ^3nfeV?!?,^f , § 3 I. 3 a. i.) ; impf. Niph. rhf^ (cf. i'tsij^), impf. Pi. n^)^^, also pf. Pi. nW ; Hiph. juss. npa'; (waw consec. imper. n^K'n, &c. (But inf. cstr. Qal retains 0, n^*'.) ^ See § ^^. 3 c. 2 See § 13. 2 a. «3. ■♦ D^CO, j«>/. of ne^K (p. 153). §37- LAMEDH GUTTURAL VERBS. 1 23 b. Exceptions : e remains — {a) in pause, e.g. ^^. (Niph.), n)^"^, (Pi.) ; {b) in participles abs., e.g, nfe (/ nn^'b^), n^^b ; {c) in infin. abs., e.g. n^5?', Pi. (but constr. n?c^). c. Final "i usually has o in impf. {e.g. "ISD"' to count, "Jby^ to cross) except in stative verbs "ipn to lack, "'P^.V (3) Under the Tone the gutt. retains shSva silent, as ''^n??'; except before another vowel-less consonant in 2 fein. sing. where a furt. path, slips in between the consonants without removing dag. from the 2nd, ^^^^ shaldJiat (probably an attempt to combine two traditions, ^W' and ^np*^). 2. Nouns from verbs Lam. Guttural. — First declension. sifig. abs. VVfi vd^ cstr. y^n rxa^ cons.suff. llJiJ'T r\nm; plur. abs. D'yfi. D'^nob^ cstr. 'yp'i. /npb^ and 'n^'f, § 22. 4. (wicked) (rejoicing) (seed) (report) (lance) (altar) In second declension the final short vowel is naturally a before the guttural (§ 8. i), and in all the declensions the quasi-vocal sh^'wa before the consonantal suffixes ka, &c., becomes a hateph (therefore not simply ^V?^!, "^V"!?, &c.). Second declension. Third declension. y^T yOlf' nni ilBTp )) j> j> nsTo "ly-iT ^yoB^ ^non ^iriBTD D^y-)T (DTOE') D^n^i ninarp TJ (^y?^) ^no-; >> ni'K' to send *" yo: to plant "^ ny:} to forget ^ j;"iT to sow ^ y^b' to be satisfied ^ vbv to halt u mt to rise (shine) /npf) to take nov to sprout r\m to anoint t ycs5^ to hear ^z sun A'^///. to make grow ">n^ dawn Pi2^_ Jabbok /^ i'^^^JS Penuel p3^< iV^>//. to wrestle ^ ''nS torrent, torrent valley, wady y^! deliverance, salvation -— . "^^1^ Niph. to swear, iY^))//. cause to swear ^3y33 Canaanite l^nj pull down, break down y npp salt ^^ "ijyo ford^ EXERCISE. TRANSLATE. ,n!?tp ,n'^tp ,TTD|:t2^ ,:^?t?:n ,:^nt^n4i '^?^^'^ ^^^'^rts^ tnrotr: ,nTOtr ,nnTOtr^ ,TinSu:« ,Tin^tr - - : • ■ : - - T ' •• T : • ' ' -: It : V ' ' -: 1- • V2SD -^T^tL^n "^i");!-! ;i-^DtrS ti^-^d^ ^ib^^n n^ti) "^r^D^^ n-in TT • V T • ' vAt- ' : t : • ' V T : ' t : - - •• • t •• • I 24 § 38. LAMEDH *ALEPII VERBS. • : - X ^v -: I : v At - • : - I • •• : ••• i ' : - : •^3 '^;in7U? xi^^^ri i^t^^i npir;_ ny it'^'n p;i^^^ .: *i7 "itp^^-n^i^ - • It : -!•• • • ' -:i" : V - - At - XX ^lon -^j?nn ^:v^Win 6 : iir-^b^i nu?^ *»:]:3b^ ^u?^^ ''r^r?^ This song shall never be forgotten. In the day .of his being anointed (Nzp/i.). And now lest he put forth (send) his hand and take of the tree of life and eat and live ^ for ever. Yahweh v^^ill give you in the evening flesh to eat, and bread in the morning to be satisfied (in/. Qal). He caused thee to hear his words out of the fire. Let those- loving (^ptc. cstr.) thy salvation say: Let God be great ! Ye shall surely hearken to the voice of my messenger, when I send him to you. And Samuel said, Speak, Yahweh, for thy servant is listening {ptc^. And he fought against the city all that day, and he took the city, and the people that (was) in it he slew, and he pulled down the city and sowed it with salt (ace). § 38. LAMEDH 'ALEPH VERBS. (See Paradigm, p. 220.) The irregularities of the remaining classes of verbs (ex- cept verbs Double ' Ayin, e.g. 33D) arise from the presence of some of the quiescents fc< 1 ^ in the stem. Verbs n"q, in which N quiesces in the imperfect only, have been already treated, § 35. I. Verbs LamedJi ^Aleph. — When i< is third stem-letter, it causes the following peculiarities : (i) At the end of a syllable n is silent after the pre- 1 On double accus. see § 27. \d\ cf. § 38. 3. ^ q^ p^ 37^ ^ote 5. §38. LAMEDH 'ALEPH VERBS. 1 25 ceding vowel, which is lengthened, as the syllable is now virtu- ally open, § 9. I. Thus a in pf. and impf. Qal (cf.'§ 37), pf. Niph., &c., becomes a. Thus ^^>'9 (i'PP) practically = V? which must become V^ (§5-3 a), that is, NVn. So 5, § 3V 3 a. i.), ^^;q} (i't^ip:), &c. (2) In perf. Qal of active verbs (those in a) the vowel a remains throughout, as (^^^'9 = ) C'^V9- (3) a. In perf. Qal of stative verbs (cf ^7^ to be full) and in all the other perfects the vowel is e ; e.g. Qal ''^N.c'p, Niph. "•nx^vp:, Pi. ^■lN5k•»p, &c. b. This — First declension. Second declension. Third declension. abs. xn^ xnpp ^!?? ^^D NV^ csti: ^?V snpp V " m'^'/em. suff. •^xn^* DDsnpp ^^' D''snpn D^NiSa Q'x^n n^Nv^^ cstr. niN3v : • 'vn\>D C??^?) 'fi^n nSi^f/e7n. (host) (assembly) (prison) (sin) (going out, ;>/f.) a. The quiescent retains the long vowel a before it even in the cstr. sing., though the heavy suffix QJ admits the short vowel. b. The long vowel often remains before the quiescent even in the cstr. plur. ; e.g. ^NDH. For the .. in ii^tpn, cf § 8. I b. 126 §38. LAMEDH 'aLEPH VERBS. c. In the /em. the &{ is apt to surrender its vowel to the preceding cons., riN^^ for nxv\ § 21. 3. k>;d to find X3b» to hate n-j^na/.l strength, 5<-ip to call, read 5s^^ ^cDb^n v:rSb^ ^^v^ ir^t^^i t': • V -: V V T T • - : : it •• tt v » -:i- v - "^:^«to DH^'^b:? ip^''! 3 : V^^ a« ••? nito "^^v «a50^. >^ •^^fc^ mn-' -i^b^ TO 5 :Drit^ v^^^^^ «7^ni ^m^'^i ^^j-^tr • -: - T T I V T T .. T • - : -(-- : IT §39- PE YODH AND PE WAW VERBS. 12/ in^^tr'^^1 t^^b^ int^!^^T 8 j mt^-ip^i nDbn■^^^ "iDDn-n^^ ttirpnn-nt) ^^^h Yahweh will hear when thou criest to him. I am full (per/.) of the spirit of judgment and of power, to tell to Jacob his transgression and to Israel his sin. And the earth was filled with violence. Hast thou found-me, mine enemy ? and he said, I have found-thee. Thou hast filled this house with thy glory. Thou hatest (pe?-/.) all workers of iniquity. And the spirit of Yahweh lifted-him up and cast him to- (the)-earth. Thou shalt love thine enemy, thou shalt not hate him in thy heart. Unless ye had ploughed (per/.) w^ith my heifer, ye would not have found (per/) my riddle. § 39. PE YODH AND PE WAW VERBS. (See Paradigm, p. 222.) As Hebrew words hardly ever begin with 1 (w), and a primary w at the beginning of a word (cf. Arab, wa/ada) becomes in Hebrew ^ (y), e.g. ^\ (yalad), it is impossible to distinguish in the Qal between Pe Yodh and Pe Waw verbs — vbs. whose first radical is ultimately "• (e.g. \>T^ to suck) and 1 (eg. ^\ to bear) — as both necessarily begin with \ Nevertheless they must be carefully distinguished, and in Hebrew the distinction is most obvious in the Hiph. (and Niph.); e.g. PTi? (from pj^, but T^in (Niph. n^i: : from an ultimate 1^i). Let us take the Pe Yodh vbs. first — i.e. those whose ^ in the Qal is a real ultimate \ I. Pe Yodh vbs. — (i) The impf Qal {pT^^ is formed quite regularly : the final vowel is a. Thus PT^, (cf. 13D'') becomes PT,^ as the second ^ quiesces (§ 9. i). (2) The impf. Hiph. (P^3\') is also regular. Thus P*?^! (cf. ^^Pi?') becomes VTl (^J^ = <3:2 = diphth. 4 cf. § 2. 2. i). (3) The pf Hiph., which we should expect to be p"'?^"^ (from X>^T^, ^"^ppn ; cf. impf Qal), is P^T'^., probably on the analogy of the impf ^ Relative unexpressed, as often in poetic style. 128 §39- PE YODH AND PE WAW VERBS. (4) The verbs of this class, which are very few, are chiefly ?^l to suck (Hiph. to suckle), 3pj to be good (Hiph. to do good), p7\ in Hiph. ?v''n to howl. 2. Pe Waiu vbs. — (i) ^. In the Hiph., as we have seen (pf. Tl^'in, impf 2''!?'^''), the original tuaw (seen in Arab.) reappears. Impf. 3W (cf. ^^L)p5 becomes 3^w^v (^z^ = ^2^ = diphth. o, cf. § 2. 2. i). The pf. is ^^in, formed probably on the analogy of the impf (Impf with wazv cons. ^K'i'i, § 23. 3. 4.) In the Niph. ^Ji'ii the waw also reappears. b. The (prob. orig.) Niph. prefix na (which ordinarily appears as ni, cf h^\>}) combined with w {2^^} yields no (3K^i:). c. In the impf Niph. (and derived parts) the waw is retained and quite properly treated as a consonant ; e.g. ^.p^^. (cf i'^Pi^''.). d. The I St pers. impf has always the form ib'iN not "IP'i^ (§25. 2). e. Waiv is sometimes found in the Hithp. ; e.g. V'^^F)^ to make oneself known. f. The Hoph. is nti^'^n {huskabh, from 2K'in huwshabh), cf '^hm (altern. form to ^^^'n). (2) Of the impf Qal (and related parts : inf. and imper.) there are two types : (a) In some vbs. it is formed exactly as in impf Qal of Pe Yodh vbs. ; e.g. Kn;, ^^\ to possess, ^% ^«■J"'^. to fear, ^^"^ to be dry, XT^ to counsel, ^I^J to be weary, %iQ,. (J?) In others the initial •• falls out. In this case the vowel of the preformative is e (pretonic, long), and the final vowel is also e (eg. 2{^!\ 1?.'! : with waw cons. "^^X l^.fi?, § 23. 3. 4) or a before gutturals {e.g. VT). {c) The chief verbs which inflect thus are six in number, and as they are of very common occurrence, they should be carefully noted : ViJ to knozu, 1?^ to bear, NV; (impf NV";) to go outy ^X ^^ S^ down, 3K^; to sit, dwell, and "^pn to go (impf "n!?.'! as if from ^^;, i.e. 1^1 ; cf Hiph. T^in). {d) i. The imper. (3?^, XV, )r\, &c.) and inf cstr. (n3C^, mn, njn, nx>*, &c.) follow,as always, the impf (§ 2 i . 1 c, 2 a. i.). The inf cstr., by the addition of n, assumes .segholate form, ex- actly as in Pe Nun vbs., § 33.2 b: with suff., "rj^^r, "rnn, ^ri^^, *nKV, but ^^3^ ijghol, under influence of following palatal). ii. i) before such (segholate or monosyllabic) inf constructs is pointed \ ; e.g. D^l^, Xm) (§ 14. i d, cf § 33. 2 c). § 39- PE YODH AND PE WAW VERBS. 129 3. Vei'bs assimilating the first radical. — The initial w y are subject to still another mode of treatment ; instead of coalescing with a preceding vowel as {iy — i, uw — tl^ ay = 4 aw — o), they may be assimilated, like n^ to the following consonant, which is then doubled, as PVJ to pour^ impf P^\ ; J^*^ in Hiph. ^i^H to set, place, nv; to burn (Niph. n^J, Hiph. n-'^n). 4. to be able ?bj, perf. Qal ; impf, ^'^V to add ^d;, perf. Qal ; impf Hiph. ^^pi^ English adverbs, e.g. again, zvell, are rendered idiomati- cally by Hebrew verbs : thus and she bore again (lit. " added to bear" or " added and bore ") he played the instrument well ( 133 yt^^[} (lit. he did well as 7'egards playing) 1 |3^p „ thou hast found it quickly (lit. thou hast hastened — inc). Pi. — as regards finding) y^5 stroke, plague Q''y|i')5^ forty fiJJ sorrow niK Ur i^?'^/. grey hair i^3V3 for the sake of 0^*1^3 Chaldeans ''^?^/ ark ^ X\^> to awake: only in "i^T to advise counsel, iV^?)^.^. to take or impf Qal Ti?"'! exchange counsel with "i?t5^ grain, corn nx brother n^^^? sister nK^S ^^/r. n^^'N wife 2^5 father ^"^l^^/ kindred |iDS* mischief, harm {very rare) n ,n particle of interrogation (§ 49. 2. 2) inc', iV^^)!'/^. remain, na mouth, cstr. '?> be left "•a ^1^ according to the measure of, in accordance with np^ to be kindled, burn J;v^ Hiph. T^n to lay spread ns3 (n^3 in pause and before s) by what ? ^n alive . EXERCISE. PARSE AND TRANSLATE. J^y!fi ,^T2n ,«-)^ri pT"^ ,n5^2 ,nn ,ir^ ,ni"^.^ prr\, ^ Never the ark of the covenant (which is always |i"lNI, li"*^n) but Noah's ark in Gen. 6-9 (and in Ex. 2. 3, 5 the papyrus vessel in which the infant Moses was laid). 9 iSO §39. PE YODH AND PE WAW VERBS. ^•!rn ,inT-i'»') ,n:D-r^n ,n*^"i'in-i ,np^r] .'n^xti^^') ;i'y\h '\i^'0^ *•? :^ib d^Vt? ^''V^i' ""^^ J^'^'^"' ^33^1 ♦•^"3^^??^ «... V -: • -: T : - V - t i?S! ^-'^ ^irpt^^i 3 tnstp^i^i:^ *•? ^^ nts-i nin*" ^y^t^ And the ark went upon the face of the waters. Make me to know thy ways. And they said unto her, Wilt thou go with this man ? and she said, I will go. And he said, Cause every man to go out of the house ; and there stood no man with him, when he made himself known to his brethren. And the man opened the doors of the house and went out to go on (dat.) his way. And the daughter of Pharaoh said to her, Take this child and nurse (suckle) it for me, and she took the child and nursed it. Behold I have heard that there is corn in Egypt, go down thither and buy us a little food. And Yahweh said unto him, Go not down to Egypt, dwell in the land which I shall say unto thee. And he was afraid and said, How terrible (^?-)^ Nzp/i. ptc.) is this place ! And he said, My son shall not go down, for his ^ Cognate ace. ^* Infin. abs. = we did not tell him of our own accord, he asA'ed us (§21. 2 b). 3 B^l i/iere z's, there are (opposite of pN, p. 136 note\ a particle,— with suffixes, ^K^. thou art, D3:J'^ you are (H is interrogative particle). § 40. 'aYIN WAW and VODH VERBS. I3I brother ^ is dead and he alone is left, and should mischief befall 2 him in the way in which ye shall go, then ^ shall ye bring down my grey-hairs in sorrow to Sheol. § 40. 'AYIN WAW AND YODH VERBS. (See Paradigm, p. 224.) This class includes the verbs whose middle letter, i or \ is a voivel letter {e.g. D^p to arise, ^^1. to co7itend\ but not the vbs. in which that letter is a real consonant {e.g. yi3 to expire, njn to live). Whether these vbs. were always mono- syllabic, or whether they are contracted forms of verbs of the ordinary type, the middle letter being originally con- sonantal {e.g. pf. QiJ from DlfJ ? ^P from n.'i'p to die ? cf. the noun n'lD mdweth, death), is a question difficult to decide, and need not be here discussed. In these verbs the inf. cstr. (D^Pj y\ &c.), not the pf. Qal, is treated as the ground-form, as the pf. Qal (Qi^, 2"), &c.) does not exhibit the characteristic 1 or \ The following vbs. illustrate the various types. Inf. cstr. D^p to arise y n^iD to die, \y\3. to be ashamed, Kia to come ; p? to discern. ■) before such (monosyllabic) inf. constructs is pointed ^ ; e.g. D^P^ (§ 14. I d) ; cf. § 39. 2. 2 d. ii. 1. Qal pf. — As in the regular verbs (^Pi^, 133, {bi?) the vowel may be ^ ^ or ^ ; e.g. Qi^, ri^, C'i3, N*3 ; jn. fem. njpi3, nn6, &c. ; i s. m. ^^r^p, '•np, ^riB^i, ^nxa, '^^%, &c. 2. Qal impf. — a. The vowel of the ground-form (inf. cstr.) is preserved, and the preformative is not the ordinary7/(?bp^) but the old j'^z (§ 2 i. i a) necessarily lengthened in the open pretone to yd (§ 6. 2 b): hence D^p;, ni^;, xu;, pa; ; pi. ^D^i3;, &c. In tJ^i3'' preformative is the regular yi (proper and original to stative vbs. ; § 22. 2) lengthened \.o ye (§ 6. 2 b). b. Jussive Dp;; impf.withwaza cons.^\^l] (way-ya-qom); with final guttural or r 1D;1 and he turned aside (§ 8. I c), from n^iD. c. Participle Dp, rin, &c. : fem. nSj^, ^/. D"'rpp, ^^^r. ^^ij (<^ un- changeable, § 41. I a). d. Only in impf. Qal do Tv and '"^ vbs. differ (D^p;, P^;) : there the characteristic 1 or •• appears. But in Hiph., e.g.^ they are alike : D^pn, "^"i^, 1 Vns (see p. 153). 2 Waw consec. wkhperf 132 § 40. 'ayin waw and yodh verbs. 3. Hiph. — a. The Hiph.is of the regular form (i''I2p^^,^'Pp:); only the vowel of the preformative (Jii,yd), being now in the open syllable, becomes the corresponding tone-long vowel {he, yd) : ^'pr\ (/. niD'pn), impf. D"!?; ; ptc. D^po (formed fr. pf ). Hoph. Di?^n. b. Jussive Cj?^ : impf. with wazv consec. Qi^J? ; with final guttural or r "ID'I (same as Qal) and he removed (§ 8. I c). 4. Niph. DipJ (^^1??)- — a. The preformative of the pf. is the (orig.) na lengthened to nd in the open syllable, and qdm has passed into qom (§ 2. 2. i); hence ^ipj (/. "^^^PJ). Impf. Dii5> (from Qip3>.)- b. Notice that the closing syllables of Niph. and Hoph. are not, as in the regular verb, alike. 5. Piel,%iQ. — The regular intensive forms, duplicating the middle radical {e.g. y}V to surround, from niy), are very rare and late. The intensive is usually formed by doubling the last radical — Polel {e.g. ^^'^pypass. D^ip to raise up, Dpi"> to exalt), or the first and last — Pilpel {e.g. 7?.P3 to sustain). Cf. § 26.. 5. 6. (a) The vowels i u being so characteristic of these verbs, a great effort is made to give them expression ; but as they cannot stand in a shut syllable with two consonants following them, § 5. 3 b {e.g. n^oipn, '^ f. pi. impf. Qaly J^^^?i], 2 s. m. pf. Hiph., are impossible), a vowel is often inserted between the stem and the consonantal afiformatives, and i u thus remain in the open syllable. The inserted vowel is 6 in perf., and i in impf. ; eg. nrB^pri, impf. Qal, ni6"'pn, pf. Hiph., \ii6-iP3, pf. Niph. (by dissimilation, § 35. I a) for ^■lioip^ (b) Sometimes the regular vb. is followed, and no vowel is inserted. In that case i tc become e {a in pf. Hiph.) o in the shut syllable ; e.g. n:3*^*ri {tJiey shall retuim, fem. impf. Qal from i\t^ ; but also nravj'n), njac^'ri (impf Hiph.), T^^'^y} (pf. Hiph. of 5)^3 to wave, swing', but also J^'iQ'^lI). Sometimes, as \ve have just seen, both forms are found. 7. Some vbs. are both i"v and ""''y, though one form usually predominates ; e.g, ^^^ or Cti' to place (impf. ^^'T^, very rarely Diir;), '^<^ or ''^"''^ to rejoice. 8. A few '•"v verbs have forms which look like, and probably are, Hiph'ils with the preformative dropped ; e.g. ^0^"? ('is well as ""riill ; at least n33 is attested) rii2^"i as well as riS'l thou strivest. These T : - ' 1 • T I - abbreviated forms appear to be late. § 40. 'ayin waw and yodpi verbs. 133 D^pl to arise ^^^ Ci"'b to set n'^'C' to set Hiph.\\.o establish ni:j'Uo return n3i^/]dove n« to rest Hiph.]io restore D'iV J^/. m^jn to cause nn to be high \h '{h to pass the to rest, give nn to be ashamed night HipJir rest to sin to come d^: to flee n''3n to place, fi3 to be firm (?) T.V to hunt . set down (not found in Qal') i?,?3 to melt rm to die r?n, i?.i3 HipJu Poiel nij^ to shine pn to run to establish nn to contend ny T^/. sweat niol to turn aside i^y Hiph. to testify Hiph.)\.o remove ni^jp resting-place 'l^^ nostril, anger ; dual ^\'^^ face (§43. 4) p]?/. palm (of hand), sole (of foot) nb Noah' EXERCISE. PARSE AND TRANSLATE, dr^ ,n:3^n^trn ,^i^i^n ,Dnb^ ^^o^ ^va^ ,nnti^ ,mD ',0:2 t'tV :'• t' v'itI'tt 'tt' tx't p^^^ ;y'vc ,*'mtpni ,ni6"^nn ,]i!5n :v\'^h ,ryty^^ ,nniD^^ :nnbn ,«i^n ,n::3'iD*^ ,nr::5'^©:) ,nb^^nn ,niL^n-^« njn^ ^w *•? nmt^n-7^ "^:;i^tr' iv onb 75^?^ Tj^Gb^i wt:^ Dt^ ••5 ^:ir-in VT 3 5 D^r^tz^n nnrin -^to-^3 nntij':? Y"^^^ niiin-^^ nr^i^ ntrrii nS:ii ?1dS n'i::^ n^i'^n n^^!^ T"- V - V TT- t:- '-: — T T- -r:#r rr\T\^ 5 : nninn-^^ v^m iiry^ va^^ nnp^i iT n^tr'^i " T •• - T •• T "T— T V It*— X - : •- rr^rr\ nn ^:::t^ n^n 6 : ntn n^'^n ire:: ^ritiJn ^nhvi. V- ...... - ...... T T ,T. AT ..•: -Di^ 7 tDiD^Tiint^ V"i^^-7b^ DDiib^ i^trm D^^y^ D^n7« ^ ^ unchangeable ; because strictly ny''T from V^. ^ D**?!) is either a gloss on, or in apposition to, pUDH. ^ With you, from Cy (see p. 142, note i). 4 \'inyn. The p^f. Hiph. of n^y has _ instead of .; . The pf. (/ testify) is used "to express actions which, although really only in process of accomplishment, are nevertheless meant to be represented as already ac- complished in the conception of the speaker," Gesenius-Kautzsch, § 106. i. 134 §.4i- NOUNS FROM 'aYIN WAW AND YODH. And they fled the way of the wilderness. Depart not from-after Yahweh, but (and) ye shall serve him with all your heart. Arise, shine, for thy (/.) light is come. And he took not from his hand (that) which he had brought. I will surely- return {inf. abs.) unto thee (/). And he arose in the morn- ing and saddled his ass and went with the princes of Moab. And he called the man (dat^ and said unto him, Thou hast brought upon me and upon my kingdom a great sin. And his wife said to him. If Yahweh had wished {pf.) to kill us, he would not have taken {pf.) from our hand a burnt- offering. And the woman went out to meet the captain of the king's host and she said, Turn aside, my lord, turn aside unto me, fear not ; and he turned aside unto her to the tent. § 41. NOUNS FROM 'AYIN WAW AND YODH. I. First declension. See §18. Di^ (rising) plm\ D'^Sj? cst7\ ""Pi^ ; fern. n6|? np (dead) „ D^riD „ ^np „ nn» niD {good) „ D-niD „ "nito „ nniD Dipn {place) „ ni^ipo &c. 0^^9) {sojourning-place) „ D^nijp {y,i to sojourn) ni:^ {resting-place) fern, nm^o (ni: to rest) ,,, '^J''"!P a province (H to judge) (a) Whether or not the first three words are to be re- garded as contracted from njp, JTiD, niD (§ 22. i), and therefore ideally falling within the first declension (§ 1 8), it is import- ant to note that words of this type, derived from roots whose middle letter is •» or \ have unchangeable vowels ; Q.g. pi. cstr. ■•pp, not ^pp (unlike D"n blood, which, not being from a root D^n, has pi. cstr. ''P'^), 'ne, not ^no. (b) Note, too, that fv nouns with d preformative have often, with inflectional additions {e.g. pi. or fern.), ^ instead of i; cf. pf Niph. D'lpJ^, nb^p3 (§ 40. 6a; so pino sweety n|5^nD, &c.). % 41- NOUNS FROM 'AYIN WAW AND YODH. I 3 5 2 . Second declension. See §2 9. V'y Nouns. A class. I class. U class. ads. lix -liK^ niD none ; DID p^K^ (P^^) cstr. ?j „ niD )J ■)^ suff. "--lis nit^ ^niD "P^D ^\m plur. Dni&? n'^-m D^niD D^P^D DVJtJt cstr. ••nix ni^ -niD •.p^D ••ip^^ic^ (light] 1 (ox) (death) Nouns. (horse) (street) A class. I class. U class. abs. P'O ^1 ^'n TC' none cstr. „ ^^.t i"n •>•) suff. ••ip^n '•n^r h^n sy^ plur. ( ;D^iP>n) D^nn D-^j^^n D'tTtJ^ cstr. Cip;n) ^n^ T? n^^ (bosom) (olive) (force) (song) (a) Some of these words, in the absolute form, are mani- festly segholates ; e.g. ri}6, n*;? (p. 1 00, footnote) ; others, the majority, are ndt, e.g. ">iJ<, p"'n — they are now simply mono- syllables, with long unchangeable vowels. Originally, however, words of the latter type will have been *awr (or ''aui^ and h-d.yq (or haiq) — contracting re- spectively into 'ip, voice hsp, pi. oth, pit nin oth, generation ni^ zm and oth, fowl v\S^. Like nitr, — thorn nin. horse D^D „ whelp "i^i^, spirit n^i oth, street pin oth. Like \m, — pot "isi-n. ram W, wine I!!, no r.N.i eye TV oth (wells), colt "^^V, buck tJ^n. » ^gg r? only in //., calamity "t^i?, smell nn. „ vanity p^"!, judgment P"!, joy i'^?. 5. Many words have some irregularity: house ri^3,//. D"'ri3, probably bdtthn or ^^//V/ (see p. I53)r ^ n^, which often appears with a sort of verbal function, and is = there is not (cf. ^\ there is, p. 130), not unnaturally takes verbal suffixes, occasionally strengthened by the nun energiciitn (§ 31. 7); they are '3?'^, '^Tf., V:^, I^.V^, n33;K, «:>*, DD^^X, Dr«. ^.^. Enoch walked with God ^3y NT and he was not. A verb accompanying px must be in the participle ; e.g. ye do not keep my ways, D''')Dte^ Q??^^* Somewhat similarly niy yet, still : ''3"liy (H^V), ^niy, !|*liy, 'Dliy, 3//. D-iiy. olive nn force ^:n bosom p-n song T^ 42. DOUBLE AYIN VERBS. 137 ;ye ]% du. O^rJ^ eyes,//, nii^i; wells. fnight W, more usually np^^ where n^ is ace. termination ; cstr. ^'h, pi rihh. !;day DV, //. (°''^V- = ) ^^'Pt* § 9- This word is very irregular in treating its d as merely tone-long: hence //. cstr. '•p:. head C'N"i, probably = ^^5^ (| 2. 2. i), i.e. r^V/ (like malk\ plur. D^^'N-i contracted from Q^'^'xi, cf. D"'^^^. The s», now silent and superfluous, preserves the memory of the time when the letter was a really integral part of the word — in its old form rcisJiu, nips to open (eyes) . ^^18;? locusts {coll?) I'ly iniquity, guilt EXERCISE. TRANSLATE. I •. T I • V : X -: : • • v: - .. . t it •• Drnn^i 8 : v:d^ intrr^i Di^n t^nnn^'i Dvn mnS ]:in Behold I am old, I know not the day of my death. In those days there-was-not a king in Israel, (every) man did ^ the (thing) upright in his (own) eyes. And Noah awoke from his wine and knew what his younger (little) son had done to him. And the prophet said unto her. And thou (/em.) arise, go to thy house ; when thy feet come to-the- city, then (waw cons.) the boy shall die. And he offered the ram of the burnt-offering. And the men feared to return to their houses. § 42. DOUBLE 'AYIN VERBS. (See Paradigm, p. 226.) Verbs Double "Ayin {e.g. 33p) so entirely resemble in their inflection verbs ' Ayin Waw, that it is best to treat them immediately- after this class. It is an open question whether ^ Waw consec. pf. : t/ien . . . shall be opened, ^ "^^T. li^Pf-, § 46. IL 2. 138 §42. DOUBLE 'aYIN VERBS. the root is to be regarded as monosyllabic and biliteral (3p), expanded in certain parts to ^?D, or dissyllabic and triliteral (330), contracted in certain parts to 3p. The duplication which is so common a feature of these verbs {e.g. *nilp, I s.pf. Qal\ w, 3//.// &c.) might seem to point conclusively to the presence of a repeated letter in the stem (33p, hhp^ ; it may equally well be due, however, simply to the desire to strengthen the second consonant of the short biliteral stem (30, Pi5), I 7. 3 a. But whatever the explanation may be, the facts are simple enough ; they are these — (i) The longer form (330) is necessary when an un- changeably long vowel or double letter requires the presence of a third stem-letter ; e.g. pres. and pass. ptc. Qal 33iD, 3Up; inf. abs. Qal 3i3D ; Pi. 330. It is also usual in the 3rd pers. pf : 330, n33p, 1330. (2) a. In other cases the shorter form is used and the vowel is that which is found in the second syllable of the regular verb ; e.g. inf cstr. 3*0 (cf ^'^\>\ impf Qal 3b; (i^bp^), pf Niph. 3PJ (bp?J). a. ^ before such (monosyllabic) inf. constructs is pointed ^ ; e.g. T3/' to plunder., 3*1P to become many (§ 14. i d) ; cf § 39. 2. 2 d. ii. iS. With suffixes to the inf. cstr., u naturally appears in the sharpened syllable (§ 7. 7) ; e.g. ippB when he inscribed (from Ppn). Cf § 43. I a. b. Exceptions. — (i.) In the Hiph. the vowel has not risen to /, but remains e (sometimes a, esp. with gutt. and "i; e.g. "ipn he has made bitter^ ; e.g. 3pri, pnn to begin (impf 3p;, 7nj). (ii.) The Niph. impf follows the pf : 30^, (cf DipJ, Dip;, § 40. 4 a), (iii.) Stative vbs. always end in a, not e ; e.g. S"?, "ip, ^1. (3) a. As in ^ Ayin Waw vbs. (§ 40. 2) the vowels of the preformative, standing in the open pretone, are tone-long ; e.g. impf Qal 3b; — the original ^^ (§ 21. i a) lengthened to yd — with waw co7ts. 3pjT {way-yd~sobJi) ; pf Niph. 3pj — the primary na lengthened to nd (cf Dip3, § 40. 4) ; pf Hiph. 3pn — hi lengthened to he (§ 6. 2 b), ptc. follows the pf 3pp (cf D^?p, § 40. 3 a), impf 30;, with waw cons. 3p|i, Hoph. 3p^n, b. In Stat. vbs. — impf in a — the^? of the preformative (§ 22. 2) is naturally lengthened \.oye\ cf "ip.\ "^T. (4) The double letter shows itself with all inflectional §42. DOUBLE 'aYIN VERBS. 1 39 afiformatives ; and the tone (except in participles) is, as a rule, on the penult ; as Niph. pf. ^P^^,/. !^3D^ (: pretonic ; there- fore not ^), 2 7n. niiD3, but ptc. 3d;,/. nlp^,//. D-|p^. (5) Before the afformatives beginning with a consonant a vowel is inserted, viz. in the perfects 0, and in the impff. and related parts,/; as pf Qal niSo, impf Niph. nrlpn ; cf § 40. 6 a. (6) The tone-long e o, which under the tone maintained themselves before the double letter, cf § 5. 3 (2 f. s. impf Qal ''BDn, impf Hiph. "•^Sn), when they lose the tone become the sharp i u (§ 7. 7) ; as 2 pi. fem. imper. Qal ^X%p_, impf. nj^lpn ; impf Hiph. nj-'lpn. (7) a. The regular Intensive is quite common ; e.g. ??n to praise. Another form of Intensive, also much in use, is the so-called Poel\ e.g. 2?iD (cf D^3ip, § 40. 5) to encompass, ^SVi to act sevej^efyj pass. T'^'iV, reflexive ^c'ivrin. More rare is the Pilpel; eg. ^3^3 to roll (§ 26. 5). b. In the regular verb the Po'el is found, though rarely, in the sense of aim or endeavour ; e.g. ^^^ to take root. (8) In the impf some vbs. duplicate the first radical, as in Aramaic ; e.g. 33p, impf ^'p^ to curse, 'V:\> "ip"'. to bow down, DD'n D'^^ to be silent, D^J^ D^i^. to be finished. Some vbs. havs both forms ; e.g. nno, Qal 3b; and 3b^, Hiph. 3p; and 3p: ; DC^ to be desolate or astonished, Db" and Db'\ n to plunder id to measure ^v^ three on St} to be hot id st. to be bitter T\'^ to bow down |n to be gracious ^r\ Hiph. to begin ^^VJ Naomi V'\ St. to be evil ^^; st. to tingle (No°mi) ^j to roll a"i to be ^r become Dm P/. to have "IK to curse many, multiply compassion jn to hold a feast "113 to sojourn njy to answer "]-! .y/. to be soft ""^.isnn to seek hospi- ^ njv to testify PdA^2///. to waste away tality (with) against m to feel (grope) |iyia Gideon l? separation p^ to lick, lap '•'n*^ Almighty (?) (always pre- \>\>st. to be light {Pi. in^ remainder, rest ceded by 2) to curse) "f?? apart 1 i.e. stative. I40 §43- NOUNS FROM DOUBLE 'aYIN VERBS. EXERCISE. PARSE THESE WORDS. : ■•. T I vAtt t t t It •• •• •• — : v -: T • It - ••■-.:- • r ' T : ♦ V ) -:|- - •- iv t "irib^ni 5 * ^^^'^^ ri^pnS rrw^rj n^y "^I'l^r^^ ^^^ ^^^^ _ - .. . r. . T» v»: a.t:.t . T vl: . - »v •• -: nD7 n^n^ ^nti^n op^'^i '^nrDT'n n^Sr^ "^^^^ *m^72 ^S T T '^ » ■-••.•: 't •• : • : - T r • : * "• . • I will curse (ik) them that curse (i^p) thee. May Yahweh cause his face to shine upon thee and be gracious to thee. In the place where the dogs licked his blood shall they lick thy blood, even thine.^ Roll thy way upon Yahweh thy God and trust in him. The number of those who lapped (Pi. />tc.) \\. fern, npi? light \ ^V people, suff. ^W my people, pi. QW. A class. I class. U class. abs. Dy "in rn pn cstr. DV "in XVi -pn suff. ^isy '"•? "^n ••[511 plur. u^m Dnn D^yn D^-pn (people) (mountain) (arrow) (statute) ^ Defective spelling, § 4 d. 2 Circiunstantial clause, — in which the order is : waiu. then subject, and last predicate. Waw would be translated here " when." 3 See § 43- 6. §43- NOUNS FRO>.I DOUBLE AYIN VERBS. I4I > 1. (a) In their monosyllabic form the primary vowels i and u (evident in the forms with suffixes, plurs., &c. ; e.g. D^SfH arrows, Q^ipn statutes ; cf. 42. 2 a. /8 : notice //, not 0, before double letter, § 7. 7) become tone-long e and ^, e.g. TC, P^^. The vowel a, however (cf. ^W), usually remains, e.g. DV (not Dy), except, in certain nouns, in combination with the article, when it becomes a ; e.g. ^VT\, "^^^^ § 1 2. Sometimes the a is thinned to i before suffixes and plur. ; e.g. riQ mo7'sel, D'^ri? (§ 2. 2. 4, § 6. 2 d. i.). (b) The vowel under D preformative is sometimes lost (^.^. 3DD circle, ^""r^PP) and sometimes preserved {e.g. "HDIO curtain, cstr. T]pC ; P.9 j/^2>/^/, ''^jO w_y shield. (c) Rarely a triliteral form, of the segholate type, has been de- veloped in the plur. ; e.g. ^''^DV peoples, Qvp^ from PV shadow O^iy my shadow), ^^'^J), cstr. pi. of "IH. 2. A5 gutturals and n cannot be doubled, the preceding vovvel is usually lengthened ; thus S"^, / ^\>., m. pi. D'^P, /. r\<%_'^ but Vl ^z///, ny-i, D-i?-), niy-j. So in, /.$•. ''in,^/. Dnn Before a virtually doubled n the short vowel remains, ns snare, D'HS. In either case, of course, the vowel is un- changeable, hence pi. cstr. "•jn (not 1), ''?n, &c. § 8. 4 b. 3. This class of words can best be distinguished from other classes by a knowledge of derivation ; but it may be observed that — (i.) Words ojf this class ending in a sound have usually short a, while the words of other classes which they resemble, as DT blood, § 18, D|5 standing, § 41, have a (notice the very different cstr. plurals "'^'^, ""ipP, "'l^y). (ii.) Words of this class ending in e sound are distinguished from segho- lates of 'Ayin Yodh like P^'H, § 41, by wanting yodh. They quite agree in form with words like HD, § 41, and Dt^', § 30, which, however, are not a numerous class (notice the difference before suffixes, ""np, ''^K^, . ''Jfn). (iii.) Words of this class ending in o sound are distinguished from adj. and segholates of 'Ayin Waw like 3it3 and ^ip, § 41, by wanting waw. 4. To this class may also be relegated (i.) a few words of the first declension type ; eg. ^^\ camel, pi. D^^^2 ; yp^ idol, pi. D^IlVj; ; jQi^? wheel, J^i? little, C3''3pp, ^^ty^ deep, fem. nj^py, &c. ; (ii.) two or three monosyllables from roots with medial n (always assimilated) ; e.g. ^!S5, nostril, anger {==anp, from root P]:x), suff. ^^'^, du. D^2^5 ; T^ (root Wy) she-goat, pi. D'-Ty ; (ill.) words that double the last consonant ; eg. pNKf at ease, W'l^m. 142 § 43- NOUNS FROM DOU^jLE 'aYIN VERBS. light Pp. and so : weak i''n, fine P"=l, bitter "ip, living "n, cold ii^, hot on. people cy „ hill "in, garden |5, prince "^b', ox "iQ, palm (hand) n?/ shadow 75? „ heart 3^, mother D^5, end Ti?, arrow Tf?, with (prep.) n«, Dy.i statute ph „ bear n'n, tambourine C|h, all f)3, yoke i^'y, strength ry, heat Dh, cold "vp, statute npn 5. The indeterminate subject (Engl, t/iejf) may be ex- pressed — (a) by the 3rd pers. plur. ; or (d) by the 3rd sing.; or (c) by the passive voice, i.e. Niph. (Hoph. Pu.) — in the last case the Pass., used impersonally, still remains the govern- ment of the Act. ; e.£: they called his 7iaine Sheth \ „ ^5■^|? „ «:'p3 6. When the Personal Pronoun is repeated for the sake of emphasis, it is repeated in the separate or simple form ; e.g. bless me, even me ^^^ D3 ^^^D^ thy bloody even thine nriK"D2 "ripi to Sheth, even him i^in-oa nc^p "in^ cord, string t^^^J ruler, prince *^Y^V/. young woman DKO to reject ^yj 2 displeased. EXERCISE. TRANSLATE. Diipt^n 4 : "^Or^J? °?rT ^-?'^? 3 ♦ ^^'^l. Q"!"!^ ^^^-^il "i ^'^^^ 2 T •• T • IT T - -^ T ' T : TT : I " " 'i^Sn ^>!ip inp 6 : ^QD -1 ^itd:) □•'u;^i ^h^pn ^innDtr nirntt? : IT ••'• -'T • - : • : - • t it ' : 'i : ' : it : • t : it iwith suff. 'm, ^riN, r\m, inx, nrix, oris*, Dsns, Dnx. so '•tsy, &c., except 2//. which is M^V* (Another form of i sing, is ^l^VO Like nx too is n3n behold, except in i pers. sing, and plur. It is as follows : '33n (or '33.1, pause "JSH), ^3n, "q3n, i3n, n3n, ^^IJ) (or 'i3.3n, /«wj^ i35n)* D33n, Djn. 2 Very rare. § 44- LAMEDH HE (LAMEDH WAW AND YODH) VERBS I43 : ^i^n ^h Tir^:^^! «'^tr:i S^pn t^S' a^nh^ 9 : an^ ^Db^ Comfort ye my people, speak to ("?P) their heart, and cry unto them that their warfare is fulfilled (full). Plead with your mother, plead, for she is not my wife, and I am not her husband. Thou shalt fall upon the mountains of Israel, thou and all the peoples that are with thee. And the captain of the host sent messengers to the king, saying:^ Make thy covenant with me, and behold, my hand (shall be) with thee, to turn-round ^ unto thee all Israel. § 44. LAMEDH HE (LAMEDH WAW AND YODH) VERBS. (See Paradigm, p. 228.) The n in this class of verbs (e.g. npa to uncover, reveal) is not a genuine letter of the root, but a mere vowel sign, indicating a. (When the n is truly consonantal, it takes mappiq, § 7. 8, e.g. nna to be high, and the vb. is trestCu' like a LamedJi guttural, § 3 7.) The last letter of the stem is properly either ^ (^^J gdlay) or 1 (e.g. "h^ shdlaw), though forms with yodh have acquired such a preponderance that only a few traces of stems with waw now appear. Lamedh Yodh (or Lamedh Waw) would therefore be a more appropriate term, as n is not integral to the root. The original •• of "'^J (now '^'^) is still seen in the pass. ptc. Qal, ""va {gdluy, cf. 71t3P), and in some pausal forms ; e.g. VOn they seek refuge (c ^^\>). The original 1 of "^^ ^'^) is seen in the words \>y^ {shdlew) at ease, HJPK^ {shalwa) ease C^vK^ / was at ease, i s. pf. Qal, in Job 3. 26). ^ Probably to be regarded as a rare form of the 3rd sing. fern. pf. 2 Hiph. 33D. 144 § 44- LAMEDH HE (LAMEDH WAW AND YODH) VERBS. 1. The letter n, appropriate (as = «) in the 3rd s. m. pf. Qal, came to be regarded as part of the root, and con- sequently (just like the b of b^p) appears in a// (3rd s. m.) perfects, imperfects, participles (except pass.- Qal, e.o-. ^172), and absolute infinitives. The vowel preceding n frequently differs, in a way diffi- cult to account for, from that of the corresponding part of the regular verb : the respective endings are as follows : (a) n^ in a/l perfects, e.^: nj^a, nhi:, n^a, nban, &c. (b) \, in all imperfects, e.J-Jnbi\, nba;., nbf, n^:!, &c. (c) n in all participles (exc. pass. Qal) absolute; e.£: ' n^2 (/ ni)3), n^J3, n^ip, n^jn, &c. Ptc. cstr. is in n ; e.£: *y'i, &c. (d) n in all imperatives ; e.£: n^2, n^a, n^^n, Sic. (e) Inf. abs. has the ordinary vowel of the regular vb. ; Qal n!?3, Hiph. r]hiri, (f) Inf cstr. adds the fem. ending n (cf § 33. 2 b), making the termination ni ; ^.^. Qal rii^a, Pi. nib, Hiph. ni^in. The ordinary form of the 3rd s. fem. >^^7^^j ^^?^^.y &c., has in reality a double fem. termination. 2. When the third radical (ie. the ultimate ••) is not final but stands under inflection : ._ (i) Before vocalic afiformatives, 1, "•-_, or n^, the j/od//, coming between two vowels (e.g: vtpp,, ^7,? S^^Y^^ disappears and is dropped ; thus v.3. It is also dropped before suffixes ; e.g. (from nay) ""aay he answered me^ ^'^'^V . . . him (always the form \r\ with pf ), Day . . . them^ Q.^P.^i. he will anszver them, ^i^i?")'! and lie saw him (n^n). (2) At the end of a syllable {i.e. before a consonantal afiformative ; e.g. Niph. '''iipPp^, waa) the yodh, preceded as it always is by a, creates primarily, as we have seen, by strict analogy, the combination ay. (a) This ay most naturally becomes the diphthongal e, § 2. 2. I. Thus ^ri;^aa becomes ^n\^aa. This e prevails exclusively in perff. pass., i.e. Niph. Pu. fn^b) and Hoph.; (b) but in the other parts it also appears as /, which in § 44- LAMEDH HE (LAMEDH WAW AND YODH) VERBS. I45 perf. Qal is found exclusively, and in other perfif. alternatively with e, as Qal ri^^3 ; Pi. rf}} and rT'^a ; (c) before n: of imperf.and imper. it becomes /(s^ghol fairly regarded as pure long ; cf. § 3. 2. 2 b), as nj\73, nr^jn. 3. Of the few vbs. ending in waw, nn^j^ (inr) is found very frequently, usually in the Hithpa'lel (pptpPJ?*?) to bow down, prostrate oneself. The pf. would be strictly Tl.'T'.^T''!' {wew), then (as all pfs. end in n^) "^^n^^**'? (§ 26. 3 a. ii.), impf. ^)^^^'\ pi' ''^D^r. (^e/;/). Apoc. impf. sing. (§ 45. i) strictly ^nriK'^. But, as it is characteristic of final (consonantal) w to pass into the unaccented homogeneous (vocalic) ?/, this becomes innK'^ (not ^, perhaps because the n was felt to be virtually doubled). 4. In pf. with ivaw consec. the accent is nbt usually thrown forward : e.^. n-'OT, not n^b'V'l ajidthou shalt make ; cf. § 38. i. 6. «2>t-t:' t'|t: ' 'J nM to be r\r\v) to drink mi to rule ntry to do r^^t^ Hiph. to give drink, nD3 Hiph, to smite r\y^ to acquire water nas f. corner njD to count rs'yn to conceive i^iiN (with article nsn to weep rh)i to go up P">t5n)chest, ark nnD to blot out rhl to reveal, open l^."i'n the Jordan n33 to build nsi to see \y!ii cloud noD P/'. to cover ma to be fruitful |:y P/. to bring nan to increase niv P/. to command clouds Not before the inf. is rendered by ''^p^p with inf. cstr. ; e.g. He commanded the mian to eat ^bs!? tr"'Nn"n5< n^^v „ „ „ not to eat i'bs "•ri^n^ „ „ EXERCISE. TRANSLATE. -tn r)V^^ nin^ p^^^ ^^^t2}D o^^n^n-n^ rv ^- f- ^')}^\ i ^' ^1?!- impf Niph. nN*!;, apoc. 5<"|\ 2. The common verb ^''J} to be has some irregularities, which may be summarized thus : (i) The gutt., when initial, takes hat. s'^ghol. as imper. n>n. (2) With any prefixed letter the gutt., when without a vowel, takes simple sh^'wa, and the prefix hireq, as impf ^^''^J}^,. (3) Apocopated impf is primarily ''.J}\yihy. But, as it is characteristic of final (consonantal) y to pass into the accented homogeneous (vocalic) i, this becomes ''n''. fhiy with simple I4S § 45- APOCO. FORMS AND NOUNS OF VERBS LAM. HE. waw ''n''1, with waw consec. ^7'1 and it came to pass. See nouns of 2nd declension in this § (45. 3 b. i). The verb n^n to live has mostly the same peculiarities. a. Waw before the imp. sing, takes -^7- as ITin]) (not ^) and of course j< in ist sing, impf •^^.'7^'. The preform, letter always takes Methegh ; e.g, '^''T\^^^ etc. b. As the ultimate form of the vb. for to live is ''^n, which appears in the form of ""n (§ 43) as well as of n^n (§ 44, also p. 87, note 5), the plur. of "^n living is C^H (which also means life). 3. Nouns from Verbs r\"h- First and third declensions. abs. nppp !^.^P ^^^ VT ns; fern, ns; cstr. i^.^pP nijp n^y nn'K^ ^??' ns^ suff. I "ipp "Dp '^? n^ 3 ^' 5in5pp ''^.^P ^n^V •• T 3/ nSipp i?3P ?^y n'lb^ //. D^3pD • : • n-^p D^i>y nn'b^ d^d; nia; cstr. ''3PP ".^P ^'^i^ n'nb' '??'. niD^_ (possession ) (possessor) (leaf) (field) (fair) (fair) Second declension. A class. I class. U class. abs. sing, ''"!^f 0^?) '12 n_Q ••ns '■^n "hn \r\x\ pause » '"7? ni '^1 7(^ ^ suff. 3 m. 0^10 ina Vvn <^\n plur. D^nx D^na and ^4? cstr. ').vp \n? D-^ns i^.^^n I //. (lion) (end) (kid) (fruit) (simple) (half) (sickness) (waste) a. First and third declensions. — (i) The vocalic sound at the end of these words is, in the absolute (cf. nji?P), the broad s'ghol^ which becomes the closer ^ere in the construct (n3pp). Comp. the relation of the impf. n^^". and imper. ^^53 in the verb. (2) The vocalic termination is absorbed in the vowel of the aflformative, e.g. '^pp — the n of n^pp has disappeared. So nj;h shepherd, 'V"^ my shepherd; ns;, D^d;, &c. (3) a. The final e sound naturally admits the suffixes huy 45- APOCO. FORMS AND NOUNS OF VERBS LAM. HE. 1 49 &c., of 3 pers. — the original form of this suffix (| 19. i) ; :f. suffix to impf of vbs. (§ 3 i. 2 b). In 3 m. s. ^n__ is found jxclusively {e.g. ^nppp, not i^i^p) ; in 3 f. usually n.. (cf. suffix [to impf. of vbs.), e.g. ^hv ; rarely n^ {e.g. nib). /3. Forms like T'.^pp thy cattle, 1^"'ff^ our field., are probably not plur. but sing, written with the original •» of the root, seen, e.g.., in '•l^, the poetic form of Hlb'. b. Second declension. — (i) a. Nouns of the regular forma- tion, e.g. '"133 weeping, ^y) murmui'ing (like ^^^), are rare. As a rule the fundamental •« or 1 appears. It is characteristic, as we have seen (§45. 2. 3), of final (consonantal) j/ to pass into accented (vocalic) /, which has the effect of reducing the preceding vowel to sh^'wa ; and of final (consonantal) w to pass into unaccented (vocalic) u (§ 44. 3). Thus an original ^12 pary (from nis = na to be fruitful) becomes ^19 p'ri (in pause ""ll with the accent on the orig. syllable) ; an orig. ^vn hig! (from nvn = '•vn to divide) becomes ''VH (A ^VH, the orig. i becomes tone-long e) ; an orig. vn holy or vH (from rhn = "isn to be sick) becomes 'bn Jfli {p, ^i?n). /8. Nouns ending in 1 are few. An original ^.^i? would become ^Vp (ist syll. open and accented, therefore d\ not found, but cf. ^nb^ swiimfiing), cstr. pi. ^.IVi? (Hke ^??^) in which the waw resumes its primary consonantal power. So an orig. tohw or tuhw becomes tohii, ^nn. (2) When any afformative or suffix is appended, the vowel as in other segholates removes to the first syllable ; e.g. the a in nns (an alternative word for '''>.^5) lion\ S'^'^^his sickness (cf. it^^lP), holyo. In many nouns of the A class the a has been thinned to i (cf. vna, Vis) so that with suffixes they have all the appearance of I class nouns (cf. ^'^K^, "^^"op^ § 29. I b). (3) In the "pluY.yodh is sometimes softened into 'aleph before another yodh ; e.g. D^xns oftener than D^^riQ ; and in the cstr. the pretonic a many times remains ; e.g. ^.173. c. The short words T' ha7td, D"! blood, &c., which follow in their T ' T ' ' inflection \.h% first declension, and the words 13 son, ^^ name, &c., which follow the third, appear to be contractions of forms derived from stems n'^S The words 3K father, ns brother, fern, ni^^5 I50 § 45- APOCO. FORMS AND NOUNS OF VERBS LAM. HE. siste?% ^'^ father-in-law ^ &c., are also shortened forms belonging to this class of stems ; in which, however, the rejected letter gener- ally appears under inflection, e.g. sing. cstr. ""^J^, 2 m. "^"'^^5, 3 m. ^n^3« or V3t?, 3 f. n''5x, &c. See Table of Irreg. Nouns, p. 153. 4. Our reciprocal pronouns are expressed in Hebrew more concretely by nouns, man, woma?i, brother, sister, friend, &c. ; e.g. and they spake to one another '^'^TT^^ ^^^ ^'^T^''\ and they smote one another V^^5■n^5 K^'"'N 13*1 and they (f.) clave to one another nniriNl nB'X njpnini 5. Our reflexive pronouns are rendered chiefly in two ways : (i.) by the Niph. or Hithp. of the verb. ; e.g. they hid themselves ^"'^pJ, they girded themselves 'ii?^^'^ ; (ii.) by nouns, such as ^/ heart, ^7.1?. inward part, CJ^QJ soul ; e.g. And he said to himself ^2?~^^ "^P^*5, And she laughed within herself HB-ipzi \>n'm\ He has sworn by himself it^a^B yz^:. I rm^_ work -Jy affliction nn (nnnp/) strife ^Ql beauty "^P^P covering D^^n Hittites nyn friend nvn shepherd i:h Luz li?^ / well •^?")P appearance n^n to be sick n»n (rare) water- "•^ti' 2 captivity njj^ (rare) iV^//^. to skin, bottle . ^ butler be gathered 5*in, riNvin, &c. (3) i^"^ and l''y.— Ki3 ^o come, perf. «3, ^l^?|, &c., impf. )^\T^, inf., imp. t"a.— nn^ to cast, shoot, imp. HT, inf. nn\ Hiph. rriin /, 1, |, are often allied in meaning. Thus : XV\, pV to advise, "IJ^, -i:iJ to fear, 3^;, 3V3 /^ place, HQJ, n^Q /^ ^/^^e/, HDy, DVJ /^ b; (5^ ^^/^, inf. abs. bb;, inf. cons. nJjD";, impf. fj^V (regarded by some, less probably, as impf. Hoph.). (6) fjp^ to add, perf., part., in Qal ; Hiph. Pj^pin in perf., impf. (tl^pi\ Plpi*5), and inf. cstr. ^"'pin. An imp. ISp, Is. 29. i, Jer. 7. 21. (7) rP' to awake, only impf. Ti?^' in Qal ; Hiph. Pi??}, perf., impf., imp., infin., from y\^. (8) P^3 /^ /<2//, perf., inf. abs., part., in Qal ; impf., inf. cons, from Niph. (9) ^'A to draw near, impf., imp., inf. cons, in Qal, but perf. and part, borrowed from Niph., which has only these two parts. (10) nn3 to lead, perf., imper. in Qal; impf. and inf. cons, in Hiph., which has also perf. twice. (11) Vi?J be alienated, perf., 3/ nVi?3, Ez. 23. 18, impf. 3/ Vpri, Jer. 6. 8, from yp*. (12) "jno to pour (intr.), only impf. '^^ in Qal, in Niph. "n^li, perf. and part. (13) \\TW to drink, in Qal, but Hiph. ^ij^n to give to drink,{rom npC^ (the Qal of which is not used in Hebrew). §45. IRREGULAR NOUNS. I 53 TABLE OF SOME COMMON IRREG. NOUNS.^ 'y^ father, cstr. ^;^«, my /. ^n^5, thy f. ^"'3^«, his f. in^5« or VnN, her f. ^^3^:, your f. D3^3X, their f. Dn^3S, &c. ; plur. ni3s», their/. Dnux (rarer and late E^n'^nUN). nx brotJier\ in the sing, like ^^5 — cstr. ""nx, ;;y/ b. Ti^, ^2/;- ^. ^r^^{,J^^//r b. 2^^^^5, &c. P/^/r. DTik (with dagh. f. implicituvi) — but cstr. ^nx, my b. ''ns (pause ''ns, p. 43, note 3), his b. I'^n^*, ^^^r b. li'nx, j^^^/r /^. D^'n^f, &c. on husband's father, like HK, ninx ^/j-/-^-;', r^/r. ninx, ^^^^ ^ni^^5, &c.; //. (abs. ni^nx not found), vi\\i\i suff. vn^nx,' D.Tnsn^i, but also V^^ins, rii»n husbands mother (not found in pi.), like ninx. riE'i;? woman, wife (probably for i^^'^^^). The primary ^*^*?^ (fern. /) would give first riE^5<, then ^*^'J<, which naturally becomes riK^'s (cf. "i2p, § 29. i a. a). This is, in point of fact, the cstr. form, hence my w. ''^^5?, &c.; //. D^tJ'J I, r.y/r. ^5i^^ noN I maid, pi. nin'^s i, j^//: -nTOS?. ri''3 2 house, cstr. ri^3, ^/. D'ri3 (not bottim, but probably bdttim, or ^<7//;;/ ; in latter case dagh. would be lene — irregularly : on any view the ^ is unchangeable, and is usually marked by methegh, probably to keep it from being mistaken for 0^, cstr. ^ri3. |3 3 son, cstr. '% rarely "I? ; suff. '^, ^r^, &c. ; pi. D^J? i, cstr. "33, suff. "^2, &c. n? 2 daughter, my d. 'ri3 (for 'rij3, &c.) ; //. niizi i. Di^ 2 day (contracted from yawm or yauni), pi. Q''p; (for 'V) ; ^^/r. ^^'•^, cf. § 4 1. 5. (The plur. of ^\ sea is W.) ••^3 vessel, suff. ^'^^3 ; pi. D^^3, ^.y/r. ''.^f suff. \i'3. ' Q'»//. zc/^/^r, cstr. 'g, ^J?^!?, j^//! ^o"!?, T^'^, &c. (redupl. form always before suff.). HB ;;^^2////, cstr. 'B, my m. "s, 1^3, vs and 'in^i, rfi, Dn^Q, &c., like 3S ; pL nrs. tJ'N-i 2 head, pi. D''t:'5<1, rj^r. ''trN-). (§ 41. 5.) 1 The numbers indicate the declensions. 154 §45- IRREGULAR NOUNS. ti^ name, suff. 'Pf , 1^^, &c. PL nictT, cstr. rmi;. nonay; cattle, though hardly irregular, should be carefully noted : cstr. npns ; thy c, l^^'^f his c. inonn (jl, niona, cstr. nion? : rare and poetic). r\2^ to take captive ^^^._ alas ! 1J3 garment ••ntrK only used in cstr. plu. (from "^^^ or ■>^^5 ?), the happi- nesses of; used practically as a kind of interjection : happy (is, are, 8ic.) ! "iDy to trouble nVQ to open (mouth) nriQ to open rnxDny; glory rrjDyy; (est?-, (nncpy) crown ni?^ to be complete, ended ; Pi. VtJ'" Ifiph. to deliver V'^P wherefore? to finish nn^K Uriah nti to despise yip to tear, rend EXERCISE. TRANSLATE. •• : A"T T : •• • : • t v tt-:i— • t t— D'':pt n-^n:ir 3 : i^tr^ h:2^^ ^b^ mm-S^^ ^id 'ti^^^d '^:Di«i • '•• : V V -: '^ T - : v • • • t • x : :TTn^n ^it2)v "^"^m 4 :Dn'ii« d"^:-i n^i^sn^ a"":! •^^si '••r . v ' *"• " r "' '" . ''•"■ ' '' •" •■•• m:i7 in ^5? njr T)^ "I'^y?^^ nt^Vn c^n; ; the s^pdiXvow findeth a house '"'^■fj?. This usage is particularly common when general truths are expressed negatively ; e.g. He does 710 evil to his neighbour ^T\ inV'^i' nb'V'Ni' {i.e, never did). (2) In the case of the actions or conditions expressed by stative verbs, § 22. What the language seizes upon in this case is not the fact that the condition expressed by the verb is one that continues, but rather the fact that it is a con- dition that has come into complete existence and realization, and hence the perf. is made use of to express it ; but as, in point of fact, the condition continues, it is usually best rendered by the English present (§ 22. 6) ; as, I know W"!^ that thou wilt be king ; / hate ''0^?.?^ all workers of iniquity ; so, / remember, "'Jiil^r ; ^ri'pn / take refuge, '•^npb' / rejoice, &c. To this class belongs the verb to be when it is, as it is not usually, expressed ; eg. Thy servants are 7to spies Vn"X? QvsnD. (3) A lively imagination is very apt to conceive things which are really future, especially if their occurrence be certain, as already done, and to describe them in the perf. This happens often in making promises or threats, and in the language of contracts ; as, The field give I thee ••rinj ; And if not, I will take it ^7\r\^^, This usage is very common in the elevated language of the Prophets, whose faith and imagination so vividly project before them the event or scene which they predict that it appears already realized. It is part of the purpose of God, and therefore, ^ Gen. 43. 9. In a very similar sentence (Gen. 42. yj) the impf. ^3{<"'DN is used. The sense is practically the same, but the point of view is different : the perfect contemplates the case assumed after its occurrence. PERFECT, IMPERFECT, AND PARTICIPLE. I5 the clear eyes of the prophet, already as good as accomplished (^prophetic perfect) ; e.g. ""Jsy npa my people is gone into captivity (i.e. shall assuredly go). II. The Impei'fect. — The impf. expresses an action con- ceived as entei'ing upon^ or going 07t towards^ accomplish- ment. 1. (i) If the imperfect is used to describe a single (as opposed to a repeated) action in the past, it differs from the perfect in being more vivid and pictorial. The pf expresses the fact^ the impf. adds colour and movement by sug- gesting \\\^ process preliminary to its completion, and is thus often best rendered by our graphic historical present ; e.g. Jael np'j'n nT puts forth her hand to the pin — you see her in the act ; nnpc^" would simply have stated the fact. (Con- trast this with 3j3^ 7D3 Sisera/^//, he lay) In prose this use of the impf is only common after TX then, Q^? not yet ^ '^"?.9? before ; e.g. "T'^J TN then he sang {i.e. proceeded to sing). (2) A single action in the present time may similarly be expressed by the impf ; e.g. the man asked him, What seekest thou ? t^i5?ri-np. 2. The kind of progression or imperfection and unfinished condition of the action may consist in its frequent repeti- tion-, (i) Either in the present; as. It is said to this day, nOK'; (Niph.), Take of all food which is (regularly, custom- arily) eaten, ?3^?\ This usage is very common in com- parisons and in the statement of general truths founded in the nature of things ; as, A wise son maketh a glad father r\'m^\ ; As a (Heb. the) dog (habitually) laps 3^3n pV "IK^*K3 {\h, impf of \>\h, % 42). Or (2) In the past ; as. And so ke did regularly, year by year njK^a nj^ nb'y^ |31. This usage is of very frequent occurrence, A mist used to go up TO! INI j We remember (note the pf) the fish (collective, />;;^.) which we used to eat 73^'r"^t^'^? nj^n-ni< =iJ"13T; The manna came down regularly I'jn 1"i'' ; Moses spoke repeatedly (kept speak- ing) and God repeatedly answered him C]''Wni "lai"" rwr:^ M'lT^ (the tenses imply a colloquy). This is known as the frequentative imperfect. 3. The imperf is used for the expression of the future — that which is conceived as entering upon accomplishment : 15^ §46. PERFECT, IMPERFECT, AND PARTICIPLE. (i) This may be a future from the point of view of the real present ; as, Now shalt thou see what I will do '^^{-ln nny nb'ys nr«; We will burn thy house 'lTu"3 ^n'-s. Or (2) It may be a future from any other point of view assumed ', as, He took his son that was to reign ^^\ in his stead. 4. The usage in 3. (2) may be taken as the transition to a common use of the impf. in which it serves for the ex- pression of that class of dependent actions and those shades of relation among acts and thoughts, for which we rather use the conditional moods (esp. the potential). Such actions are strictly future in reference to the assumed point of relation, and the simple impf sufficiently expresses them. For ex., Of every tree of the garden thou may est eat ^'^'^'^ ; Could we (were we to) know V'l^'i, that he would say ""P^^^ ; How shall (how can) we sing Yahwelis song in a foreign land ? i^J ^'^. 5. (a) On the same ground the impf follows particles expressing transition, purpose, result, and the like, as, 1^67 in order that |3 lest, &c. ; eg. Say thou art my sister, that it may be well with me v ^P"*! iVP? ; Let us deal wisely with the nation, lest it multiplies •^^iri??. The actions introduced by such particles are strictly consequent and future to something just stated. (b) When, however, there is a strong feeling of purpose, or when it is meant to be strongly marked, then, of course, the moods are employed, § 23. 6; eg. Raise me up that I may requite them Dn^ i^'?f'^^?}. ^^P''pn (cohort.) ; Who will entice Ahab that he may go up? hvl\ ^xriwS-nNl nnp\ 'D (juss.); What shall we do that the sea may be calm ? pJn^:"! rizmrry'o Djn. The moods are also employed to express that class of future actions which we express in the Optative, &c. : May I die nniDX (coh.) ; May Yahweh establish his word Di?; iin^-nx nvT* (juss.) ; May the soul of this child 7'eturn ^J"^^'^ ^)J^ ^^.*0 ^'?; {tdshobh, shortened before «?, § 10. 3, from 3b^ri, juss.). (c) It must be remembered that the perf. and impf. are entirely distinct in meaning, and that the one is never used for the other or to express the same conception of an act with the other. But it may readily happen that two distinct conceptions may be enter- §46. PERFECT, IMPERFECT, AND PARTICIPLE. 1 59 tained of an action, which may thus be expressed either in the perf. or impf. Any general truths e.g.^ may be conceived on the one side as a thing completed, having been many times realized, and this conception of it would be expressed in Xh^perf. (I. 2. i) ; or it may be conceived on the other side as a thing unfinished, ever re- peating itself; and to express this view of it, the vnpf. would be used (II. 2. i). E.g. the grass inithereth might be either 5^^^ or KQ''^j the former calling attention rather to the fact, the latter to the frequency. III. The consecutive forms have the same variety of use as the simple forms, the consec. impf. corresponding to the simple perf., and the consec. perf to the simple impf E.g., the perf of general truths, like the ordinary historical pf , is followed by luaw consec. impf. ; e.g. "^^.^ I^V n?3 the cloud is consumed and departs (pausal impf of ^T\). Similarly the impf, in its frequentative as in its future sense, is followed by waw consec. pf. ; e.g. '^'P^J}\ ^T_ ^^ a mist used to go up and water (the ground). IV. The Participle. — i. The participle represents an action or condition in its unbroken continuity, and corre- sponds to the English auxiliary to be with the pres. ptc. — / am, waSy shall be doing \ e.g. 3tr* Nin Jie was sitting (not simply lie sat). It may be used of present, past, or future time : (i.) pres., DTO oris no what are you doing ? (ii.) past, e.g., T^n np the child is dead', (\\l) fut., Dip^n-DN «n3S w^nn^r^ T^)}] we are destroying, i.e. are about to destroy, this place (Hiph. nncO- The ptc. in this (fut.) sense is frequently introduced by r\ir\ behold \ e.g., ""ia D^'^p 'J^n Behold, I am about to raise up a nation. 2. The ptc. differs thus from the impf.: ptc. suggests continuity, impf succession. " The impf. multiplies an action, the participle prolongs it " (Driver). The ptc. is a line, the impf a succession of points. E.g. Q^"!3pp D^p^n 7t5"nn3 the heavens are unceasingly declaring the glory of God (ptc); but -TOX rn^ Dvb Di^ (one) ^^.y pours forth (Hiph. J?33) speech to (another) day. 3. It must be carefully noted that the Hebrew participle cannot be used as the equivalent of the EngHsh past ptc. or the Greek aor. (or pf ) ptc. For dcfjivres irdvra rjKo\ov6rj(rav avra, having left all they followed him, Hebrew says, {and) they left all and we?it after him, vn^^< 5i3^n i>3n-nK larrv l6o §46. PERFECT, IMPERFECT, AND PARTICIPLE. ny-i to pasture, shepherd na/. morsel (i suff. ^riQ) HK^ a sheep (a goat) yi") to lie (stretched out) iny flock, herd pnp (pn ip) outside (§ 14. 2 b) ^ {j>tc?) poor j;!** to know, regard, care for nK^33/". ewe-lamb i\^v^ to draw (water) njnD camp Dis/. cup n»T to destro '• Niph. to be undone nn^ together D&<3 utt*:- :< --.0 (always in cstr?) EXERCISE. TRANSLATE. • T ^ T I - • I •• T - ••. V V IT ; V : Tv^v^ y'^^vi^ ntr^n tr-i^ 4 : Tfir^s r^n^n^^ I'^pt^ nnS a"^pb^ i-T:^n^ nti? «i2?:^ n^rr b^nn ^i^-!i-L vn«7 Ti'^iiir n^n nv*^ 5 V •• T I" V ►^ "*" • ' ~: It t I - • T : ' : : - tt v -^ I .. TT . . . . . _ . . . . . ; T-: I- • TT : . . . .... - .,_ :_ t't V -: ^-r-^: - - T : . •iT^nrTi nstrn ip^ni^ nnt!)n iD:)n^S'^y»'p insrri *i^n^ v:-i : - T : • ' •• : v : • • ' ^^ s ' •' • • At : - t t jn^D« "^tr^b^ nmn nb^t 9 : Q^n^iJvJ ''P^'- ^"'^'^ "^^^"^ ■nt^ '^nn:: mn^-nt^:: ann D^^^n nn^^ S^-itr^^ n^rnt^ The more the enemy oppressed them, the more they in- creased. He used to take the tent and pitch it outside the camp. It is not wont to be done so in our land. Yahweh shall assuredly destroy the work of thy hands. If I perish, I perish. Then Moses and the children of Israel sang this song unto their God. Whosoever shall harden his heart and transgress my law shall be put to death. The earth standeth for ever. I counsel thee, let all thy people be gathered together. They found maidens coming out to draw water. All this I give thee, if thou wilt fall down and prostrate thyself before me. A righteous man careth for the life of his beast. Evermore Yahweh supports all who fall. While he was yet speaking one of his servants came and said. We are undone — all of us. ^ §47- THE ADJECTIVE. COMPARISON. l6l § 47. THE ADJECTIVE. COMPARISON. 1. Comparative Degree. — (a) The adjective undergoes no change of termination or vocah'zation in comparison. The comparative degree is expressed by the positive followed by the prep. |p, as, Better than wine, T^p ^it2, lit. good away- from, or in distinction from, zvine ; Sweeter than honey, pinn ^*?1P. (Cf. the modern Greek construction of (xtto — with the accus. — after a comparative ; eg. KaXklrepo^; diro tou? aWov^; better than the others^ So '^?"^'!} ^'^P "i?? the matter is too hard for thee. iP is similarly used with verbs : '^^p '''!1J^? / will be greater than thou, C^^^Dnn ^bp ^ri^bp / am less than (i.e. too insignificant for, unworthy of) all the mercies, &c. (b) The correlative comparative (e.g. the greater — the tess) is expressed by the simple adjective with the article ; e.g. the greater tuminary {oiXwO)), ?"I2n "liN^H ; her younger son^ ipi^L' i^^?- 2. Superlative Degree. — (a) The superlative is also ex- pressed by the positive raised into a position of isolation, as, for example, by having the Art. prefixed, or by being dis- tinguished by a suffix, or by being in the Gen. relation, as He is the greatest,, ^'i'ljn N^n, lit. the great one (among those referred to), 1^J3 |bp the youngest of his sons {his youngest son)^ D3pp"ni?'i upSlip from the greatest of them to the least of them. (b) Absolute superlativeness is expressed variously, as by the word "i^*^ very, exceedingly pj

^ his eldest son ^'^3.1 \ri his youngest daughter napjpn ins * Unlike other 3rd class nouns of the 2nd declension, § 29, JJ^Hp holi- ness and VJ'yp a root, form their plural not \> and ^ but Q''tJ^'T[i^ {qodha- shim, not qa) and Q^K^"]^ {sho) — also written "\>^, {q") and "f?, like gutturals (D''K^nn). II 1 62 §47. THE ADJECTIVE. COMPARISON. 2p\> Hiph. to give attention ty strong jsrp dwelling-place (//. ni) D3K^ shoulder (j^//: i^fe^) Dliy cunning '"^tV* beast, animal i^^V?" (^i^? with n^ loc.) upwards ns; (/ ns;) fair si'n fat ^b*f to be bereaved : Pi. to ^^^1 gain, property Q'Ji^ east make childless ^^T\ (later ^JX'J^J Daniel EXERCISE. rvy\ mTO piTO-nn 2 : "^nn^j? ^?!)^ n"it5-b^^ '^^ •'trp? np niiD 4 : npi;,! n-ir^tpp ^^p ]i^? ^i-iijrti) rwrr^ nn^ 3 : ""^l^p ^J? ... • T- TX - |T T T • - T T : - X : • • t: . V-:.- . .. ..... ...»:-: . ., . . ; - XT It tx:.~|. .x;.— : And the serpent was more cunning than all the beasts {sing.) of the field which God had made. He has slain men more righteous than he. Thou art wiser than Daniel. A living dog is better than a dead lion. And that man was greater than all the children of (the) East. And he loved Joseph more than all his sons, for a son of old age (was) he to him. And he lifted up his eyes and saw his brother, the son of his mother, and he said, Is this your youngest brother, whom ye mentioned (said) to me? And he had two daughters, and the younger was fairer than the elder. The greatest (men) of the city. There was not left to him except the youngest of his sons. And their gain was too much for dwelling together, and the land was not able to bear them. ^ Inf. cstr. here practically = noun : obedience^ attention. Usually, in this construction, without h (cf here VbC^), sometimes with p (cf. Tu^pnp). In the statement " it is better to dwell in the corner of the housetop," &c., which occurs twice, Prov. 25. 24 has 031^ 2iD, 21. 9 has r)3tf6 3itD. i §48. THE NUMERALS. 1 63 4 § 48. THE NUMERALS. I. T/ie Cardinal Nufnbers. — (i) The numeral one^ inx m., nn5^"i3K^ 30) except twenty, Q''"i^y, which is the plur. of ten, "ib^y, there being a distinct word for hundred, nsp. The tens end in im alike with masc. and fem. nouns. (5) The numerals 2—10, which are nouns, stand most commonly in the cstr. state before the word which they enu- merate ; see above, (2), (3); they may be used in apposition with their word, and then they stand either before or — chiefly in later style — after it ; ^.g.five sons, D^;)^ ri^n or D^?? nK^on or T\mn D^:zi. The other numerals, viz. those from 1 1 to 164 § 48. THE NUMERALS. 19 and the tens, are used only in apposition with their word, and stand chiefly before, though sometimes after, it ; e.g. fifteen sons, 0^33 ib^y ne^pn. (6) The units require the noun enumerated in the plural ; e.g. D''3^' yL*'n nine years ; the tens usually take the noun in the singular when they stand before it, always in the plur. when after it (Gen. 32. i 5 f ). The numbers 1 1 to 19 usually take the plur. except with a few common nouns like Dr day, J^JK^ year, ^^'<^ man, ^^^ (soul) person, &c., and collectives, e.g. 19 cities O'V/), "^l^T^^^ °''1V 5 but 19 men, T T T : • (7) In numbers composed of tens and units such as 23, the order may be three and twenty, nj^ u^'Wp^ D^n*^ sixty-two years, but also twenty and three, njK^ ti^p^l D''lb'y, and some- times the noun is repeated with both, as three years and twenty year (by 6) ; as nj^ D''V?^1 °''??^ ^^J} seventy -five years ; or again, D''?^ V^tJ^i. nj^ Q''"i^V twenty-seven years. With the Masculine. With the Feminine. Absol. Cstr. Absol. Cstr. I ^9^ nnx nriNt nriK 2 d;:k^ ^}y) C3)6^ ^riB^* 3 T : r\^^^ C'fe \ih^ 4 nys-ii^ nyS-is J73")X ys-is* 5 nc^pn ntj'pn mn K'bn 6 nw nc^l^ w K'K^* 7 nnc^ nyn^ ^?? J^?f 8 T : n^bc^ n3bB^ : : 9 nyK'n nvK^n yc^n VK^n 10 n-iK'y "T?^: V V ""5^? II 12 1 -iK^y \3B^ 13 "ib'V r\^v} nib^y t^•V 14 nb'jj nynix nnb'y yalx &c. "' &c. § 48. THE NUMERALS. 165 20 Q^K^y 50 Q^^'pn 60 D'^^ 70 Q''V??^ 80 D'3bf 90 DWri 100 200 300 1,000 2,000 3,000 10,000 20,000 T\'^'Ofem.^ cstr. T\^'0^plur. Hi&^p hundreds. Dinxn dual (for ^l^n^i?p). niK^ sj'V, 400 niiSD y^-js, &c. ^.^^ masc. D^a^N nsj'i?K^, 4,000 D^Bb^? nynnt?, &c. r nnn-i ^/. regular, nuni. t^ini //. nislm and nu-i (later forms). (8) The word ^^?p hundred may be used either in the cstr. or <2^^. in the sing. — most often in abs. : e.g. H^K^ nsp"|3 {son of, i.e.) « hundred years old (also I^^^P) ; in du. and ^/z/r. only in absol. The word P]?X thousand is used in the rj/r. also, though rarely, even in th^piur. {^ph^). (9) The du. fein. of the num. is used to express repetition, D)fiy2^ seven times, sevenfold. A few take suffixes ^^"'^^ ive two, DnC^^C^ they three, &c. {sh'loshtam). 2. 7'/?^ Ordinal Numbers. — The Ordinal numbers from I to 10 are adjectives, and construed in the ordinary way. Beyond 10 the Cardinal numbers are used also as Ordinals. The Ordinals are these : First "^■^^^^Jeni. njic^j^-i sixth '^m second '^^: „ n^3t^ seventh >j;^3B^ third '^'bf „ n;— eighth >j>nK^ fourth t;i „ &c. ninth ''V'^^n fifth 'i^^m or '^pn » tenth ';(h n:^ vrjm ^^p^"^ ; or nnb^y r\p^ n^^B 3. Fractions may be expressed by feminine forms of the ordinals ; e.g. JT'^vt^* a third ; in a few cases also by segholate forms ; e.g. Vnn and y?h a fourth, mn a fifth ; a half'xs '^p, § 45. 3 b. i a. 1 66 §48. THE NUMERALS. ry/ she-goat ; //. D^V ^?a camel ; //. D'^^a (§43.4) iO^ imprisonment ypn to break through 2i<^ to draw (water) "i?fn court (noun) 1)1 generation (//. d"' and oftener m) EXERCISE. TRANSLATE. a^^n:^^ Dntr':^; d^S^^^i D^nt^r^ d^^v vn^h nmrs np^'i 2 n::tr' nib^n-tr'mT nn^n ^n^i 3 JD^'tr^tr' on^n^ nwD J vib^n ntri^ trih^ ai^ n^^wv^ ny^2,m ^::tz?n trih-i r^'n'? I V T T T : It V - •:•••: t : • : ... - •.• - t - : : ^^5 n^it2 nn^n^ ly^o tr^-^-n^ ^n-i *^^^ t^ti?^ xiiirh^ ^^^nJl D^n-nbjip'll n^^n ri^nn^i D^^-^njrr nu?7tp ^i^p5ii 5 V - . :• TT : V . T • T •• X,- -: v • :,t:' His five brothers and three sisters went with him to the house of their father. The queen reigned sixty-four years and died aged eighty-two : she had four sons and five daughters ; her husband died in the forty-second year of her life and the twenty- fourth of her reign. And there were born unto him three sorts and seven daughters, and his substance was six thousand sheep, and four thousand camels, and seven hundred asses. The days of the years of my life have been four and seventy years. There were a hundred and twenty-seven cities in his land, and in one of those cities there were a hundred and twenty thousand people. The half is better than the whole. And one said to the other, Let the two of us swear in the name of our God ; so they sware, the two of them. ^ Di^ unexpressed. § 49- PARTICLES. 1 6/ § 49. PARTICLES. 1. The particles are mostly nouns, either entire or oftener disintegrated, though some are proper interjectional or de- monstrative expressions. Being nouns they must be considered, when in relation, to be in the construct state, and the word following them (or, as we say, governed by them) in the Genitive. The case in which, being nouns, they must also stand, will vary according to many circumstances ; but as the language does not mark the case endings, this is of less consequence at first. 2. (i) Some particles are so much worn down and feeble that they cannot stand in the sentence alone, but require the support of a noun or pronoun, to which they prefix themselves ; while again others, as the precative particle fc^J, are inseparable affixes. The punctuation of the important prepositional fragments 3, D, h, p, and of the conjunction \ has already been given, §§ 14, 15. (2) Another important inseparable prefix is the inter- rogative particle n, the pointing of whi^h varies : (a) Its usual pointing is Vt, as "^^J}. is this ? (b) Before simple sh^wa it is n, as tDyon is it little ? occasionally followed by Dagh. forte \ otherwise it is not infrequently marked by Methegh. (c) Before Gutturals (except when they have ^ or ^.) it is also pointed n, often marked by MethegJi^ as '^}^r\ shall I go f (d) Before Gutt. with ^ or ^, it is n, as pjnjj whether it be strong ? 3. Suffixes to Particles. — a. The pronominal suffixes to the particles will be found on the following pages : ? and 3 (p. 51), P (p. 53),-^?, ^V, -iV (p. 70), 3 (p. %7),r^^ ace. (p. 75), DK prep., oy and r^^r} (p. 142), ^', (p. i 30), pJ:? (p. 136). b. Notice the fondness of particles for a in suffixes, where nouns have e, eg. 2 f. s. and I //., ^^, 1^^. 4. Adverbs. — (a) In addition to the adverbs already met with in the course of the book may be mentioned the I 68 § 49. PARTICLES. following : ""i^, ^*^^, r^r^i^ where ? (with suff. ^^s^5 whej-e art thou ? S"^ where is he ? DJN). . njD-^N, J\\p whence ? n:N whither ? 7]"^!, na-x /^^ze; f how / ' " (b) Some advbs. directly connected with nouns end in D^, which may have been an old accus. ending; e.g. D^^^ ^y day^ Dp''^ in vain or (zvith) empty {Jiands)^ Djn for nothing or i7t vain (from in grace). In some words this a has passed into ^ (§ 2. 2. i); e.g. DNHQ suddenly, Db^?^* the day before yesterday {three days ago, from t^^TiJ' tJiree). (c) The noun ^''30 circuit is mostly used as advb. and preposition, round oBout {eg. ^^^Vr' ^^?9 '^'''T' Yahweh is round about his people). As a preposition it always takes the plur. form, sometimes masc, eg. 'T'?''?^ round about thee^ more often fem. T'nu^ap. 5. (a) Conjunctions. — D5< if\ S)^ ^7-; ix . . . ix or DJ< . . . DX whether ...or\ C3 also ; DS . . . D5 both . . . and] ^^ Q3 . . . ^^ Da neither . . . nor. (b) ^2// is frequently expressed by waw ; e.g. But of the tree thou mayst not eat, ?'2^T\ N? rJ^n"ip\ A stronger but is DP1&5. But after a negative is D^? ''3 ; eg. He walks not in the counsel of the wicked, but ifi the law of Yahweh is his delight, "ivsn nin^ n-iinn dn ^3. (c) i. Questions, direct and indirect, are usually introduced by the particle n ; disjunctive questions — {whether) . . . or — by D^« . . . n ; 'e.g. i^nv^' DK nnt< ^:hr\^ {whether) art thou for us or for our enemies f ii. ¥ or final clauses, see § 23. 6 (cf. § 46. II. 5 a). ^ iV^p may also be used with ittf cstr. ; e.g, p.^n ^^-^3 rm_ |yD> that all the peoples of the earth 7nay know, (d) In oaths, ^^ = certainly 7iot, and Nv ^)^ = certainly ) e.g. ^)J} in-nn-nyi n*K^i)?^-QS / shall asstiredly not do this thing. (The idiom is readily explained on the assumption of an ellipse; e.g. ''cursed be I, if I do this thing.") i>P r\'^,J}l DN certainly there shall not be dew. nbqii) n;nn '^ X'^:^'^ '^'^"^ surely the land shall be to thee for an inheritatice. We may trace the origin of this usage in the fuller form of sentence which occasionally occurs; e.g. fl^pi^ x\y^^^ D\'i!»K h'T^^T nb HN-jn N3V~it** n!?*dn so shall God do to me and more also (lit § 49- PARTICLES. 1 69 and so shaU he add) if tJioii do not become captain of the host {i.e. I swear that thou shalt become). (e) Some prepositions become conjunctions by the addi- tion of '^i:'^? ; e.g. "i^'« '^nj^ (cf. apres que). 6. Interjectiojis ns, nns aJi ! *ix woe ! ""in ah, alas, ha ! DH (even pi. -'Sn. as if on were imper.) hush ! i^i''. ""P (who will give ? = ) 6^ that ! would that ! e.g. ^0^^ i^l ""P zvould that I had died, ^^''f^ far be it I — lit. adprofamnn ! n loc. (as an ex- clamation ; but also in construction, thus nin^'n^^ 2tj;D ^h rbhn far be it from us that we should foi'sake YahweJi). "inv (G^/) Hiph. to entreat mn to flee i^iNC^" Saul \Mr\ to moan, muse, meditate fiy guilt, punishment HV^ to be weary, faint (§ 39. 2. 2 a) ^r weary, faint Vi^, WJ to toil, grow weary (§ 39. 2. 2 a) EXERCISE. TRANSLATE. nr5« nil iji'^n 3 : ^'^'^v t^i"' r^^ 2 : Tfn^^n if^b^ n^b^ ^n^nyn 5 : ontrp:?!^ D^^D^hn Q^'trjbi^n did' nt^j ^nirjrr: 'iT V -: T • I- V • ' • : • T • T : '-IT : ' t inp^^-D« nin-'-^n n^^S mn^i ^"i^ti> rh irati^^^ 9 jin^ L L ■^ob^^^ "jTnT':^^ ^iyr\'^ rw^r^ -^r^b^m v^r\ nmn ]iir And he said to her, My daughter, wilt thou go with this man, or wilt thou stay with me ? and she said, Alas, my father, I cannot stay with thee. Whither shall I flee from ^ We may assume an ellipse oi shall I drink ? ' Beth pretii, at the cost (here risk) of. ^ mp with suflf. I/O §49. PARTICLES. thy presence ? Art thou my son or not ? O that we had died by the hand of our God in the land of Babylon, when we sat and wept by the waters thereof. I have sworn in mine anger — ye shall not enter into my rest. This book of the law shall not depart out of thy mouth, but thou shalt meditate therein day and night, in order that thou thyself mayst observe to do according to all that is written therein, and that thou mayst speak of it to thy children after thee, when thou sittest in thine house and when thou walkest by the way. God nevef grows faint or weary : if ye believe in him, how can ye say, My way is hidden from my God? for he remembereth that we are dust, and ever- more he giveth strength to the weary who put their trust in him. VOCABULARY. ENGLISH AND HEBREW. A. Abigail, fj^^nK. Abimelech, Tj!36''2X. able, be, b; ;/>?/// i)3V,§ 39. Abraham, Dn"|2K. Abram, D"J3K. abundance, pDH i.i according to, 3, prep, acquire, to, r\^p. add, to, f\Ol^ per/, and pfc. in Qa/; other parts in I/tJ>/i. See §39- adversary, "iV 2. § 43. advise. See counsel, afflict, to, n^y, Fi.; affliction, ''jy 2. §45- after, behind, inx, nnx ; nns after me, &c. See p. 70. afterwards, "inx, |3"''']nN. again, iSv ; and she again bore n^ril eiDn^_, &c. See p. 1 29 (still), aged, vb. and adj. JipT; old age, alas ! nnx, m. all, ^3 2. ■§ 43. allow, to, jriJ, ace. and /;?/ alone, 13|? 2. § 43. See nn in Lex. / a/o?ie, ^-^Jp ^3^{, &c. also. Da ; both . . . and alsOj DJ1 ... Da. altar, narp. See sacrifice, among, amongst (midst), and, 1, § 15 ; both . . . and, 1 ... I (also), angel, messenger, ?|Kbp i. anger, fin (c]3X) ; suff. '•SN. § 43. 4. angry, be, P]Vi^ ; mn, used im- pers. : he was angry, )b mn. anoint, to, m*D; Messiah, n'^^D i. another, "^^^? ; one another . . . EJ^^i^ vns. See p. 150. any (all) ; not any, none, hb . . . iib. § 13- 4- appear, to, JV/p/i. of see. appearance, riNiD. § 45. approach, to (draw near), arise, to. Dip. § 40. ark, riDD {e firm), ark (of covenant), |iiN, with art. arm, Vi"iT,/ (generally); pi. zm, 6th. army, i>^n, § 41 (force). arrow, |^n 2. § 43. as, like 3 (see p. 87); as, when '^tJ^'^?^. ^ The figures i, 2, 3 after nouns indicate the Declensions. 172 VOCABULARY. ascend, to (go up). ashamed, be, C^is. § 40. ashes, jtin 2. /. aside, turn, to, IID. § 40. ask, to, b^t\ § 36. ass, he-ass, "liDn ; she-ass, |int? i. assemble, Sip, I^tp/i. (gather). assembly, niy i, i^yjD, hr\\). atone, to, ")S3, Pi. § 26. i^; pass. /^2^. ; for ?y. avenge, to, DpJ ; iV/)>/^. be avenged, avenge oneself, awake, to, f*p^ perf. not in use ; impf. X\>:^\\ pe^f- ri?'!}» •^^>'^- of pp. B. Baal, hv^ 2. bad, Vl I. § 43- bank, r\rkf I (lip). bark, to, nnj. be, to, n;n. § 45. bear a, l-^ 2. § 43. bear, to, carry, ^m (lift up). bear, to, bring forth, "h"^ § 39 J be born, Niph. ; beget, Hiph. ; a boy, n^; 2 ; girl, Hib^ 2 ; kindred, JTibiD, § 29. 3. beast, n>n (cattle), beauty, '•a'; 2, § 45 (fair), bed, ntSD (stretch) ; 33C>p i (lie), befall, to, n-jp ; N^ij, § 38. i. 5. before (face), beget, to (bear), begin, to, \hn, Hiph. (^m) ; pass. Hoph. ; beginning n^Jfin. beguile, to, V^m, Hiph. behind (after). behold, 7\l7\y |n 2, § 43 ; behold I{me),^m', behold we {us\ !i3pn. See p. 142, note i. Very often followed by the participle. believe, to, pS, Hiph. ; b of pers. belly, jina i ; 1^3 2. /. (womb). beneath, instead of, nnri 2 ; plur. suff. ^rinn, &c., rarely sing, ex- cept Dnnn, § 36. 2. bereaved, be, pbti', st. beside, i^VS, — ;;/^, 'hi\^, § 34. 4 b. Bethel, ^NrT'B. between, pH 2, § 41 ; between me and thee, "^^31 '•^3 ; between me and you DD^p^^^ — . beware, to, Niph. of /^^^/. beyond (region b.), other side, bind', to, saddle, ^2r\ ; -|p^?. bird, fowl, ^\)3 2 ; liBV, pi. D''")BV- bitter, to be, '\ip,st.,impf.'-\)p'', § 42; bitter, "id i, § 43- bless, to, 1"I3, Pi. ', pass. /'w. § 36 ; blessed, !]n3 ; blessing, nsin i. blind, "i)iy 3. blood, DT I ; pi. blood shed ; with heavy suff. D30'n. blot out, to, destroy, nriD ; pass. Niph. boil, to, cook, b^2, Pi. bone, D>*y 2.f.] pi. hn and (5/^ book, ")E)D 2. bosom, p^n 2. § 41. both, D':tr (two) ; with suff. both oj us, we both, 5|3''iK', &c. § 48. i- 9. bottle, npn 2. bow, a, nc'p 2./ bow down, to, yi3 ; trans. Z^/]^A. boy (bear). VOCABULARY. 173 read, Dn? 2. road, be, nrn, st. ; broad, 3n"i i : breadth, 3nn 2. See p. 120. break, to, '^y\y ; pass. JVipk. ; broken, "inco ; b. in pieces, Pi. break down, to, pQ. reak, to (of day), n^y ; daybreak, *in|^ 2. reath, nCK-'J i. brightness, nj5 2. bring, to, Hiph, of ^f?;;/^. bring down, to, Hiph. of ^^ ^(^z«;;?, &c. bring out, to, Hiph. oi go out. bring up, to, Hiph. of go up. bring up, to = to rear, 713, Pi. brook, bn^ 2. brother, ns. See p. 153. buck, he-goat, ti^^ri 2. § 41. build, to, ms. § 44. burn, to, t|ib^ ; pass. W?)>/?!. / with fire, K'Ka. burnt-offering, nijiy. bury, to, "inij; pass. TW)!'/^. ; grave, "inp 2. /. ; nninp grave, burial, but, ^3 ; DX •'3, Db^X. § 49. 5 b. butler, butlership, r\'p6'^. § 45. buy, to, acquire, n^p (possess), buy corn, to, "13K^. by (of cause), jp. §§ 14, 15- by (beside), ^y, p. 70. calamity, 'T'X 2. § 41. calf, ijjy 2 ; / rh^. § 35. call, to, cry, i^ip, ^«/. ; he called him Ada??t, DIN* ii? ^«-|p; y^^ called his name Adam, "nx S"ip DIX \ov) ; he was called Adam, DIJ^ h K-)pJ. § 43- 5- captain, nb> (prince), capture, to (a city), 13^. carcase (corpse), care, take, to, Niph. of keep. cast, to, throw, ^"^^ Hiph. ; pass. Hoph. § 27. 2. cast lots, to. See fall, cattle, ncnzi i ; cstr. s. 'n3 ; cstr. pi. 'n3. See p. 154. cave, rr\V^, i, d firm, cease, to, Hn, st.; he ceased speak- ing, nsnb fj^n. cedar, pX 2. Chaldees, D'''nb>3. chamber, lin 2. m. change, to, 9^n, Pi. cheek, ^n^ 2. § 45. cherub, 3113. child, n^.''. 2 ; h)\]3 i ; i'.^iy 3 ; children of Israel, i'X'ib''; '•JS (son), choose, to, "in3 ; ace, 3. city, -i^v 2.////. any,' p. 153. clean, be, to, inp, ^/. ; clean, "lino I. cleave, to, p3"n, st. ; to, 3. clothe oneself, to, put on, wear, K^3^, St., ace. ; clothe (another) with — , Hiph. , two accus. §27.1^. cloud, 155; I. cold, adj., lp I, § 43 ; noun, "ip 2. colt, "i^y 2. § 41. come to, come in, enter, go in, Ki3; bring, Hiph.-, pass. Hoph.\ entrance, ^\yQ i. comfort, to, DHJ, /*/.; pass. Pu. 174 VOCABULARY command, to, niv Pi.\ pass. Pu.; a command, mvp i. commit, to, entrust (oversee), compassion, to have, Dm Pi. (pity). § 36. conceal, to (hide). conceive, nin ; impf. 2> ^-f- with waw cons. inni. § 45. i. 3. confide, to, trust, np3 ; in, 2. contend, to, n''"i. § 40. continually, T'pri. corn, |3"n i, "sy^ 2. corpse, carcase, rh'l} i. - corrupt, to, nnK^, Hiph. {Pi.); pass. Niph. counsel, to, advise, J*i?\ impf. X)t\\ deliberate, Niph., Hithp.\ counsel, nvv i. § 39. count, to, number, "iDD • n3D. ' ' ' - T ' T T §44- count, to, impute, reckon, nK^"n. country, the (field). court, a, ivn i. <:., pi. 2/« and oth. covenant, a, n''"i3,/.; to make a covenant — nij (cut) ; establish., fulfil a — , — D^pn (arise). cover, to, HDD, Pi.\ pass. Pu.\ a covering, riDDp. § 45. cow, n"|Q (ox). create, to, N")n ; pass. Niph. creep, to, b^Di, i77ipf. in ; creep- ing things, bDi 2, ^^//. cross, to, pass over, by, "iiy ; Hiph., bring over, make go through, &c. ; a crossing, ford, nnyo i. T -: - cry, to (call). cry out, to, pyy, pyj; a cry, r\\m i. cultivate, to (serve), cunning, D^"iy i. curse, a, ban, Din 2. curse, to, "il.S ; hh\>, Pi. cut down, to, cut off, cut, niS ; pass. Niph. Daniel, ^xn ; later h^'^}/\. darknesss, Tjt^n 2. dash in pieces, W'\, Pi.; pass. T'w. daughter, nn 2. /.; wj ^., ^ri3, &c.; plur. ni:s I. See p. 153. David, nn, n^n. dawn, daybreak, "in|^ 2. day, DV 2, § 41. 5; pi. D-'p;, ^p\ See p. 153. death, ni6, §41 (die). Deborah, rr\m ( = bee), deceive, to (beguile), declare, to (tell), (hear), (count), deep, be, pbjr,^/.; deep, adj. p'OV i. See § 43- 4- deliberate, to (counsel), delight in, to, j^sn, st. ; impf. I^an^, in pause, }*2in\ delight, pleasure, |*Dn 2. § 35 ; delighting in, adj. |*Dn i. deliver, to, h)i^ Hiph. ; pass. Niph. depart, to, "i^D. § 40. descend, to, liV § 39. desert, wilderness, pasture, I3")p i . desire, to, npn ; impf. nbn^, pass. Niph. ; J*an, St. desolation, nsin 2. despise, to, i^^p; to be despised, h?.{Qai). "' destroy, to, nnc^, Hiph. {Pi.); VOCABULARY. 175 pass. Niph. ; "'\'0'€\ Hiph. pass. Hoph. (blot out). dew, i^D. die, to, n^iD ; to kill, Hiph,, Po'L (nniD) ; pass. Hoph. ; dead, np ptc. ; death, niD 2. § 41. disease, sickness, 711 2. § 45. displeased, ?]VT i. divide, to, ^13, ZT^/^. ; pass. iVz^/^. do, to (make). dog, 3^3 2. door, n^'i 2. /. dove, n3i\ /, pi. zw. draw near, to, approach, aip, st. ; Hiph. bring near, offer, pre- sent; ^^^, perf. used in Niph., impf. in (2^/. See § 33. Hiph. bring near; near, 'iT\\> i. dream, to, D^n; /w//. D^i^n^; a dream, Dii'n, plur. ^//^. drink, to, nn^ ; to give to drink, water, r\p^, Hiph.\ feast, nriK'p, § 45 ; a butler, cupbearer, njp^'O, § 45 ; cupbearer's office, same. drive out, to, VJ^\ Pi., pass. iV^)^^. drunk, be, "13K^ 5/. ; strong drink, ■|3C^ I. dry,' be, B^?;, x/., § 39 ; nin ; dry land, n^'n^ i. dumb, D^^5 3. dust, nsy I. T T dwell, to, n^*;, § 39 ; |3^, m// in (p. 80); Hiph., to place; tabernacle |3K^b, pi. ^//^ {tni). E. eagle, "»K^3 2. /. ear, jTi^, 2./, <^i^. ; give ear, hear- ken, pTXH, Hiph., denom. (hear), earth, land, pN 2. / earthquake, t^'f\ (shake), east, D"|i?; ^« the east of — eat, to, ^3N*, § 35 ; give to eat, Hiph. ; meat, food (bi< 2), nb^K 2, baxo I. Eden, rjy. edge, ns, z«;zV/^ the edge of the sword nnn ^SX See p. 153. eggs, D''V^3 2, pi./ §41-4- Egypt, DnvD / ; Egyptian, n^D, fem. n^-— . § 16. 4. I. Ehud, n^nx. elder, |pr i (aged) ; elder, comp. = greater (great). § 47. i b. Elijah, -K^h^ (nj^N). Elisha, yc^^bf^. embrace, to, p3n. Pi. empty, pi (p-"!). end, ^p 2, § 43; latter end, nnns,/ end, be ended, Dri, 5/., § 42 ; n73, § 44; to finish, complete, Hiph. on, Z'/'. nijD; perfect, nn I, D''»n i. T ' • T « enemy, 2"'i< 3 ; enmity n3"'^t 2. enter, to, 5 nS every, bb ; every day, Qr-i'l) (all) ; they went every man to his house, inu^ C^^x I3^n (§ 13. 4). evil, adj. \n i, § 43 ; evil, n. yn^ ny") 2, §43; jjN* 2, § 41. except, D^? ^3. extinguished, be, "Tjy'n, j/. eye, i;y 2./, § 41, du. D^^y ; //. niry, fountains (§ 41. 5). Ezra, tn I. fling, to (cast), flock, jN^f 2 ; "iny 2. flood (of Noah), b^2'Q. foe, I'^k (enemy), food, nbx (eat), fool, ^35 I ; ^^IvS ; folly, rh)^ 2. foot, f5J-i 2./ * for, conj. ""S. force, forces, army, p^n 2, § 41^ also wealth, valour, ford, a, -I3yp. ford, to (to cross), forget, to, rati} ; pass. Niph. fork, J^Tp 3 ; pi. T\\:h]'0. form, to, 1>*;, § 39 ; /w^yi ; with waw cotis. 1V^»1. forsake, to, 3]y (leave), four, § 48 ; fourth, § 48. 2. fowl (bird). VOCABULARY. 177 friend, nyn. § 45^ frog, y^"]3V 3. § 30. from, out of, prep, p, § 14. 2, § 15. 2. fruit, to bear, be fruitful, nns ; fruit, na 2, § 45. 3 b. full, be, xfe, j/. / of, ace. ; be filled wi't/i, Niph., ace. ; to fill (a thing with). Ft., two ace, § 38. 3b; fulness, N^jp; full, adj. vho. G. gain, to (property), K^3n; gain, property, E^'oi. garden, |a 2. § 43. garment, nj3 2. /., suff. n32, &c. (not "!!). n^JDC* 2 and noSb' 2 ' T : • T : - (by transposition), gate, -lyl' 2. gather, to, f)pN, § 34 ; Y2p{Qar),Pt.; assemble, gather themselves, and pass. Niph. of both vbs. gazelle (beauty), ''3V 2. /. § 45. 3. genealogies, history, nrff\T\, pi. / (bear), generation, nn 2, § 41, pi. {tm) oth. Gentiles, D^ia. ""ia nation. Gideon, {iyna. girl (bear), (lad), give, to, inj, § 33; dat gift(s), coll. |riD I. glad, be (joyful), glorify, to, 133, P/. (be heavy); glory, 1133 I. go, to, !]^ri, § 39 ; walk, Hithp. §26.33. go down, nnj, § 39 ; Hiph. bring down ; pass. Hoph. 12 go in, Ni3, § 40 ; bring in, Hiph., pass. Hoph. ; followed by 3, ^X, ace. go out, NV;, §§ 38, 39 ; bring out, Hiph. ; pass. Hoph. ; o/p, out- going, exit KViD I, § 38. go up, r6v ; bring up, Hiph. ; an ascent, nhvJp, § 45. let go, to, rhf, Pi. God, D"'n1)N, //. (sing, in poetry niijl^) ; with insep. prepp. 'x^, &c*'(§ 15. I b), but 'nd. gold, 3nj I. good, be, pleasing, agreeable, 3itD, /^r/^ / impf. 3P"'"' ; do good to, do right, Hiph. ; well, very, 3^D"'n, inf. abs. § 39. good, adj. 3iD; good things, goods, goodness, 3^D 2, the best (of), 3D^p (only in cstr.) i. govern, to, rule, over, ijB^^, 3 (king). grass, NKH 2 ; 3K^i; 2 ; to sprout (of young grass), J^^^'in, ^^^ denom. grave (bury). great, be, grow, ^13, 5/. ; bring up (a child), PL ; magnify, Hiph. {Pi.) ; — oneself, Hifhp. ; great, i^ina i ; greatness, bia 2 ; great, ^1 ij § 43j P^- many. grey hairs, r\'y''^. groan, to, ^3^{, iV/)>/^. § 34. ground, noix i. grow, of grass (grass), (sprout). grow up (be great). guilty, be, Dti^'s, st. ; suffer, be punished (as guilty), Niph,-, guilt, DIJ'K I, I'ly I. 17^ VOCABULARY. H. half, ^vn 2. § 45. 3. halt, to, be lame, vh^. hand, T i. /, § id> \ your — hang up, to, V\>\ Hiph.) ri?in. happen, to (befall). hard, be, r\^\>^ ; harden, Hiph. ; hard, severe, n^p 1 (heavy). hate, to, N^^, § ' 38 ; hatred, nwb' 2. head, K'Ni, § 41. 5, pi. D^K^^n. heal, NS"! ; pass. Mpk. hear, hearken, obey, V^^ ', make be heard, declare, Hiph. (ear) ; rumour, report, VO^ 2. heart, 33^ i, qS 2, § 43 (pi. oth in both), heaven, heavens, D)0^' i, pi. heavy, be, ^3^, ^A ; make heavy, harden (honour, glorify), Pi. \ heavy, 133 i. Hebrew, nny, fem. nnny, § 26. 4. 8. heifer, n^jy 2. help, to, -ITV; help, irv 2. §35. hero, mighty man, 1135. hide, to, "iDD, pass., reflex. Niph. ; act. Hiph. ; &?3n, pass., reflex. Niph., Hithp. ; act. Hiph. high, be, Dn ; lift up, Hiph. ; high, lofty, Dl \,ptc. hill, mountain, "in 2. § 43. history (genealogies), hither, here, adv. dS"!. Hittites, D''rin, nn-\:3. ho! ^1n. holy, be, trt|5, st. ; sanctify, /'/. ; — oneself, Hithp. ; holy, saint, {5ni|5 I ; holiness, vr<^ 2 ; holy place, sanctuary, t^np, K^jpo i. honey, c^bl 2. § 29. 2. horn, pp> 2./ horse, D^D 2 ; mare, ncmD, / host, army, time of service, N3V I, pi. ^7/^. §38. 2. hot, be, DPI, St. \ hot, Dn i, § 43 ; heat, Dh 2. house, n^l 2, § 41 ; home, nn^S ; pi. D>ri3, p. 153. how! nD,'§ 13. 3; •!]"•«. howl, to, hh", Hiph. § 39. 1. 4. hungry, be, ay"), j-/.; hungry, 1T\ ; hunger, famine, 3^1 i. hunt, to, n^iV ; venison, n]^. husband (man). if, D^5. ill (evil). image, xhi 2. imagination, IV"' 2 (form). impute, to, reckon, 3K^n. in, prep. 3, § 14 ; into, 3, i)SI. increase, to {intr.\ n3i. inhabit, to, 3K>"^, § 39. 2. 2 ^ ; in- habitant, 2^\ inherit, to, tnj, § 39. 2. 2 a, dis- possess, Hiph. ; br\2, give to in^ herit, Hiph. ; inheritance, Tvni. iniquity, jlK 2, § 41 (evil, guilt). innocent, ^pj (very rarely i<'p^). inside, midst, heart, 3"ip, 2. /. ; within the city, "i^yn 'p3 ; within me, ^3ip3 (midst). instead of, nn§ (beneath), p. 121. Israel, h^'\'^. VOCABULARY. 179 Jeroboam, DV^IV Jerusalem, dW^"i^ (D^?^'i'^':)) P- 103. Jezebel, h^Viji. Jonathan, ]ny\T]\ |nji\ Jordan (the), n)"}*n. Joseph, f\D)\ Joshua, wSr]\ y^n\ journey, to, yp^; journey, VDp i. joyful, be, rejoice, &c., nob, s^. ; glad, joyful, J>U. ; gladness, joy, nriDb' 2 ; also ^^3, verb and noun, §§ 40, 41. Judah, nj,n\ judge, to, t2pf; to litigate, im- plead one another, JViJ>/i. ; a judge, pic. DSb^; judgment, DQEJ'/D I. T : • just, be, righteous, &c., p"iV, st. \ justify, Hiph. ; — oneself, Hithp.\ just, righteous, p"''n>'; righteousness, plV 2. /., nij"i>* i. K. keep, to, watch, -IC)^ ; keep one- self, take care, beware, Niph.; watchman, ptc. ipb^ ; watch, n^JJ'b I ; watch, charge, n"}5K^b, § 29. 3 a. ^^y> 0??P 3 (opei^)- kid, ^^a.■ § 45. kill, to, a-in ; Hiph. of die (n^»n). kindle, to^ burn {intr.) m\ ip"* {trans.) ; Z^>^ of r\T (n^^n), § 39- 3- king, be, rule, 1|^, over^ Py, 3; make one king, Hiph. ; pass. Hoph. ; a king, T|i?p 2 ; queen, nil^D 2 ; kingdom, n^^J^D, &c., § 29. 3 a. kiss, to, p^O, irnpf. in a (also ^) ; with h ; a kiss, Hi^n (rare). kneel, to, "rjna, j/. ; to make (a beast) kneel, Hiph. ; the other parts in sense of "bless "; knee, T]n2 2. /.,/ ^2^. § 29, p. loi. know, to, yT, § 39. 2 ; impf. VT, imp. yn, inf. cstr. ny^ ; pass. JViph. ; inform, make known, ^ Hiph. ; pass. Hoph. ; know- ledge, ny^ 2. lad, lyS 2 ; girl, damsel, / rny}_ 2. ladder, D^D. lady, mistress, n"]3a 2. /. See § 29. 3 b. lamp, "13. lance, noh 2. § 37. 2. land (earth). last, pins (after). law, instruction, n">in (teach) leaf, leafage, n^y i. § 45. 3. lean, to, rest, press, act. TjDD ; one- self, iV/>/^.; ]V^\Mph.; upon^hv- learn, to, nio^, st. ; make learn, teach, Fi., two ace. leave, to, abandon, 3Ty ; pass.iV^)^^. leave off, to, stop (cease). left (over), be, remain, "IXC^ ; to leave over, let remain, Hiph. \ pass. Niph. left (hand), ^y^ st, § 42 ; to curse,/*/.; lighten, Hiph.\ light, swift, bp I. § 43. like, prep. 3. § 14. See p. 87. Hon, nx 2, § 45; young lion, 1-23. lip, edge, shore, nab' \,du. § 17. Usten, to (hear), ^X^ 2. little, be, |bp, j/., § 22 ; little, jbij I, }Dp I, — the first form is not inflected (found only in abs., and once in cstr.), the second is inflected n3Dp D''3l3p. See § 43. 4. little, a, some, a few, t3V^ ; ^ /////^ water, food, &c. i)3k, D^O 'd ; a /^Z£/ people, 'd '•n?.: (also "•np napp). live, to, n^n, § 45; living, '•n (from root '•^n, see p. 87); Hfe, D^^n ; living creature, beast, njn. lofty, be, nnj, St. ; lofty, high, nhj i; loftiness, height, n3a 2. long, be, Tj^K, St. ; to prolong, -^//>^; long (?17K) only in cstr. I]"ifc5 (see p. 64), !|*"ix I, fem. naiX (see § 43. 4); length, T)^ 2. look, to, D3:, i7^>//. lord, |^^: i; takes pi. suff., ex- cept in ist pers. s., where it admits sing, also (prob. a later device to distinguish a human lord •'inx from the divine ^pH lot, ^-ii2 I, pi. otA. Lot, Di^. loud, ^ina (great). love, to, 2r\^,st., § 34; love, nnnjj: (strictly inf. cstr.). low, be, h^f, St.; low, W; to bring low, Bipk. of ^Sti' or j;"i3. Luz, T^ij. M. magnify, to (be great). maid, nriD^ 2 ; nDjj i, pi. DinDN*, seep. 153. make, to, do, n'^V; pass. Niph.; to make one thing into another, ttvo accus.; work, deed, nbyp, § 45; ^^^ poet. ; a work, fjya, p. 120. male, "IDT i. man, husband, v}^^ ; man, man- kind, DIN. manner, 7]"}^ 2, t^aK'lp i. mantle, i^'-yp ; ni'iN*. § 29. 2. many, be, increase, nn"j; increase, \.o,2iQX.Hiph.; many, 2"i i. §43. mare (horse). matter (word). measure, to, Tie. § 42. VOCABULARY. I8l meat (eat). meditate, muse, n:r\. meet, to, mp, 5<"ij^ (infin. cstr. nK"lp); to meet him, insnip^, &c. melt, to, J10, and Niph. memory, memorial, 13T 2. mention, to, Hiph. of remember. merciful, to be. Dm, PL, ace. |3n ; mercy, loving-kindness, Hpn. messenger (angel). midst, Tjin I, § 41 ; within the house, n^zin Tjins (inside), mighty man (hero), minister, to, TiW, Pi. (serve). Miriam, Dprp. mischief, |iDS (rare), missile (send), mistress (lady). Moab, nxiD. ' T month, tJ^lh 2 (new), moon, n"i\ more (still), niy. morning, 1p*3 2. morsel, fragment, DQ 2. /./ § 43. Moses, n^. mother, DK 2. § 43. mountain (hill). mourn, to, "IQD ; i^ax, st. ; mourn- ing, nSlDD 3. mouth, edge, na. See p. 153. much, y\i. § 43 (many). N. naked, ir\% pi. D^'J^n'^y, see § 43. 4 ; nakedness, nnj; 2. name, n'^ 3, pi. niDt^^ narrate, to, "ISD, Pi. nation, ^13 (people). native land, H'l'^io 2 (bear). near, nnj^ i (draw near). neck, "IN^V I, sing. and//. new, K^in I. night, h'h 2, § 41, usually r!j>^| 2. no, not, \h direct ; ^N», with pro- hibitions, p. 83 ; no, none, I^Nt 2 (if with vb., vb. is in ptc), p. 136, footnote. north, jiav I. not to, ^Ph'^, inf., p. 145. now, nPiV. number, to, njD (count). nurse, T\\>}^\2 2. /. § 29. 3. oath, rmi'^ (swear). offer, to, Hiph. of 3")p, ^/"^zi; near. offering, \:r\}>', meat (/.^. blood- less)— nmp ; drink— •fjd: 2. /. ; burnt— n^'y. ointment, jDti^ 2. old (elder, aged). olive, nn 2. § 41. on, upon, 3, § 14. i ; ^V, p. 70- one, § 48; one — another, p. 150 (friend), (brother). only, pi, •]«. V open, to, nna ; pass. Niph. ; door, nna 2. /. ; key, nrisp 3 ; to open (of eyes), npa ; pass. Niph. ; open (of mouth), n^S. oppress, to, |*n^, njy, Pi- or, 1^^ ; DX, DSl in interrogative or indirectly intern sentences, — shall we go or shall we for- bear? h^T}} DS* (DXI)— "njp.ljn ; or no, or not, ^7 D{<, § 49- 5 c. l82 VOCABULARY. Other, -ins, pi. Dnnx. out, out of, 10. § 14. 2, § 15. 2. out at, in at, 1V3 (properly "in- terval," "distance "). See p. 96. outside, pn j to the outside^ nv^nn ; 071, at, the outside of the house, 7\\ih pnp, § 14. 2 b. over, upon, hv^ p. 70. overflow, to, overwhelm, 5|t2D*. oversee, to, visit, IpQ ; commit, entrust, Hiph. ; an overseer, TPQ I. ox, 13 2, § 43; 1)^, §41; COW, /^;72. ma. •^ T T P. pain, ^i)n 2, § 45- 3 ; 3^*3»- palace, !^D"'n i, pi. oth (once); cstr. ''^3\n. palm (hand), 5]3 2. § 43. pass by, I3y (cross), passover, npQ 2. pasture, I2ip (desert). path, a^in^ i. w., and nrn3,/ pay, to, D^tr, /•/. people, DV, 2. § 43. perfect, on i, § 43 ; D''pri i. See be ended, perish, to, n3K, § 35; destroy. Pi., Hiph. permit, to, jnj, ace. and inf. Pharaoh, n'iJiS. Philistines, D''nC'S>a. pit, prison, "lia 2, § 41 ; pi. 6th. pity, to, Dm, Pi., § 36 ; |3n, § 42. place, to, D^tr, Dib', n-tr, mr}{Hiph. of no) ; -^/>/r. of pK\ 6"^^ set, dwell, rest. place, a, Dip^ i ; pi. oth (arise). plague, V^} 2 ; nap. plain {noun), lowland, ^hp^. plant, to, rpj ; a plant, i;D3 2. /. play, to, sing, &c., nDT, Pi. plead with, to, y^, 3, Dj;, § 40. plough, to, Khn. plunder, to, Ttn (spoil), (take). §42. poor, p2\^, hi I. § 43- possess, to, n3)5, ti^i^; possessor, nyp ; possession, nppp, § 45. pot, "T'p ; pi. ^//^. pour out, TjSB^ (spill), powerful, Divy I. prayer, n^sri. precept, lips (oversee), presence, in p. of, "'ipp (face), p. 69. prey, nipfe (take), priest, inb 3. prince, "IK^ 2. § 43. prolong, to, Hiph. of Tj^K, <5^ promise, to, "ln^?, with /;?;?«. prophesy, to, X33, iV/>/^. {Hithp.) ; concerning, h, hv ', prophet, ^'?? I. prove,' to (try), Cjnv, |n3, nw, proverb, 7^D i. punished, be, (2^/, iV/>//. of DtJ'N, <^^ guilty. pursue, to, P)"}"!. put on, wear, C'n!?, ace. ; to clothe, dress with, Hiph., two ace, §27. I ^. §38. 3 b. put, to, place, set, pD. See place, put out, to (the hand), rh^. VOCABULARY. 183 queen, nsi'p 2. quiet, l^v^^. quiet, become, p^l't^', impf. 0. R. rain, "iD)p i ; rain, to, "i^D, ^^/^. ram, ^'^ 2. § 41. 2. ransom, 1Q3 2 (atone). read, to, i<"ip. rebel, revolt, to, V^Q ; against, 3. receive, to, n\)b. § 33. 3 b. redeem, to, ms, ^3X3 ; redemption, nns ; redeemer, f'Sb. refrain, to, prn, j/. (far). refresh, to, sustain, lyD. refuge (flee), (trust). regard, to, nr^, ^K (look). reign, to (king). rejoice, to (joyful, be). remember, to ; "I3T ; pass. Ntpk. ; call to remembrance, mention, Hipk. ; memory, IDT 2. remove, to, 11D, intrans. ; Hip/i. trans. rend, to, ynp. repent, to, Dn3, MpL Dm, § 36. report, ny^DK^ (hear). rescue, to (escape), (deliver). rest, to, n3K^ ; make cease, Hip/i. ; m3 ; give rest, JIiJ}/i. n^:n, dat. ; place, set, Zf^?))/^. n^3n ; resting- place, ni:», nmp, § 41 ; sab- bath, nnK^ I. restore, to (return). return, to, nitr; restore, Hiph., Fo'L; return, nnie'ri. reveal, to, nSa. review, to, 'ipQ (oversee). rib, side, y^V, / i ; pi. ^^/^ (tm). See p. 114. riches, b^n 2 (force) ; IK^y 2 ; rich, • T riddle, nTH. ride, to, 331, j/. ; to make ride, set on a horse, &c., Hiph.\ chariot, lyy 2. /,, nnaiD. righteous, be (just), rise, to, D^p. rise, to (of star, &c.), nnt. rise early, to, Hiph. DDK'. river, "rrj i, pi. oth and hn; IKI (mainly of iW'/^ and its branches), roll, to, ^l, Qal, Hiph. ; pass. JVipk. rule over, to (govern), rumour (report), run, to, p"i ; runner, post, pfc. yi I ; make run, bring hastily, Hiph. sabbath (rest). sacrifice, to, n3T; sacrifice, nnt 2. /. ; altar, n^Tp 3, pi. oth (offer, offering), saddle, to (bind), saint (holy), sake of, for, 113^3, — of me, nuj?3, ""^^JS. See -I3j;, hhl in Lex. salt, nfe 2. salvation (save). Samson, jiC'pB^. 1 84 VOCABULARY. Samuel, h^^m. sanctify, to (holy), sanctuary (holy), sand, 7in, 2. § 41. Sarah, mb'. ' TT satisfied, be, ynb*, st, with^ ace. ; to satisfy with, Hiph.^ two ace, § 38. 3 ; satisfied, ynb' i ; ful- ness, vy^ 2, vnb^ I. Saul, \m^. save, to, W\ Hiph. Tf\r\ ; pass. Niph., salvation, safety, i;^^'' 2 ; say, to, promise, "iDt?. § 35. spattered, be, p3 (impf.) ; to scatter, Hiph. ; pass. JVtp/i. sceptre, tribe, rod, D3EJ' 2. scribe, "IDD 3 (count), sea, d; 2, § 43, csfr. DJ, "D^, and D^ (only in f]lD-D;;). see, to, n^-i, §§ 44, 45; pass. JVtpk. ; show, let see, Hiph., two ace. ; seer, n^'i ; sight, aspect, face, nxnp. seed, VIT 2 (sow), seek, to, inquire at, \irr\ ; pass. Mph. seek, to, Vpl, Pi. sell, to, "I3D ; pass. Niph. send, to, nfe ; send away, loose. Pi. ; a missile, n^K^ 2. /. serpent, B'n3 i. serve, to, till, nay ; pass. Niph. ; enslave, Z^>/?!. ; servant, 13y 2 ; service, ITiby ; • to serve = minister (mainly in sacred things), mtr. Pi. set, to, |n3, D^b^ (Dib), n^C'; |^D, Zr/>^, /'^^V. (§ 40. 5); pass. Niph. (place), seven, seventh, § 48. shadow, ijV 2. § 43. shake, to, V:}T\ ; trans. Hiph. ; an earthquake, tT\_ 2. shave, to, rh^, Pi., Hithp. shed, to (spill). Sheol, the underworld, hSv^\^. shepherd, herdsman, nj;h (feed), shine, to, "lis. § 40. shore (lip), short, "»Vi? I. shoulder, D3*^ 2. /. shut, to, "lao ; pass. Niph. sick, be, to, ni>n : sickness, vn. side, end (n3"i^ or nsT ?), (once in sing. — Gen. 49. 13 — with sufif. ina-)^), du. D;n3T, cstr. ^r\3y_ (with dagh. /.). silent, be, D"!, st. {impf. D'l^), CTin, silver, CjOS 2. simple one, a, ""ns 2. § 45- 3 t> (3)- sin, to, b3— ^/^. (zV;^// jy^r), § 39- 3- sprout, to, npv ; make to sprout, Hiph.; sprout, branch, ntyi 2 i. (grass), staff, ^[50 3, pi. oth. stall, lair, fn^D 3 (lie down). stand, to, ipy; set up, Hiph., Q^ip. star, nais I. statute (command), ph 2, § 43, fern, njpn (precept), steal, to, 3:3, Qal and Fi. ; pass. Fu., Niph. ; thief, 3113_. still, yet, more, liy; see p. 136 (note); still alive, ^n Tij; (again), stone, |3J< 2. stranger, sojourner, 13 i, § 41 ; strange, foreign, ''■133 {nokhri). street, pn 2, pi. ^^/^ ; p^^ 2 ; 3rTl, /, pi. ^//^. strength (strong), stretch, to, nD3, also Hiph. (put out) ; a bed, ntsp. strip, to, LDK^S, i7z>^. strong, be, pm, st. ; f*DX, j/. ; strengthen, Fi. ; DVy, j/. ; strong, p^n, ry, D^ivy ; strength, prh and ni^m; T"y 2, § 43; nb 2. strive, to, plead, 3n, § 40 ; strife, plea, 3n 2, nTiio. suck, to, pr, § 39. I ; suckle, give suck, ZTzj^y^. ; nurse, ptc. Hiph., np3^p, see § 29. 3. suffer, to, punishment (be guilty) ; to suffer pain, 3K3, st. (pain), sun, tJ'pt^' 2. swarm, to, pC^, with ace. ; a swarm, pK^ 2. swear, to, j;3K^,^>^; oath, ny5i3^. sweat, nVT, ^ firm, sweet, be(phr3), ^/.; sweet, pino i, inflect, nj^^np. § 41. i b. sword, 3"in 2./. sycamores, WlDpl^. i86 VOCABULARY. tabernacle, \2p^ (dwell). tablet, mb m. ; pi. nh^h. take, to, rii^^ ; pass. Qa/, JVtp/i., § 33- 3 b, c; prey, plunder, ni ppD ; take (capture in war, &c.), 13(5; pass. Mpk. tall, nha (great). Cs^r. n33. tambourine, C|n 2. § 43. taste, to, DVD ; taste, sense, Dyp 2. teach, to, m^ zr/>/^., niin ; nni? (learn)/'/.; law, instruction, nnin. tell, to, IJi, Hiph,\ pass. Zr<9//^. (count), (say), (speak). temple, ij3\n (palace). tent, f^HiX 2 j pi. D^i^nj^ (but also, yi\\hprep. D^'i'njin). terrible, snij, Niph. ptc. of xn; (fear). testify, to,Tij;, Hiph.\ witness, nv. that, conj. ""i); in order that, jyD^, with /;?/?«. r^/r. (p. 168), or imperf. (p. 86); that is very often expressed by waw consec.^ e.g. after \'i;i, a«^ /V ^a;?/^ to pass. § 23. 3. then, of time, Ti<; //^% "h^, &c., p. 70. upon, h^_ ; siiff., p. 70. upright, 1^^^ I. upwards, nSpB. See hv in Lex. Ur, ->^K. V. vain, empty, pn, pn ; vanity, P"*"), valley, nypB 2, hr\\ 2, N^a 2. valour, ^^n 2 (force). § 41. vengeance, r\'0\>^ i (avenge). venison, n^V 2. § 41. very, ixp (prop- a noun). vine, |S3 2. vineyard, D"}3 2 ; vinedresser, °P 3- violence, wrong, DDH i. virgin, ni"in3. vision, nX"iD (see), visit, to (review), (oversee), voice, i^ip 2. vow, to, ">"T3 ; a vow, "1*13 2. w. walk, to, ZT///^/. of Tj^n. § 26. 3 b. wall, HDin. wander, to, wave, tremble, y^3 ; a wanderer, yj, //<:. war (fight), wash, to, XTr\ ; — clothes, D33, /V'. § 26. I a. waste, to, lay waste, DDK^, ^)J/^. waste away, to, pD, iV/)>/^. § 42. watch, to (keep), water, waters, DVp, pi. water, to {j\\>v}, Hiph.\ r\\>m used as causative of T\r\Z\ p. 1 5 2. way, manner, Ti^T 2. c. weak, h I. § 43. wealth, 7*n 2 (force). § 41. 2. wean, to, ^DH ; pass. Niph. weapon, "h^^ pi. D''^3, c. ^3. wear, to (put on), weary, be, P]r, ^Z. § 39; weary, weep, to, n33. §44, §45. I (i). weigh, to, 'ppK^, pass. Niph. well, "IK2 2./ west, D\ § 43. what, no. § 13. 3- whelp, 1^3 (lion). when, 3, 3 with inf. cstr. ; "iK'XS, ^3 with finite forms (p. in), when ? how long ? '•n^, 'd ny. whence, where, whither, p. 47. whether ?, ?, n, § 49. 2 ; D5?? (or), § 49. 5 c. who, which, "lL^'^?. § 13. 2. who? ^p. § 13. 3. whoever, whosoever, V.p. § 13. 3. i88 VOCABULARY. whole (all). why ? wherefore ? ns^ (vy^jp). wicked, ytT") I ; wickedness, nv^-) 2. T : wife (woman). wilderness (desert). willing, to be, nns. § 35. wind (spirit). wine, 1^^ 2. § 41. wing, border, extremity, «1J3 i. / du. (pi. of/i). wise, be, D3n, jA, impf. D3n''; wise, DDH I ; wisdom, no3n 2. wish, to, J^Qn, St. with, prep. Dy 2 ; nx 2. § 43. See suj^.f p. 142, note i ; with of instrument^ 3, § 14. i f. withdraw, to (be far), within (inside), (midst), witness, ly i, § 41 (testify), wolf, 3Kt 2, e firm. woman, HB^K. Seep. 153. womb, tt:3 2. /./ ; DHT 2. c. wood, timber (tree), word, thing, matter, ni"! i. work, to (make), wrestle, to, p3i5, Niph. write, to, 3113; pass. Niph. (count). Y. Yahweh (Jehovah), nin'' ; perhaps nin^; usually read '•JIX, p. 41. year, XXW i, pi. z/^z (^//^ poet); a yearling 'k^ "|3 ; 20 years old = son of 20 years, yoke, % 2. § 43. young, younger (little). § 47. i. youthy young man, 1^2, / niy^ ; time of youth, Dniyj. Zion, |i»Y. 1 VOCABULARY. HEBREW AND ENGLISH. 3X a father ; cstr. UX. See p. 153. nnx to perish (§ 35). — Impf. inN^ — Hiph. T'3i;^2k Abigail. jiUi^ m. poor. Tjte^aK Abimelech. pNI 2f.^ a stone. p3« Qal not in use.— Niph. p3N3 to wrestle. Dmnx Abraham. T T : " Dnnx Abram. D*TN I w., ;/z<2;z. T\'D1'^ 1 f.j the grou?id. jinx I w., /^r(^. — Takes suff. of plur. noun. See lord in Eng.- Hebr. With prefix ^i'^vh &c. ni^i^ 2f., a mantle. § 29. 3. 3ni< ^^ /^z'^. — Impf. nnx^ (i pers. alsonnw). §34f. nns «/^^ / i^nj^ Ehud. i^nx 2 »2., a tent; pi. O'lbriK (but D^^nXB is found). l)N 2 jn., vanity, wickedftess. § 41. Ii5< to be light, shine, (i"y) Perf. -)ii<. Hiph. i^NH ^^ give light. §40- "liX 2 m., light. § 41. liND I /«., a /?^^/, luminary ; pi. zw and ^//^, l^X Ur. TX adv. M^;?. |T^^ 2/, //^^ dTfzr. § 29. ns w., £z brother. See p. 153. nnx w., nn«/., <7«^. § 48. inx adv. afterward ; prep, ^^r, behind; oftener nnx. — '•inK ^Z^?* me &c., p. 70. inx adj., another ; pi. D^")^^?. nnn{^^Z£/ ? y?!^Z£; / l";^ 2 {nothing), there is not ; cstr. I-'X. Suff. p. 136, footnote. C;^{< m., a man. See p. 153. HE'K/, <3 woman. See p. 153. i)3N /^ ^«/ (s"d, § 35).— Hiph. i5"'3Xn / God. (Sing, nifjx used in poetry.) With prefix, DNn'^.sS? &c., § 14. I c, but 'j^D. injbx, r\h^ Elijah. M^'h^_ Elisha. 77 J< w., an idol D^X 3 adj., dumb. D{< adv. if; Di^ ■'3 except. DNI 2^, mother. § 43. |)p« ^d? befirm.—Y^Vi^\i. ppSH /^ believe^ H, i?. not? 2 /'./, //-?/;/// (contr. fr. T\)m). Suff. 'lnrp^{. |*ipx /^ ^f j/r^;/^ (st. § 23).— Pi. to 7nake stroftg. "IDN to say, to promise, intend. '§35. "l^JC, ^'^l!p^? speech, word (poeti- cal). '' "•:« pron. /. § 1 2. P)DK to gather. — Impf. flbi<% § 35. I b. — Niph. to assemble. fix 771., the nose, anger. — Du. D^QX the nostrils, face (C]3i^ to breathe, be angry). § 43. 4. 7VNI 2, used as prep, beside; beside ' me, ^^VN. § 34. 4 b. y^-ix >wr. § 48. T7K 2 »?., cedar. •»■)« 2 ;«., « lion. § 45. 3. TjlS 2 w., length. Y)^ 2 f, earth, la7id ; pi. 6'//i!. Tlfc< to curse. — Impf. "IN\ § 42. ^^2f.,fire. §43. "iK't? rel. pron. wJio, which. § 13. 2. "•nK^'j* cstr. the happinesses of {^ happy/). See p. 154. riK a particle placed before the definite ace, § 13. 7. Suff. § 20. 10. nx prep. with. Suff. p. 142, note i. riMX pron. //^^/^. § 1 2. |inx I /, ^ she-ass. 3 prep. />/, t?;/, a7)iong ; by of in- strument. § 14. I. "1N13 2 f, a well ; pi. 6?///. "1^3 2 /. ;w., a garment, cover i7ig. — Suff. in:33 (without dag. I.). 'in 2 /;^ (separation), lib apart, alo7ie ; I alone "•'nnij '•JN*. § 43. ?in Qal not in use. — Hiph. to separate, divide. — Niph. pass. n^nn i /, cattle, tame beasts; cstr. ncna, cstr. pi. niona. See P- 154. Xin to co7ne, go, go in i^')i, N^'X —Impf. «n\ — Hiph. S"'3n to bring. Hoph. pass. §§ 38, 40. "113 2 771., apit ; pi. oth. § 41. C^in to be ashamed (I'^y § 40). — Impf. ^\1\ nn toplu7ider, spoil (§ 42). — Impf. T "inzi /^ choose (§ 36) ; ^2. Qal not in use. Pi. t^•i5n /d? fc^na to cut, fashion, to create 7§38).-Niph./a^j. xn3 I 2A).fat. JTiin /, a covenant ; '1 nna to make a covena7it ; '2 D'^jpn /3 I m., flesh. ^^-2. to boil.—Y\. to boil, seethe. h^l to redeem. § 36. "133 to be strong, prevail (st. § 22). 1133 m., a hero, mighty man. n*J*3a, n"]i3a 2 /. /, /a^, mistress. § 29. 3 b. "•^la 2 w., ^ ^/^. § 45. 3. b^a /<9 <5^ great, to grow (st. § 22). *-— ^^ — Pi. to magnify, bring up (a child). — Hithp. to magnify one- self. 71*13 I adj., great, elder. liVna Gideon. ••ia m., a nation. PI. D^ia, cstr. \''ia //^^ gefitiles. y_ia /"^ ^/V, expire. § 37. i)nia I ;«., /f?/; pi. 6th. b''3 2 m.,joy. § 41. n73 /■i'n Daniel. njn see 3;n\ T^ 2 c, a way. Bn"n /D"'n I m., palace, temple. nian. See nai D"i5n adv. hither. !]i)n /^ ^^. — Impf. l^\ — Hiph. Tj^^in (see § 39. 2. 2 ^).— Hithp. "^J^Tp; to walk, go about. §26.3^. |n, nan adv. behold, lo! Suff. p. 142, note I. — Followed chiefly by the ptc. «^3D '':^n behold I {^Oy will) ^r/«^. TjQn /^ turn, to change into (§ 34). — Niph. Tjsnj /^5j. in 2 w., /^/7/, mountain. § 43. iin /^/^^.— Niph. N3n3 /^ ^/^f oneself; Hithp. id, § 34. VOCABULARY. 193 ti'an to bind, bi?id up^ saddle '(§ 34). ijn to keep a feast (§ 42). — Impf. an 2 w., rt/m^^ (hajj), p. 45, § 43- bin ^^ cease, leave off {si. § 22). K^nn I adj. ?z^Z£;. I5nn 2 w., nem^moon, mo7ith, § 35. Tin 2 w., 5«/^d^. § 41. X\m\f.,a wall Y\n 2 w., outside, street, field; pi. ^//^ nyinn to the outside. — h pnp o?i the outside of—. p]n to be strong (st. §§ 22, 34). pm I adj. strong. KDH to sin (§ 34).— Hiph. «^pnn to co7idemn as siiiful. j^ian 3 (ptc.) a sinner^ used in sing., but 5n m.,fat. xhn to be sick (§§ 34, 44 f.). — Impf. with waw cons. 7n*}. 13 "h^ 2 m., disease, sickness. § 45. T>T\ — Hiph. ^nn to begi?i (§ 42). — Hoph. bnin pass. D?n to dream (§ 34). Dibn ^/., (3! dream ; pi. nS5. § 45- I- nsin 2/, a reproach. ydn to think, reckon. — Impf. 'ydn\ and 'n^. § 34. 2 c. TjC'n 2 ;;/., darkness. nn zr^//5; D'^rin, nn-''p3 Hittites. 10 "inD /^ 3^ ^/^^ known. \V\n\ Jahweh. The vowels are those of ^jns /^r^. With prefix X\\r\'h (i. e. ''3''l&<^). See § 10. 5. XU^'?:^ Judah. ]T\y\\V Jonathan. Vyi^^\ VJ^^r\\ Joshua. DV 2 m.^ a day. See p. 153. nai^ /, a dove ; pi. tm. |n3i^ Jonathan. PIDV Joseph. np> see niD. il^ 2 w., wm^. § 41. ^3; to be able (§ 39).— Impf. ^DV. 1^^ /^ ^t?^r (V'Q § 39). — Impf. nS3;.._Hiph. to beget.— Pu. to be born. "^ 2 w., a boy. § 29. rrnp^ 2 /, « ^>/. JTlTlD 2/, kindred. % 29. 2. DJ 2 ;;z., j^rt!/ cstr. D^ except in fj^D-D^ Red sea. § 43. p3; to suck (^"D § 39).— Hiph. V^TVi to give suck ; hence ni53"'D 2 f.^ a nurse. § 29. 2. p]P^ Qal, and Hiph. Pippin, to add 0"D § 39. 4). PJV^ to be weary. — Impf. fiy^^. § 39- 2. 2 «. fiy^ I adj., weary. J*yj /^ advise^ counsel (§ 39). — impf. ^r^—Niph. |*5n3. nvy i/, counsel. HQ^^ I adj.,>?>. § 45. n:^; to go out (l"Q § 39).— Impf. NV"*; inf. cstr. Vm (for nsv). — Hiph. to bring out. t?ViD I w., «;^ outgoing. § 39. 38. JV^ Hiph. r^n to set, place. (§ 39- 3)- y^^ Hiph. r^n /^ spread (§ 39. 3). "IV"* to form (§ 39). 1V^ 2 m.^form, imagination. npj /^ ^wr;?.— Impf. nip^i, npi— Hoph. /aj-5. nj^in. § 39. 2. ^p"* Qal only in Impf. J'p^^ /). — Impf. IT &c. — Hiph. nnin /^ bring down. — Hoph./a5J. }"n-)»n the Jordan. VOCABULARY. 195 V2^'\\ Jemsalem. Seep. 103. ni'' I ;;z., the moon. !)-!'' I /, the thigh, side; cstr. T]")''. See p. 64. TOy or T\yv? See side in Eng. Hebr. 2 /., side, end. — Du. D^na-i^, cstr. ""na-i^ JJ'T /^ inherit (§ 39. 2). — Hiph. E^"''"lin /i? dispossess, destroy. Niph. /^^i". tJ'"' //^^r^ /j" — There is water U^'O '\ See p. 130, note 3. IV"" to sit, dwell, inhabit (§ 39. 2). — Impf. 2&. 2tJ'^ 3 ptc. inhabitant. it^S'O I m., a seat, assembly, dwelling-place. |C^*; to sleep (§ 39). — Impf. \^^\, j?^'"' Qal not in use. — Hiph. T^\n to save. — Niph. pass. § 39. 2. J?K^''_ 2 ;/?., salvation. r\ViW\ f; id. rv^w'x) /, id. 'W'' I adj., upright, righteous. "in^ 2 /., retmiant, rest. 3 prep. <2i-, ///^^. § 14. Suff. p. 87, note I. With rel. '^m'^ as, when. When he kept "l!OK^ "lt^''^5^, or hp^"3 (inf. cstr. § 31. 9'c). 133 /^ <5^ heavy, severe (st. § 22). — Pi. to make heavy, harden, honour. — Niph. be honoured. 133 I adj., heavy, severe, laden (cstr. 133 and 133. See p. 64). 1133 I m., honour, glory. nb adv. thus. fns 3 m., a priest. § 36. 3313 I ;;/., a star. p3 Qal not in use. — Hiph. X'2r\ to set, establish. — Po'lel |3i3 id. — Niph., Po'lal, pass. § 40. ••3 conj., that, for, because ; of time when, whe?iever. DJ^ ''3 except. \^^ 2 i. m., a prison. § 38. 3p3 2 m., a dog. n73 to be ended (§ 44). — Pi. to complete, finish. — Pu. pass. ^53 2 m., all. § 43. 131"f'3 every- thing ; 131"^3 ♦ ♦ . N^ nothi?tg. |3 adv., so, thus, \yhvi therefore. np3 to cover (§ 44), Qal only in ptc. act. np3 and pass. ^5|D3. — Pi. nD3 to cover. — Pu. pass. np3» I ;;/., a covering. § 45. Pip3 2 ;;/., silver, 7noney. ^13 2 f, palm of hand, sole ; du> § 43. PL oth (metaphorical) § 16. 5- 123 to cover (with pitch). — Pi. "133 to atone. — Pu. pass. IDS 2 m.^ bribe, ransotn. l''Q3 m., young lion. 3113 ;//., cherub. D13 2 ;;/., vineyard. i^piS Carmel, p. 65, note 2. yiS to bend the knee, bo7V down '(§37). ni3 to cut off, cut down. — Niph. pass. nn3 '3 to make a cove- nant. D''lb'3 Chaldeans. 3ri3 to write. — Niph. pass. 5)113 I /, shoulder ; cstr. fins. See p. 64. 196 VOCABULARY. p prep, to, for. See § 14. i. K/> adv. not^ no. 27 2 m., the heart, § 43. PI. oth. ani? I ;«., id. PI. ^//;. 1^^ «/^ i^. § 36. Dn? 2 r., bread. § 36. 2. 3. r\'orh'q, riDnte/, z£;«r. § 29. 3. i);S usually nW with He of «<:f., 2 w., night. PL niW § 41. 137 to take, capture. — Niph. pass. ipi> to learn (st. § 22).— Pi. ^yh to teach. rs'S adv., why 1 (7^ n»). IVpi* conj., prep., /« order that, to ; for the sake of, with infin. and impf (n^V). § 23. 6, § 49- 5- ni5^ to take (§ 33. z).—Impf np^.— Inf. Cstr. nn|5.— Niph. np^} pass.—((d\di) pass. // np_^, /w// njp.;. § 33. 3 c. nip^O m., plunder. pp^ /^ //V>^ (§ 42). Impf. f>\— Pi. /^. pC'i> I /, tongue. IwND adv., very; also 1ND3^ 'd ly. nXD I /, hundred ; du. D^nSO. ilD^i^p a?iything (perhaps = a fleck). n\S?o. See li«. t'3Nn. See ^pK. DND to reject (§36). {5^30 w., the flood {of Noah). ■I3'ip I 771., pasture, desert. TltD ///. Tjtjfe I m., a?igely messenger. r\^\^h^ /, work; cstr. riDsb^p. § 29. 3. I27D Qal not in use. — Niph. to escape. — Pi. to rescue, deliver. HDH^D. See Dn^. T T ; • - T "ilpD to rule, be king ; over, 1^ 7V. — Hiph. to make one king. — Hoph. pass. "iipp 2 m., a king. napo 2/, a queen. n37ipJD, T\'y?tp'0 a kingdom. § 29. 3. CJ'.niJ^ip. See np^^. IP. prep. (§ 14), out of, from, away from; hence of cause by, on account of Suff. § 15. 2. Compar. degree § 47. n3D to count, number, § 44. — Niph. pass. ry\yo. See n^j. nn^p 2 /, a7i offering, present. VDp a journeying (from VpJ). § 33- 4. 15pp 3 w., mourning. § 30. "12pp. See 12p. inrp. See iny. DJ?p 2 ;;/., a ///^/(?, 5\ d;^VP ■^,§>:/'^- Dipp. See Dip. ''iP.P '^ m., a staff, § 30. PI. . T : • - T \2Bm. See DDC>. T : • - T nnac^p 2 /, r/^;?, § 29. 3. [yPi'O to be sweet (st. § 22). pinp I adj., sweet; f ni^inp. §\l. I. W enclitic particle of entreaty; Ki~7S dissuasive. N33 Qal not in use (§ 38). — Niph. to prophesy. — Hithp. id.; also to 198 VOCABULARY. act like ati (ecstatic) prophet^ to rave. «^33 I m.^ a prophet. nnj to bark (§37). t33J Qal not in use (§ 33). — Hiph. D^2n to look, rhy^ 1 f., a corpse^ carcase. V2\ to bubble up ; Hiph. V''3n to pour forth (§ 33). 133 Qal not in use (§ 33).— Hiph. n^an to tell, shew. — Hoph. pass. 133 2 prep., before, in presence of. "Suff. ^133. j;33V^ touch, smite (§ 33, 37). — Pi. id. — Hiph. make to touch, reach to, 3. V33 2 /. m., a stroke, plague. P)33 to smite, defeat (§ 33). — Impf. f]r. — Y{'v^\i. pass. ^^33 Perf. Qal not in use. — Impf. m\ — Perf. in use Niph. t'33 to draw near. — Hiph. to bring near (§33). 13 I ;;/., a fugitive (ptc. of 113 to wander^. -llj to vow (§33). "113, 113 2 ;//., ^ Z'^ze/. 113 I m., a river (§ 36). PI. wi and <^M. m3 to rest (§ 40). — Hiph. n''3il to give rest to \? of person); and r^an to set down, deposit, place ; with waw TMT\\ ni3D I m., resting-place. § 41. DO to flee (§ 40). V^3 to move about (§ 40) ; ptc. ^3 a wanderer. i'n3 to inherit, possess. — Hiph. to inherit. -. — Hoph. to give, pass. "713 /, inheritance. 7113 2 m., torrent, torrent-valley, wady. 013 Qal not in use. — Niph. 013 to 7'epent, to pity i^ ZZ- ^ ^- — Pi. 013 to comfort (§ 36). IJ>'13 \ m., a ser petit. It33 to bend, incline, stretch (§ 33, 44). — Impf. Its"' apoc. D^. — Hiph. id. nrsi, impf. r\\2i\, apoc. ntsp /, a bed. VP3 /^ //a;^/ (§ 33, 37).— Impf. 133 Qal not in use (§ 33, 44). — Hiph. 131^ to smite ; impf. apoc. T]^. — Hoph. /^^j. 13C) /, « stroke. 1D3 I ;^/., ^ leopard. 7]p3 /6> /^?/r ^\ (!? of person). NK^3 to lift up, take up, raise '(§§ ZZ. 38). Impf. m\ Inf. cstr. riNb' (nxb^). Niph./^j-5. Tnj I m., and n3''n: /, /a//^. )nj /<9 ^/ly^, /2^/, account (33. 3 a). Perf. nnj. W3 &c. Impf. jn";. Inf. cstr. nn, ^7\7\^ &c. 33D to turn, turn away (§ 42). — Hiph. to turn (act.). "I3D to shut. — Niph. pass. DID 2 w., a horse; HD^d/ w^zr^. "IID to turn aside, remove, depart (§ 40). — Hiph. to remove, take away. Dpp 1 m., a ladder. T]DD to lean, press upon. — Niph. reflex, to lean. 1VD to sustain, refresh (§ 36). "lap to count, write. — Pi. iSp to recoujtt, declare. isb 3 m., ptc. scribe. "iDp 2 ;//., a book. "lSp?0 !.;«., nu7fiber. "iriD chiefly in Hiph. /^ hide. — Niph. reflex, and pass.^ Hithp. reflex. IDV ^'S)- n^y Hiph., ^^J;^ to testify, bear witness, protest (§ 40). ny I ;//., a witness. IV prep, w^z///, ////. Suff. p. 70. ny Eden. niy adv., still, yet, again (encore). Suff. see p. 136 footnote, py I ;;/., guilt, sin, punishment. ^V\.dth. Dpiy I m., age, eternity; DPiyD frofn of old ; 'y^, 'y ly j'^?^ ^^r. ^^V to fly {% ^o). P]iy 2 ;«., « bird, fowl. "iiy 3 adj., blind. \Vf, she-goat, ^^\. D^^y. §43- 4- T'y 2 ;?z., strength (§ 43). Qty /^ /(?^z;^, forsake (§ 34). — Niph. /a^^. -ity to help (§ 34). -iry 2 ;;/., /^^^. Suff. '•ity. § 34. 4 b. Kiiy Ezra. 200 VOCABULARY. nnOV /, cstr. nntsy crown. I^y 2 /, the eye, du. U\y^V. § 41. PI. ni3^^y wells. T^y 2 /, a 33y for ^J3y. § 3. 3, §7.5. "isy I 7n., dust. % 35. J*y I ;;/., tree. § 18. 3. rv)^^. See YV\ T •• ' - T DVy to become strong, ?iujfierous. DVy 2 f, a bone. PI. hn, oth, 3iy 2 w., evening. \>^V to oppress, injure (§ 34). nii^y /f? ^£?, ze/^ry^, make (§ 34, 44). — Impf. apoc. 'm_. — Niph. HK^yj pass., hut fern. nmvp. i^'^V}^ m., a work. % 45. jC'y to smoke. § 34. ny 2 ^., time. PI. ^w, ^/^. § 43. 4. r\T\yi adv., «6?ze;. nny Qal and Hiph. to pray, entreat. na m., mouth. See p. 153. ''Q'i'y according to. Seep. 129. 31 n '•37 z£^///^ M^ ^^^^ of the sword. riQ 2 m., snare. § 43. K^S 2 /. w., fz wonder. ^>7\vh^ Philistines. D"':Q I w., pi. face, faces. D''3Q7 formerly, ""^th before, ^3Qp ^^- ^r^ me ; p. 69. "}3 conj., lest, with /w// ^ys to do (§ 36); ptc. hvB a worker. hvB 2 m., a work. § 36. n^Q to open (mouth). li^Q to visit, inspect, review. — Niph. pass. — Hiph. to com- 7nit to. I^ips I m., an overseer. llpQ m., a precept. ni?S to open {of eyes &c.) (§ 37). Niph. pass. 13 I m., an ox ; f nna a cow, p. 57, footnote. §43. niQ to be fruitful, bear fruit ^{% 44). VOCABULARY. 20 1 ns 2 m,, fruit. § 45. n'ynS) Fharaoh. yp'S /t7 rebel ; against^ 1, y^3 2 /. ;;/., rebellion^ trans- gression. na 2 /. /;/., ^ morsel, bit. SufF. ••ns. § 43. I. nns to be open (§ 44). — Pi. to entice. — Hiph, to make open, to enlarge ; impf. apoc. ns^. ^ns 2 ;;/., simple. § 45. 3. nnS) to open. § 37. nriB 2 /. m., an opening, door. nnap 3 m., a key, an opening ; cstr. nnao. § 30. (NV 2 ^., a flock (small cattle). i?3V \ m., a host, time of service. ' PI. oth. § 38. 2. pnv to be righteous, just (st. § 22). — Hiph. (Pi.) to justify.— Hithp. to justify oneself. plV 2 i, 7n., righteousness. § 29. i b. nj^nv I /, id. P^'IV righteous, just ; only ;;/^^. I^V /^ /^z//// (§ 40). niv Qal not in use. Pi. njv Z^? C07?i7?iand, charge. Impf. apoc. IV', if'ip- ri.—Vu.pass. §44. mvp/, rt C07nma7id. i^ Zion. ^V 2 ;;/., a shadow. § 43. DpV 2 w., «!;z image, likeness. }hi to halt, limp (§37). vSv I /, 5/^^, rib; cstr. y^V. See p. 114. nm to sprout (§ 37).— Hiph. to make sprout. * n^y 2 /. w., « sprout, braftch. pyv /^ rry out. § 36. |S^" / 2 m., voice, sound. § 41. D^P /(? arise, stand (§ 40, Parad.). — Hiph. to set up, establish. Dp I ptc, standing. § 41. DipO I r., a place. PI. ^Z/^. J^p 2 w., thornbush, thorti. § 41. ;bp /^ be little (st. § 22, Parad.). ibp I adj., ///"// /^^ light, despised (§ 42, Parad.). — Pi. to make light of, to curse. — Hiph. to lighten of. h\>_ I adj., light, swift. § 43. r\Z\> to acquire, buy, possess. § 44. 202 VOCABULARY. r^jpD m., possession, property, cattle. § 45. }'P 2 nu, end. § 43. !^Vp to be angry. "ivp I adj., short. X"ip / to draw near, coine near (st. § 22). — Hiph. to bring near, to offer. ni"li^ I adj., near, neighbour, re- lative. 31 j^ 2 /. ///., inside, heart. "SlpB within me; i^yn 3"ip3 ivithin, in the midst of, the city. § 29. ib. \}p 2/, horn. yip Z^* tear, rend (§ 37), aC'i^ Hiph. to attend, give attention. riK'P 2 f., a bow. nsi /^ see (§ 44).— Impf. HKT, apoc. ^y, Nin &c., but KIM 3 ^-j 3 /» t^'!)^!?^ — Niph. pass., to appear. — Hiph. to shew, two ace. nKi?D w., a sight, appearance, face. § 45. t^♦^^^ 2 ;//., /^^d;^; pi. D*K^«i. § 41- 5- PC^"K"1 2id.]., first, former. § 48. 2. 331 /6? <^^ ;;z^;2y (§42), used only in Perf. and Inf. cstr. 31 I adj., great, much; pi. many. §43- n31 to increase, multiply (§ 44) ; impf. apoc. 31^ and 31^ — Hiph. to 7?iultiply, cause to in- crease. — Inf. abs. n3in ; nnin adv., much. Tni z.^]., fourth. §48. f*3i to lie down (of beasts) (st. § 22). fniD 3 7n., a stall, lair ; cstr. rniD. § 30. PJ1 to slander. ^Ji 2/, afoot, du., p. 1 01. 5)11 to pursue. — Pi. /^. nn 2 ^., breath, wind, spirit. PI. Dn /^ be high, to rise up (§ 40). — Hiph. to lift up. Ex. 40. — Hoph. pass. Di I adj., high, lofty. § 41. DilO I m., height, high place. pi /', slaughter (§ 36, Parad.). nriK' 2 m., dawn. r\rw Qal not in use. — Pi. T\rp to destroy (§ 36). — Hiph. id. ; to act corruptly, to corrupt. — Niph. pass. "i^C' 2 m., a song ; f id. § 41. n^*^ to set, place (§ 40). 33 jr to lie down (st. § 22). n3^ to forget (§ 37). — Niph. pass. ^bt^* to be bereaved (of children) (st. § 22). D3^ ;;z., shoulder. Suff. iDDK'. ISC' to dwell. — Impf. fSK^'^ (§ 22. 2). Hiph. to cause to dwell, place. ^ 204 VOCABULARY. (3C^ I w., dwelling, tabernacle. IDti' to be drimken (st. § 22). rh^ to sefid, stretch out, — Pi. send away ; let go. \rb€* 2 c, a table. "^^ Qal not in use. — Hiph. to cast, cast off. — Hoph. pass. U7^ to be whole, sound (st. § 22). — Pi. to complete, perforin, pay. uy^* I adj., whole, sound. DvK^ I m., soundness, health, peace. rfy^ I adj., three. § 48. D^ adv., there ; HQl^ thither ; um from there, thence. Dw' 3 7n., a name. PI. niDC'. § 30. 2. IDti' Qal not in use. — Hiph. to destroy. — Niph. pass, h^ya^ Samuel. D"'DK' I pi., heaven, heavens. § 16. 5. DDtJ' to be desolate (§ 42). Impf. UV)\ W^ and U'^\ — Hiph. to desolate. — Niph. pass. VO^' to hear, listen to, 3, h, h^ (§ 22). — Niph. /a^j-. VDC^ 2 m., a report. "ipu^ to keep, watch. — Niph. to take heed, beware. — Hithp. to keep oneself. "^6^ 3 ptc, watchman. -iDCnp I m., and nnpc^ /, ward, watch, observance. § 29. 3. C'DtJ' 2 c, the sun. jiC'CK^ Samson. HDC^ I /, a year. PI. D''3K^ (Poet. ' 6th). d;5c' du., two. § 48. ^W I adj., second. % 48. il?L*^ Qal not in use. — Niph. to lean, rest on. lyc^ 2 c, a gate. nnSK^ 2 f, handmaid. nSK^ to judge. — Niph. to litigate. DQb' 3 ptc, a fudge. r\B^ I m., Judg?nent. '^[^'^ to pour out, spill. — Niph. pass. ?pp to be low, abased (st. § 22). i?P'^ to weigh. — Niph. pass. f\p to swarm ; with ace. pK^ 2 m., creeping things. TO^ Qal not in use. — Pi. ni^* to serve, minister (§ 36). r\\>^ See nfext word. nntJ^ to drink (§ 44). — Impf. apoc. V\&. — Niph. pass. — Hiph. npE'n to give drink, to water. np^'o m. ptc, a cupbearer, butler ; also butlership. nnC'p 7n., a feast. ynb^ to be sated, satisfied (st. § 37)^ with, ace. — Hiph. to satisfy ; one with — , two ace. nnb> (Hb* poet.) i ;//., a field. § 45- 3- pnb to laugh (§ 36) ; Pi. to play, sport. nn''b'/, ??ie dilation. D^b to set, place (§ 40). hy^ 2 /. m., understanding. nob^, niDJJ' to rejoice, be glad (§ 37). ' \ VOCABULARY. 205 ft nOB^ adj., glad ^joyful. m^ to hate (§ 38. St.). \\tk? I f.^ lipy edge, bank; du. D^nsb^. pp. 68 f. mb> Sarah. 5)lb^ to burn. — Niph. pass, 5|lb^ I ;;z., a seraph. IK' 1 771., a prince, captain, § 43. n^n i/, «r/5 (:r^ njbtopnn riDbbipn ^J^ppp' ^ib-opn *^p?> ^btopnn : •- : • ^b-bpn ^bppn n;bL:p.n ♦^bi^i?^ njbbprin ♦^;bt2pri ^;^P^ btops . ""^^P? '^W^^ %\i^. ^PP5 btpp ••" btppnn ■ ^ppn '^^P '^^p3pn- 'b^Ppn ^?. wanting ^btppnn iib-tppn wanting ' ^tt^P- nibtapnn rijbbpJi bf^pi ia^-: "^?pn: "i^pp: &c. ^tpp'ii ^^5.15 ^^pr»^!i ^ep?5 rttpp^_ nbtcpnx T : '- : V nybpisi ^W (iap) ^?^P3pn ^"PP'i C=Pi?n) btop, btap 5^'t35. (btpprfi) ^PW fe]?n) ^W^ btjpn^a b'Pp^ 14 ^?1?? 5=«I?a 210 THE VERBAL SUFFIXES. REGULAR VERB. § 31. THE VERBAL SUFFIXES See also suffixes to Qal Rrf. 3 s. m. 3 s./.- 2 s. »i. 2s.f. Suff. ins bt)]5 ^in J?^^I? ^^^P. s, ic, ^pnn? ^?^t)p 'ins \5n5t)p ''P'^btpp ^?^jnV^p' 2^^^- ^15? ^^^1? * ^^5^1? 2/ &c. 1^— t|bt!p ^??^PI? < ♦ 3 m. ibt)ip ^PH- ^nnbpp ^nn-inbtpp ^n^ri^i^p 3/. nb^ii nnb^p ^.3?^??I? T • : - ': pZ. 1 c. ilDbtJp iiDnStjp ^Dnbtip ^^^rhw. 2 m. 'ins Dnbt:p — 2/- P^^I? . — 3w. dbap Dinb^p Dnbtjp D-nbttp 3/. ^bap 1^^9I? TO^^I? rs?bt?p Imp/. 3 s. m. 3 pi. m. Suff. ins-; bbp*; ^btDpl s. 1 c. 'ins^ "S^ipp: 2 m. ^B?: 1?^r. ^'*?p?i?: 2/ ^^' ^btpp*; ^^^?I?: 3 m. ^»i%P: ^^^pp: 3/. (n~) ^'?pp: n^b'tpp": p«.lc. ^^tpp: ^^5btDp^ 2 m. 'ins-' DSbtip^ 'BS^ ds^^pp-; 2/. '\^m IP^^^I?: 3 m. Qbop: D^bpp: 3/ l^tjp: i^^^i?: And so all parts So 2 ;?/. m., of impf. ending and 2, 3 ;?/. /*. in a Consonant, which becomes Imper. s. pi. ins bbp iibpp 'ins ^2^tDp^'ins^D^bt2p T : • •• : 't t: • : <• &c; (n— ) n^t2p as in ili^plj imperf. — plural 1 This column may be also written defectively, e.g. "ani^Dp, &c. 2Thefirstsyll. throughout imperative is half-open, e.g. *33n3. THE VERBAL SUFFIXES. REGULAR VERB. § 31. 211 EEaULAK VEEB. § 31. Lamedh He verbs, p. 229. Qal 3 pi. c. ^bpp 1 s. c. ^nbbp T^t'^I? H^!3Bp t'— ^n^nbop wbQ;: T . . n^ljop '^3^01? DS'rt^l? • • ir^??^]: D-'Fibaip n^bap V'?t'^I? 1^'^i? 2 pi. c. &c. as 3 pi. 1 7;?. c. &c. as 3 pi. Impf. and imper. loith mln energ. Infin. cstr. nns bfap &c. (iifi-:^) ^'btpp ^btpp For the use and meaning of these suff. see § 31. 9 a. The first syll. is half-open: e.g. i2n3^ except before ^ and D3, where it is closed, e.g. ^3n3^ ^^33; cf. §31. 3 c. Pi'el 3 s. m, ibipp nbipp ^Db^p Dbpp 'pbtDp'i It i^?P' 212 PE NUN VERB. § 33. PE NUN VERB. § 33. \l,s Qal Niph. 12:55 Hiph. Hoph. Terf, Sing. 3 m. PJ (^35) Hi i2:5n 3/: 1 I ni?B5 nis^sri 2»*. ntbsD nirin ni2:Sn Imp f. Sing, Zm, b(s)^[] m: fe: ^?|? ti"5! 1255: 3/: \ mr\ bsri &C. i25^ijr) 2m. mT\ bbri 125^5F) 2/: ^irari ^bBT\ •^is^Bn Ic. irsx b^]^ 125^:^^ Plur.Sm. ^m: iibsp: ^tiT 3/: nm'T} njbin njirBn 2/w. iii^sn ^ibsn iii2:^gr) 2/: njirln nsbSn njicln • Ic. 1233? 'be? i2:"'5? /mi?. /Sm^. 2 m. { ;m5?) 12:5 bSD ^?in i2:5n 2/*. j(p 1- ^t2?;i ^^5? ^icjiiri ^ir^?n Plur.2m. 1 • • ; ^T2:si 'lbs? : IT • W5n wanting 2/: n?4 n3bg3 T : : nj^Ssn njirsn /w55. 3 5m^. ^?- ^at«? coTis. -im^. 12:5^5 Cohort. 1 sm^. nir^?x *t;aw; cotis. perf. IT : - T : - Inf. cstr. y(p j5 nTc| b33 : i2:3sn ••T • i2:'^iiri ton ahsol 12:1:^5 bisj t2J:i3n ••T • i2:?n i2:3n Pari. act. 1255b bBb 12535 i2:^?!g pass. wj - — — «5tt PE NUN VERB. § 33. 2 1 3 PE NUN VERB. § 33. Qal Niph. Pass. Qal Perf. Sing. 3 m. F-5 npS ' F? ,npb? 3/-. T :iT "01?^ 2 m. T T ~T i?fTI?> 2/. rn; &c. Ic. X^} Plur. 3 c. 2 m. Dninp 2A Ic. ///i/;/*. Sing. 3 ;?2. in^ n;s: ir!r ."i5|: 3/: l^:?^ njsri 2m. "ji?^ rijsn 2A ^?rin ^npn Ic. T : I •* V nps P/wr. 3 m. iiDFi: iinip": 3/. 2 m. ^DPjFl ^nijri 2/-. U. |P!? ri)?? /m;;. Sing. 2 m. n?n ,1?! nnip ,n)2 2/. ^3n • : TR P/wr. 2 m. !ori iirijp 2/. Juss. 3 s/;^^. in: n;s: wa^^ cons. impf. "jP)"^!! H]?':!! //z/. cs^r. C)h5)''r:n,nri' rfil2,p"5 insn ,npbn rt'^^^. ■,in3 nipi PT! Part. act. irib nR5 pass. "n? n^pb in? 214 PE GUTTURAL VERB. § 34. PE GUTTURATi Qal act. Stat. Niph. P&rf, Sing, 3 m. - r - T 0?)^ pi" Dnn3 i:a3>3 - : V - vflv 3/ T : rr ♦^"3??,? 2 m. ^W, T : - VTi* 2/. mas : t ~ v;iv Ic. • : ~ T • : — vnv Flur. 3 c. : IT : *.T.' 2 m. DP»'7^? Dmayj 2/ ITO 1?7^?=. Ic. '"I^-?,? Z"w^. /S^m^. 3 w. dnn^' ^b?;. 03'^.': P!D; ■iar •• Tl" 3/. " p^tii i523?n 2 m. -: 1- Pit^P ^^jijri 2/ "•1??? 'm^ • : IT •• Ic. VMV pm Piwr. 3 m. Slit]?; ^pio: "?,?:' 3/. T : -: 1- "=P^ni3 n=7»?^ 2 m. Ti^2TT^ : ~ 1" ipjnP : TT •• 2/. *■ : -: »- ^mm ^57^^?^ Ic. nb3?3* ~9r m- •• Tl" Imp. Sing, 2 m. "Tb? pin 2/. '1?? "PTf • : FT •• P^wr. 2 m. : • ^pjn ^^?20 2/. T : ~: 'm T : — T 1'* Juss. 3 «iw^. t«;aw7 coTis. i77ipf. ^*^?^5 pin3 Cohort. 1 siTi^. rn^2Ti< T : V IV 2^;aw; cons. per/. mayi Inf. cstr. ^■■ib? ■ram • T r" absol. •ria? Dinre ni7j?2 Part act. taip oriTO n?i:J3 T : V *vM» pass. ■nny PE 'ALEPH verb. §35. 215 VERB. § 34. PE 'ATiEFH. § 35, Hiph. Hoph. - : T - Tt rr Qa] • : V • vs IV - T T ^« v: IV T : T rr T : - v: IV T : -t; rr ; : - vs IV rn52>^n : : — ■" rr * ; ~ V! IV 'i?ia>'0 . ^"T^b^n : T IT ••• : - v: IV Dn^p^n wm "jr^ip^n : - v: IV b'sik'^ ■ ^'?3?? ^^ii iiiin "^^'^^jp 1^^ bi^p\ ' 'T9?^ -b25in '''^?9 n:a^^ bii ^"1"^?" ^^^2T *5i<^ T : •• -: r T J - t; rr T : •• -: r r : - -n rr ^^^?0 b=N ''1'^?0 ">?« Wi??n wanting *?N nabax ^^?: ■ 'i??3 (taii'*]) bsi^si nTg?i5 nb55< m?D:^m &c. "i*'P?n bbH ^^?\} &c. I'uyn biDX &c. ' n^p?p iJSi* (fee. ^p»3 bwx 2l6 AYIN GUTTURAL VERBS. 36. *AYIN GUTTUKAL Qal Nipli'al Te/rf, Bing. 3 m. tinui (DHD) tiinvp^ Dn? 3/. T ^-: IT npnip 2w. riprtiD T : — : • 2/. : : - T ntsnip? Ic. ''ntpn^ ^npriii:? PZur. 3 c. ^tjriTD 2 m. V : - : '■*:-:• 2/. inprnp Ic. ^5prnc ^spnip? ZmE/l Sing, 3 wi. - : • arils'] DHS"; 3/. t:rnrri •• r • 2 m. t:nipn •• T • 2/. • -: : • • -; IT • Ic. — : V '• T V jPZwr. 3 m. ^t^nip'; ~! rr • 3/. T : - : • T : - T • 2 m, ^tsnizjri -: IT • 2/ T : - : • HDcnisri ■ Ic. t)rnp? - T • Z"m/>. Sing. 2 m. t)n^ • • T • •• T • 2/. Tj^r^ Piur. 2 m. iiontp -: It • 2/ T : - : T : - T • Jms*. 3 5ifi^. t^TO"; (tec. %oaw cons. impf. t:nT2J^i &c. impf. with suff. &c. Inf. cstr. 1 t:TOn Dpin absol. ttinm : • Part. act. t^niD tontp? on: pass. loint!? AYIN GUTTURAL VERBS. § 36. 217 TERES. §36. Pi'el Pu\ ii Hitlip. on? T : T : IT : • ???'^? T : ~ ri^b^nfi . . _ .. ranh : ; - T : • ^ri?^a ■^rDii ■^ran^ri*? ^3:;^ !)i^h : IT ; • : - T : • VT.. •• - : ^'^^: Tinnn-: Dnjn': ^r^nim '::inn ''Snnnn -:n-z iiDnn": : rr : • ns^'^nn nisniri T : - T : • -;rr : ii^nnnn njp^an nj^nhPi T : - T : • ^'^i*? "^■^i? ^r^? •^iia on? iT*).:anr7 onsm • — ; IT . • : IT : • ^^^.5 : rr : • ^m nj^'^nnn ?j"ia on: •jinia DW •qi^nn nnann V^ ifinr? Qn:p ij-jip nnjp ijl^ir^p nn^TO 2l8 LAMEDH GUTTURAL VERBS. § 37. LAMEDH GUTTUEAL Qal Niph. prsi Perf, Sing, 3 w. nbir rtiii? nbip 3/. nnbi^ nribiii? nnbip 2 m. T • ~ T nnbii? nniti 2/. CJ?^-^?) : — : • nn|ii Ic. ^nrSiT &c. &c. PZitr. 3 c. ^nb^ 2 m. onniip 2/. innbii) 1 V : - : . Ic. 5i5nb^ : - T [m^\ Sing. 3 m. nbif: nb'©': nbip': 3/. nbipn nb^n nbirri 2 m. nbiiin nbi|n nbirn 2/. •^nbifiPi •^nbi^n ^nbirn Ic J^b^^ nbi^K nbip^ii^ JYwr. 3 m. ^nbifl'^. iinbig': iinbifl^ 3/. njnbipn n;nbtiri nDn^Tsri 2 m. iinbujn "^nbiin ^nb^n 2/. njnbifin njnb^Fi riDnlipri Ic 'nbipD nbti? "nbTTp Imp. Sing, 2 m. nbuj nbtin - T • TOT23 2/. ^rtii 'r^^^D Piwr. 2 m. ^inbifl ^nb^n 2/. nanbii: T : - : T : - T • Ju«9. 3 sing. waw cons. impf. impf. with suff. • •• T : • &c. Inf. cstr. nbm nb"©*! nVuJ absol. ni^ttf nbip? nV^ Part, act pass. rrh\d nbip? nVp? LAMEDH GUTTURAL VERBS. 37. 219 \^ERBS. §37. Pual Hithp. Tu\i Hbriilin nnlpir nrkrmti nn^^ nnin^n nn^ nn^nipn *&c. * &c. nV©' wanting :nis" nbn^zjn nVtra HipL Hopk t^'^^n nb'fn Ttriipn nnbipn rinbiiin nn^iiin nn^iin nnbipn ■^i^n^Tir] &c. iin'-'bizjn Dnnb'in . l^^r^b^n ^DnbTiin : - : • ^^)t. rh)9l n^bipn n^bipn T')^P» T^^b'm iin^bip:: n;nbip'n wbiijpi njnbifin 6^^"?? nb-'^ri • • : - wanting Jiri'^bipn T : - : - nbiL2 nb'^^) n^^tprr n^tpn nSujn n^^tpn - •• : T nT'iTD' 220 LAMEDH 'ALEPH VERBS. § 38. LAMEDH 'ALEPH Ferf. Sing. 3 w. 3/ 2 m. 2/ Ic. Phir. 3 c. 2/. Ic. Tmjg/; . 3/. nja-^jn 2 m. ^msn . 2/. riDnicFi T : - T • Ic. /'^W.- •• T* /m^. iSin^. 2 f». (ni^) ntp NT' T : (Tflt!) ^1 =i^5rj 2/ ^nip • : IT • Ph*r. 2 m. ^mpjn 2/. njnii? nsnmn Jt*55. 3 5t?2^. waw cons. imp/. ^?!!:] laTsi Cohort. 1 sing. T : 1" Imp/, in a m^A suff. '??T Imper. tin?'^ Infin. cstr. raib V V ^^r' f^?^ =^^3^ ahsol. ai«; T Part. act. STD^ ••T ^t met T pass. n^yj; T23W 1 Very rarely iil\ PE YODH AND PE WAW VERBS. WAW VEEBS. § 39. § 39- 223 Hipli. Hoph. T • T : T : - T : - &c. &c. JIDil' ms^n 31235152 Verbs •> D. Qal Hiph. &c. Verbs assimilating. Qal Niph. Hipb p?: pr. p'?''' n?"; pD^n P'P'F^ pk: prn p'?'?? 'PT^. Tt?? PT^ PT^ ^p'r: VT2 ♦^sprpi ^IpTV} %n ^PT^ ^;pr^ ^;prj? 'pn p.rn ^P*'?''D ^3pro 'p.r: P3i5 P^^^D P5^D P?."*^ P^J^5 pn^: n^^T' n:?! n*'-!:^ 224 AYIN WAW AND YODH VERBS. §40. 'AYIN WAW AND ^ Qal ^ act. . Hat. Perf. Sing. 3 m. 01? J^? iziin 1? 3/. "■tR T •• T njs 2 m. m nrra T : T : - 2/. Rap ra n'f n &c. Ic. ^P?P- 'nb • : Flur, 3 c. raj? ^^'-Q ^i23i:a 2 m. onai? CM V : T 2/. 1^9P- 1^^ Ic. IDPP !i:nb /mp/. ^Siw^. 3 m. o'p: T TDin: r?: 3/ n^ipn Tcinr? r?p 2 m. nnpr ^inr\ l^nn 2/. ^a^pn , ^irnvs ^?^iP Ic. d^px Tiiin^^t r?« Flur, 3 m. ^a>ii3; ^Tsii: >iri; 3/. ns/bipri njipit? T V • , 2 m. ^ijaiipn insiiFi • T 2/. nrr^ipri nDipnt? TV • : Ic. ' MP5 •'^liiiD ■m /mp. /S'JHg'. 2 »». na^ip np nil53 TCill r? 27: "r^'P ^iris "P"? PJtw. 2 »». 113!|p ^^in «'3 2/. "=?p njyji Ju55. 3 5in<7. op: t?; i^;aw? cons. impf. m 1?!^ Cohort. 1 szTi^. na^jjN T • T waw cons. perf. p^pi TO?!) Inf. cstr. n^ip n5i:a •jiin 'i"? dbsol. Dip ni:a .TDiS 1^ Part. act. naR 015 n:? ^in 1? pass. HQIp Dip (l"'a ]ia) 'AYIN WAW and YODH verbs. § 40. 225 YODB. VEEBS. § 40. Niph. Dip; ngip; n&p3 nb^pi ^7jip; Diibip? I' Dip: Dipn DipFl rpipn Dipis; ii^aip"; Hiph. niisTH T '• -: nii2"pn ^nib^pq Dnii2^prj iiDib'pn D^pn D'pn • • • T Hoph. Dp^in nip^n ^mp^in il7Jp^n Drap^n 1^"fP^»^ !i5^piin Dp^" Dp^n Dp^n "ppiin Dpil&< ^:2pil^ Forms of Intens. Act. Pass. Reflex. D?jip Dpip D'jipnn Dp^3p Dpt2p Dptspnn like H'el &c. of the Regular Verb. D^pK Dip: D V5 " Dp^a Q'iprT n^^ipn ,Dprr ^pipn ^ ^r^pn ii52ipn ^^^pn njppri Mjppn ^'tjp; - ni^^prn Dipn D^pn D)?)n Dip: ,DiprT Dpn Dip; D^p^ /. n-?ip3 /. r^2^pi2 Dp^?2 ^ The only examples of 2 p^. have (5, not 4. IS 226 VERBS DOUBLE 'AYIN. § 42. VERES DOUBLE Qal art. itut. Terf. Sing. 3 m. nno (ap) 5^ !«3 3/. nn:;iD (nsp) rtp &c. 2 m. niiap n-fip 2/. r\i:ap nibp Ic. ^ninp ■ni^p Plur. 3 c. 1150 (^p) ■^^P 2 m. Dninp Dnibp 2/. •nino ir"fep 1 c. ^Dinp !i;-;^p Jm^/. Sing. 3 jn. nb: nb': ^: ba-: 3/. nbn nbn bpn ban 2?w. nbn nbn bpn ban 2/. •'laop '"??^' ii^^ "^sn 1 c. nb^ nb^^; k^ bas - V Piwr. 3 w. iiiab; "^T- i^K • • 3/. T V •• : T : • ~r)pri n:b&ri 2 m. ^rncn ?inpn i^RFi !ib:2ri 2/. HD^aon njnon nr^pn HDbrn Ic. nc: 7 ' nb? ' ■•'bp? ^'i?? Imp. Sing. 2 m. lb 2/ 3*6 Flv/r. 2 »H. • ab 2/. T V T Ju5s. 3 sing. sb; nb: ip.-: &C. waw cons. impf. T T- nb^i bp.'? Cohort. 1 sing. T T •^???^ &c. waw cons. per/. niaoi Inf, csir. nb ip5>p ahsol. 7 b*i? Part, act nnic n^ il? pass. zho VERBS DOUBLE 'AYIN. § 42. 227 'AYIN. § 42. Kiph. Hiph. Hopli. ^95 -PD np^n T -T nncn T •• •• nnp^n T • -: T - r^inpp nimpn &c. •'ninpi: -^ninpn iinc; ^=^cn onispD Dnizcn • -: V^^^i iri^'^PO ^3iSipD • -: np": 3D^ no-' no-^ nor npn non •• T *&c. npn -PJ? ^npn • •■ T npK -?^ iiinp-; ^^p; nrapn T V • : tiinpn ^npn nr^prn nrnon T V • ; np? nD3 •• T npn ^?n ''npn • •• T iQpn •• T n5"2[pn nriapn no; V T- ipri ^pn np^n nisn ^P?? nnp3 -CD n^p'a npr -r Forms of Intens. Act. Pass. Reflex. bbip bVip bbipnn bpbp bp^J5 S?.^i20rT like I^'el &c. in the Regular Verb. 228 LAMEDH HE (LAM. YODH AND WAW) VERBS. § 44. LAMEDH HE (LAM. YODH Qal Nipb. prei Pual Perf. Sing. 3 m. T T ^^^7 nb? nba 3/. nnba ^^^?? nnb? nnba 2 m. i?li n^i? n'^^ n^?' 2/. rcba &(:. n-'bjD &cl '* &c: Ic. ^n^^a -n^bjD Plur. 3 c. ^ ^b^D 2w. orrbj QO'5??? 2/. F'i? 1D^^^? Ic. ir^a ^rb;i?' imp/. /S*7i^. 3 m. ^^r. nb?: n>3: risr 3/. nbari nbsn • J V \l 2 m. nban nbsn 2/. '>fFi ^b^n 1 c. nbas ^ba^5 Plur. 3 m. & ^ 3^ "5l?i? HD'ban 2 m. iibn iib^n 2/ "3l?P ^r^5^ 1 c. nba] '^? /"mp. /i?iw(7. 2 ?u. nba bsn nbsn % nba — 2/: ■ba ^^?n PZwr, 2 m. *i ^ibsn 2/. nj'ba •^r^?*:' «7u«$. 3 ^^. m. &c. 'b?' ba: ba-; waw cons. impf. &c. ba^i waw cons. perf. n-^ba'j oi??j Ifif, cstr. niba nibsn niba niba ahsol. n'b? nb?? nba nba Part, act. nb— nbb ^^?? rhx} ••. pass. n;^'b3 ^iib3 nbap Stat. Slip — f'Xp 1 1 pi. Niph. always L LAMEDH HE (LAM. YODH AND WAW) VERBS. § 44. 2 29 AND WAW VEEBS. § 44. Hitlip. Hiph. Hoph. Sufl&xes. rtsnn nbi^in nb^n PeTf. Sing. 1 c. ^3- ■f ^3^3 nnknn nnb?n r.nbjH 2??i. ^ "TO'^?Jp»^ T "IT 2/. 3w. 3/. PZur. 1 c. 2 m. 2/. 3wi. nba TT ^=>a Dba nban^ rty V I- V : T 3/. Jmpf. Sing. 1 c. 2 i>i. 2/. 3j». . 3/. Plur. 1 c. 2JW. 2/. 3»H. T V : • .. . . Db:^'' )a— nbam i'jn nb?n 3/. ■* .. — J • J^Hjp. iSill^. 1 C. 3 m. w^a 1 3/. nba T V : i?r^': bi^ PZur. 1 c. «^? ■'^l 3 m. D?a nibann nib:jin nib?ri rk^ri nb?r; nb?n nban^a n??^ nb?? 2 1 sing. Pi. Hiph. Hithp. usually e, probably to avoid the threefold i ; e.g. "-n^^a. THE ACCENTS. 1. Of the accentual signs soiiie stand above, and some below the word ; when above, the sign stands upon the initial cons, of the accented syll., as Wb ; when below, it stands after the vowel of the sylL, as U]'0^ except in the case of holem and skureq, when it is placed under the conson., as Di^, nn. When the accented syll. begins with two conss. the sign is put on the second. A few signs are restricted to particular positions, such as the initial or final letter of a word, and do not indicate the Tone syll. 2. The Accentual system.'^ The Accentual system is very intricate and in some parts obscure. A brief outline of its uses as a means of inter- punction will here suffice : — a) The text is broken into verses, P'si^qiin^ and the end of each Pasi)q is marked by the sign :, called Soph pasuq (end of the verse). The accent on the final word is called Silluq^ its sign being like Methegh. \yy^r\ Gen. I. I. b) The greatest logical pause within the verse is indicated by a sign ^ called "Athndh "breathing," or "rest" \r'\''\b rpl^ . • • • Gen. I. 7. d) If the clause of words lying between Silluq and 'Athnah, or between 'Athnah and Segolta, or between 'Athnah and the beginning of the verse, Segolta being absent, requires to be divided by a pretty large pause, this is in all these cases marked by a sign ' called Zdqeph qdtdn^ resembling simple sh'^wa placed over the word,^ as, : ^"^xh h'-^yo D'»Gn D'-H^K Gen. I. 6. •iTT • : - -AT- • v: ^ The accents described in a) — f) are kno^vn as disjunctives. * The sign '• called z. gddhdl^ of the same distinctive power, is used when its word is the only word in the accentual clause : as pH^Hp Gen. I. 14. THE ACCENTS. 23 1 e) R'bhia\ in appearance like holem^ but standing higher, often indi- cates subdivisions within zaqeph sections : as, : n^"'^n .... D''DK'n . . . ^""fh^ ^»n»i Gen. 1. 14. t:at- • - t - • v: f) A distinctive of less power than Zakeph is Tiphhd^ which marks a pause which the rhythm requires as a preliminary to the great pauses indicated by Silluq and 'Athnah. Its sign ^ is a line bent backwards, as, \y'\'^r\ .... D^DK^n .... D^n"^« .... n^ti'«i3 . . . Gen. 1. 1. ' viT T 'V-T - A- v: V •• : g) These are the main distinctive accents, and by stopping at them, as at the points in modern languages, the reader will do justice to the sense. Very roughly {a) may be said to correspond to our full stop (.), ib) to our colon (:), {c\ {d) and (^^ 89, 91 f. Interjections . . .169 Interrogative pro- nouns 48 ; par- ticles . . . . 167 f. Intransitive vbs. Irregular nouns Irregular vbs. 73 Italian . . . Job 3 26 Jussive . Knhibh . 80 153 f- II2ff. 23 • 143 83, 158 . 41 Lamedh 'aleph vbs. I24f. ; lam. gutt. I22f. : lam. he 143 f. Light suffixes . . 67 Luke I. 1-4 . Mappiq , . Maqqeph . 3 Massora . . Mat. 27. 28-30 Matres lectionis Mer'^kha . . Methegh . . Monosyllables i^^ deck . . Moods . . . Munah . . . 33, 33 40 • 13 . 2f. . II • 231 38 f. of . 65 . 72 . 231 TV assimilated . . Negative, place of, 233 Page 49 ; with inf. 145 ; prohibition ... 83 Niph'al ... 89 f. Nominal sentences 49 Numerals . . . 163 f. Nun energicum . .110 Oaths 168 Omission of dagh. forte .... 32 f. Ordinal numerals . 165 Participle, 78, 81, I59f. ; with suff. . no Particles .... 167 Passive 90, 92, 96 ; .... 78, 114, 142 Pasuq 230 Pathah furtive . . 34 Pause .... 40 f. Pe 'aleph vbs. 11 of.; pe gutt. 115 f.; pe nun ii3f.; pe waw I27f. ; pe yodh I28f. Perfect, 72, 74 ; of statives 81, 156; uses of . 133, 155 f- Pi'el .... 91 93 Pilpel ... .93, 132 Pitman 5 Plural 55 f. Po'el 139 Po'lel 132 Potential (impf.) . 158 Prepositions . . 50-52 Pronominal suffixes 66-69; to a, f), 51; to ip, 53; to 7X, ^% Py, 70 ; to nx (ace), 75 ; to PN, iiy, 136; to riN, Dy, r\lT\, 142 ; to nnn, 121 ; to vbs. . . . 106-111 Pronouns, personal 234 INDEX OF SUBJECTS Page 45 ; demonstrative 46 ; relative 47 f. ; interrogative 48 ; indefinite, 48 ; re- ciprocal, reflexive 90, 93, 150; pro- nouns repeated for emphasis . . . 142 Prophetic perfect 1 56 f. Prosthetic 'aleph 23, 163 Pure long vowels 8, 1 1 Pure short vowels . 10 Qal 71 Q*re 41 Quadriliterals . . i Questions .... 168 Quiescent letters 37 f. /?, affinity of r with gutturals . . 35 f., 42 f. R^bhia' .... 230 Recession of tone . 41 Reciprocal action • • • . 90, 93. 150 Reflexive action 90, 93 Relative pronouns 47 f. Root of vb. .49, 53»7i Scriptio defectiva, plena 20 S^ghol possibly tone - long and pure long 17, 25, 100 Segholate nouns 99f-» 135 ; seg. fe- minines 102 f.; seg. infin. . . . 114, 128 S^gholta .... 230 Sentences, nominal and verbal ... 49 Sh'^wa simple, com- posite 9, I7f., 26f., 28 f.; at beginning Page of word or syllable 23 ; silent ... 23 Shifting of tone . 40 f Shorthand ... 5 Sievers .... 22 Silluq ... 71, 230 Soph pasuq . . .231 Sound of letters . 5-7 Stative vbs. 80 ; impf. 131, 138 ; pf. 81, 156 Suffixes, light, heavy 67 ; pronominal 66-69 j verbal 106 ff. Superlative degree 161 Syllables, closed, open 21 ; half- open ... 22, 28 f. Syntax relatively simple .... 2 Tenses 72 ; pf. 74 f., ihipf. 76 f. ; Syntax ofpf. 155 f.; impf. 157 f. Textual Vocalization I9f. Thinning of a to i 10, 28, 102, 141, 149 Third decl. analogy with vbal sufT. to impf. .... 108 f. Tiphha 231 Tone 24-29 ; tone- long vowels 8 f., 26, 63, 99 f., 128, 131, 138 ; tone re- tracted 41, 85 ; thrown forward . 85 Transitive vbs. . . 80 Unchangeable vowels 8, 11,25,36,134 Verbal adjectives 81 ; v. inflection Page 29, 74 ; V. sentence 49 ; V. suffixes io6ff. Verbs assimilating i^* radical 113, 129 ; vbs. of filling &c, 2 accus. (96) . 126 Vowels changeable 25 f. ; heterogene- ous 38, 136 ; his- tory of V. system I3f. ; homogene- ous II, 38 ; in- distinct 9, I7f., 26 f., 28 f ; insert- ed (/ in impf., 6 in pf.) 132, 139; V. letters 10-12 ; not indispensable 5, pure long 8, 11,25 ; short 10 ; sounds 8-10 ; tone - long 8f.; 26, 63, 99 f., 128, 131, 138 ; un- changeable 8, II, .... 25, 36, 134 Waw consonantal and vocalic 37 ; final w passing into unaccented it ..... 145, 149 Waw (conjunction) 44» 53 ; ^v. consec. .... 84-86, 159 Weak vbs. 1 1 2 ff"., 1 5 1 f. Y consonantal and vocalic 37 ; final _>/ passing into ac- cented I . 147 f., 149 Yahweh . . 41, 46, 49 Zaqeph gadhol, Z. qaton 230 Zeph. I. 10 ... 13 INDEX OF HEBREW WORDS. Page ]ilS (sec lord). . i8o D^^ns 189 TX ' 157 'C"^, "•^C^ . -435153 |;V(with'suff.) 136, 186 ^S (with suff.) . . 70 ^&{|(neg.) ... 83 D"'n'^S (\vithprepos.)5i Di< (in oaths, questions) . . 168 n,n cohort. and imper. Page 167 -irs: . . . -ns (ace.) 49 ; suff. . . "DN (prep.) suff. . . ith with 47 75 142 3 (with suff.) . . 51 it:^J<3 102 n:3 190 ^3 (between) 172, 190 111 . . . emph -TT nan (with n^3n, n^3n ^riiyn • mnntrn T": I' : • iJ2m • su 136, ina .... n^ta . . . ■ s^a • • • ■ D^^ca . . . iniaa 65 120 65 153 64 65 24 141 ~ T" XDn • n^n . nWn . T • T -in'-n 79, "^^l nvi « . . 92 128 DID • DV . C)D"' Hiph ff.) 83,84 . 147 . 142 . 133 . 133 . no • 145 85, 119 . 148 34, 131 f- 24, 147 . . 145 . . 24 87, 193 . . 148 ^'> (with suff.) ^m\ . . . 1*3^' • • • in^. . . . 3 (with suff.) ins . . . DB3 . . . DS ^3 . . . iD3 . . . Page 103 130 33 80 114 87 . 64 92 . 168 . 87 ^KD3 33 133 fina h (with suff.) . . ^ (of agent, w-ith . . 36 . . 157 . . 80 41, 46, 49 137, 153 . • 57 adv.) 129 . . 114 . . 33 . . 64 pass.) . . nbs^ . . • n3^, -ns^ . ]VD^ 86, 158, nrh . • • Sh 92 64 51 90 83 119 128 [68, 200 . 114 n^-^l 1^4 {see side), 195 2^5 ?3 preform, (with nouns) 105, 134, 141 ; with ptc. . >p, no' ... . |D 5i;withsuff.53; in comparisons . Dn3 in3. 98 33 48 161 113 113 114 236 INDEX OF HEBREW WORDS. Page n^aD (with SLiff.) . 1 68 ^b}v 117 ny (with suff.) . . 70 "liy (with suff.) . 136 • • 34 137 70 142 '"It^ . . . • ]]v\dt^. and//.) i)y (with suff.) . DV (with suff".) . 149 mi . . T : Page 128 161 141 125 118, 165 . . 128 . . 125 Page inb^ 149 ••ntDc^ ..... 81 n2^ 128 D^n^K^ .... 57 D""^^ .... 161 DW 163 nnri (with suff.) .121 Printed hy Morrison & Gibb Limited, Edinburgh v> . *»- 1° JP 14 DAY USE RETURN TO DESK FROM WHICH BORROWED LOAN DEPT. This book is due on the last date stamped below, or on the date to which renewed. Renewed books are subject to immediate recall. KbC'U U) JUN2b'65-liAM K-IV 'a,v^ D£CiOit)7Ux «^ , (^ , lb^ r f/4 A ^^/H« ^% v& / HEn'DLD FEB^ 9 72 -1 AM 4 8 OtC 2 1 1979 NOV 5 1985 fi- CC is c JAN 2 1 9 80 MAY 2 6 19 LD 21A-60m-3.'65 (F2336sl0)476B um^MiMl I California Berkeley 9 Mtr^65IM LD 21-lf GENERAL LIBRARY - U.C. BERKELEY BD0Da3bSSE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY